TXTextControl

Callback function for functions which add a comment.

Callback function for functions which add an editable region.

Callback function for functions which add a footnote.

Callback function for functions which add a subtextpart.

The ApplicationField object supports text field formats of applications such as Microsoft Word.

Gets the field's format.

Gets the field' parameters. The order and format of the strings depend on the field's format. For example a Microsoft Word MergeField has the following format: MERGEFIELD FieldName [switches]. In this case the first string of the array is the FieldName and the following strings are possible switches. The string MERGEFIELD is the type name of the field and can be obtained through getTypeName. If a field has no parameters, this array is null.

Gets the field's type name. The type name of a Microsoft Word MergeField is MERGEFIELD, for example. If the type name of the field is changed, its parameters must also be changed.

Sets the field's format.

Sets the field's parameters.

Sets the field's type name. The type name of a Microsoft Word MergeField is MERGEFIELD, for example. If the type name of the field is changed, its parameters must also be changed.

Contains all created or imported Microsoft Word fields represented through objects of the type ApplicationField.

Inserts a new application field at the current input position.

Gets the field at the current input position or null, if there is no such field at the current input position.

Removes a field of the type ApplicationField from a TX Text Control document. The visible text is deleted depending on the keepText parameter.

The Barcode object provides methods to specify the type and format of barcodes.

Gets an additional text that is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Gets the alignment of the barcode image inside the control.

Gets the angle of the barcode image inside the control.

Gets the background color of the barcode control.

Gets the type of barcode that is rendered.

Gets the foreground color of the barcode control.

Gets a value indicating whether the encrypted barcode text value is displayed below or above the barcode image or not.

Gets the text encrypted by the barcode.

Gets a value indicating whether the barcode text and additional text is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Gets the maximum text length.

Saves the barcode image.

Sets an additional text that is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Sets the alignment of the barcode image inside the control.

Sets the angle of the barcode image inside the control.

Sets the background color for the barcode control.

Sets the type of barcode that is rendered.

Sets the foreground color for the barcode control.

Sets a value indicating whether the encrypted barcode text value is displayed below or above the barcode image or not.

Sets the text the barcode should encrypt.

Sets a value indicating whether the barcode text and additional text is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Sets the maximum text length.

Callback function for a barcode related event.

Contains all barcodes in a document represented through objects of the type BarcodeFrame.

Creates and inserts a new barcode which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored barcodes are moved with the text.

Inserts a new barcode which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified location relative to the paragraph it is anchored to and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored barcode are moved with the text.

Creates and inserts a new barcode which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a location relative to the top left corner of the complete document. All gaps between the pages must be included.

Inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page.

Creates and inserts a new barcode inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The barcode is inserted at the specified text input position.

Inserts a barcode with the built-in mouse interface. The barcode's size is determined through the end-user. A cross cursor indicates where the barcode can be inserted. Changing the document aborts the insertion process.

Gets the barcode selected by the user or the barcode with the specified identifier.

Gets the barcode with the specified name.

Removes a barcode.

The event argument for barcode related events.

Information about the barcode's frame.

A BarcodeFrame object represents a barcode and its layout in a Text Control document.

Refreshes the barcode.

The barcode control associated with the barcode frame.

The BarcodeTypeSettings object provides methods to apply barcode type specific settings.

Gets a value indicating whether the currently used barcode type includes a check value.

Gets a value indicating whether the check value of the currently used barcode type is shown with the encrypted barcode text value.

Sets a value indicating whether the currently used barcode type includes a check value.

Sets or sets a value indicating whether the check value of the currently used barcode type is shown with the encrypted barcode text value.

Callback function that provides data for the CannotTrackChange event.

Callback function for a chart related event.

The event argument for chart related events.

Information about the chart's frame.

The CheckFormField object represents a checkbox in a document.

Gets a value indicating whether the checkbox is in the checked state.

Gets the character which is used to display the checkbox in the checked state.

Gets the character which is used to display the checkbox in the unchecked state.

Sets a value indicating whether the checkbox is in the checked state.

Sets the character which is used to display the checkbox in the checked state.

Sets the character which is used to display the checkbox in the unchecked state.

Callback function for check form field events.

The event argument for check form field related events.

The check form field.

Information about a check form field.

The checked state of the check box.

Callback function for the clipboardDataTransferAborted event.

Callback function for the clipboardDataTransferComplete event.

Callback function for the clipboardDataTransferProgress event.

Callback function for the clipboardDataTransferStart event.

Callback function for the clipboardModeChanged event.

The event argument object for the clipboardModeChanged event.

The clipboard mode.

The event argument object for the ClipboardDataTransferAbortedCallback callback.

Unique ID string of the aborted transfer.

The event argument object for the ClipboardDataTransferCompleteCallback callback.

Unique ID string of the completed transfer.

The event argument object for the clipboardDataTransferProgress event.

The unique transfer ID string.

The progress of the clipboard data transfer in percent.

The event argument object for the clipboardDataTransferStart event.

The unique transfer ID string.

Provides methods for accessing collections.

Returns the element at a specified index in the collection.

Executes a callback function for each element.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

The type of the response parameter of the AddCommentCallback callback function.

Indicates whether the comment was added successfully.

The added comment.

Contains all comments in the main text or another part of a document.

Creates a comment with the specified comment string. The current text selection defines the commented text.

Creates a comment with the specified comment string, start position and length.

Creates a reply to an existing comment using the specified comment string.

Gets the Comment containing the current text input position from the collection.

Gets the next comment in the text flow.

Gets the previous comment in the text flow.

Removes a comment from the collection.

Event argument for comment related events.

Information about the comment.

Callback function for a comment related event.

A CommentedText object represents a commented piece of text.

Gets whether the comment is currently active or not.

Retrieves the comment text.

Gets the date and time when the comment has been inserted as a Unix timestamp in milliseconds. The time is a Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Gets the highlight color for the comment as a CSS color string.

Gets a value indicating whether the comment is highlighted.

Gets an identifier for a comment.

Gets the number of characters which belong to the comment.

Gets the comment's number. The first comment in the document has the number 1. The number is defined through the textflow. Commented text with a smaller start position has a smaller comment number.

Gets the comment for which this comment is a reply. When this comment is not a reply, null is returned.

Gets all replies of this comment or null if there are no replies.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the comment.

Gets the comment's text.

Gets the name of the user who has commented the document. This parameter can be null or an empty string to indicate that an unknown user has made the comment.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of a comment and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Sets whether the comment is currently active or not.

Sets the comment text.

Sets the highlight color for the comment. Accepts CSS color strings.

Sets a value indicating whether the comment is highlighted.

Sets an identifier for the comment.

Information about a comment.

Comment activation state.

The comment text.

Creation time as a Unix time stamp in milliseconds.

Highlight color as a CSS color string.

The comment's highlight mode.

The comment's identifier.

The comment's length in characters.

The number of the comment in the document's text flow.

The comment's 1-based start position in the document.

The name of the user who made the comment.

Component settings.

The ID of the editor container DIV element.

Optional. Event handler which is fired as soon as the document editor scaffolding has been inserted into the DOM.

Optional. The document editor settings.

Optional. Replace the container element instead of appending ourselves to it as a child.

The WebSocket URL.

The event argument for context menu related events.

Set this to true to suppress the context menu.

Context menu items (see ContextMenuItem).

A binary combination of ContextMenuLocation values.

Callback function for context menu related events.

A context menu item.

Optional. The custom menu item's click handler callback function.

Optional. Set this to true if the item's child menu should be scrollable.

Optional. The menu item's icon image URL.

Optional. Specifies whether the menu item has a check mark symbol in front of it.

Optional. Specifies whether the menu item is enabled or not.

Optional. The child menu items.

The menu item text.

Context menu item click event arguments.

Set this to true to prevent the click from being sent to the backend.

The clicked context menu item.

Context menu item click handler function.

An object of this type is returned by the function getCultures.

The control's culture.

The control's user interface culture.

A DateFormField object represents a date field on a form.

Gets the DateFormField's date.

Gets the date's format. For a certain DateFormField the format string should be one of the strings returned through the getSupportedDateFormats function. A TextControl uses Day, Month, Year, and Era Format Picture strings to format a date. When this date's format is an empty string, which is the default value, a default format is used depending on the culture set for the date field's text.

Gets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the date formfield, when it is empty.

Gets an array of format picture strings which can be used to format the date. The returned format strings depend on the culture set for the date field's text. A TextControl uses Day, Month, Year, and Era Format Picture strings to format a date.

Sets the DateFormField's date.

Sets the date's format. For a certain DateFormField the format string should be one of the strings returned through the getSupportedDateFormats function. A TextControl uses Day, Month, Year, and Era Format Picture strings to format a date. When this date's format is an empty string, which is the default value, a default format is used depending on the culture set for the date field's text.

Sets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the date formfield, when it is empty.

Callback function for date form field events.

The event argument for date form field related events.

The date form field.

Information about a check form field.

The date as a Unix time stamp in milliseconds.

The date format.

The horizontal width of the empty field in twips.

Contains the file name and the current "loaded" state of a dictionary.

The dictionary file name.

Indicates whether the dictionary is currently loaded.

Frame distances in twips.

The bottom distance in twips.

The left distance in twips.

The right distance in twips.

The top distance in twips.

Document editor settings.

Optional. The unique ID of this connection.

Optional. Sets whether a right click opens a context menu or not.

Optional. The culture.

Optional. Custom query parameters.

Optional. Sets whether the document's text is read-only, can be selected or is editable.

Optional. The name of a printer the text dimensions and capabilities of which are used to format the document.

Optional. Time in seconds before stopping reconnection attempts after a connection loss.

Optional. The user interface culture.

Optional. An array of names specifying users who have access to editable regions.

The DocumentLink object represents a text position in a Text Control document that is a target of a document link.

Gets the type of auto-generation. A document link in a table of contents is automatically generated when the table of contents is inserted into the document.

Gets an object of the type DocumentTarget specifying to where the link points.

Sets an object of the type DocumentTarget specifying to where the link points.

Callback function for document link related events.

The DocumentLinkCollection contains a collection of document links .

Adds a new document link to the collection.

Removes all document links from the collection.

Gets the document link at the current text input position or the document link with the specified id.

Removes the link from the collection.

The event argument object for document nink related events.

Information about the document target the link points to.

Callback function for the documentLoaded event.

The event argument object for the documentLoaded event.

The file name of the loaded document.

The type of the documentPermissions property.

Specifies whether document content can be copied to the clipboard.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether form fields can be filled in.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the document can be formatted.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether formatting styles can be used to format the document.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the document can be printed.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the document is read only.

The DocumentSettings class provides properties which inform about general document settings, such as author and title, contained in the document the user is currently working on (see TXTextControl.documentSettings).

Gets the author of the current document.

Gets the document's creation date as a unix timestamp.

Gets the application, which has created the current document.

Gets a file path that is used to search for resources like images or hypertext links.

Gets the current document's keywords. The property value is null, if there are no keywords contained in the document.

Gets the subject string of the current document.

Gets the title string of the current document.

Gets an object with all user-defined document properties contained in the current document.

Sets the author of the current document.

Sets the document's creation date as a unix timestamp.

Sets the application, which has created the current document.

Sets a file path that is used to search for resources like images or hypertext links.

Sets the current document's keywords.

Sets the subject string of the current document.

Sets the title string of the current document.

Sets an object with all user-defined document properties contained in the current document.

Gets a collection of all files embedded in the document.

The DocumentTarget object represents a text position in a Text Control document that is a target of a document link.

Gets the type of auto-generation. A document target which is the target of an entry in a table of contents is automatically generated when the table of contents is inserted into the document.

Gets whether a document target can be deleted by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Gets an identifier for a document target.

Relates a user-defined name to a document target.

Gets the one-based number of the document target in the document.

Gets the first character position (one-based) of a document target.

Gets the name of the document target.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of the document target and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Sets whether a document target can be deleted by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Sets an identifier for the document target.

Sets the name of a document target.

Sets the name of the document target.

The DocumentTargetCollection contains a collection of targets.

Adds a new document target to the collection.

Removes all document targets from the collection.

Gets a value indicating whether a new document target can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets the document target at the current text input position or the document target with the specified id.

Removes the target from the collection.

Information about a document target.

The name of the document target.

Callback function for events related to a drawing.

The event argument for drawing related events.

Information about the drawing frame.

An EditableRegion object represents an editable region in a document.

Gets the highlight color for the editable region.

Gets a value indicating whether the editable region is highlighted.

Gets an identifier for a editable region.

Gets the number of characters which belong to the editable region.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the editable region.

Gets the editable region's text.

Gets the name of the user who can edit the region. This parameter can be null or an empty string to indicate, that no user name has been specified and the region can be edited by everyone.

Saves this editable region in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of an editable region and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Sets the highlight color for the editable region.

Sets a value indicating whether the editable region is highlighted.

Sets an identifier for the editable region.

Sets the name of the user who can edit the region. This parameter can be null or an empty string to indicate, that no user name has been specified and the region can be edited by everyone.

Callback function for events related to an editable region.

The type of the response parameter of the AddEditableRegionCallback callback function.

Added editable region.

Contains all editable regions in the main text or another part of a document.

Adds a new editable region to the document. Its position is defined through the start and length parameters. If the editable region's length is zero, the current text selection is used to define the position.

Gets all editable regions at the current text input position. The callback returns null, if there is no region at the current input position.

Removes an editable region from the collection. The region's text is not removed.

The event argument for editable region related events.

The editable region's identifier.

The number of characters which belong to the editable region.

The index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the editable region.

the name of the user who can edit the region.

The EmbeddedFile class represents a file embedded in another document.

Gets the file's creation date as a unix timestamp.

Gets the file's data as a base64 string.

Gets an optional file description.

Gets the file's name.

Gets the date the file was last modified as a unix timestamp.

Gets an optional string specifying the file's type using types specified through the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) specification. When a file is embedded and a type is not specified the default type application/octet-stream is used.

PDF/A only. Gets an optional string describing the relationship of the embedded file and the containing document. This string can be a predefined value or should follow the rules for second-class names (ISO 32000-1, Annex E). Predefined values are "Source", "Data", "Alternative", "Supplement" or "Unspecified".

Sets the file's creation date as a unix timestamp.

Sets an optional file description.

Sets the date the file was last modified as a unix timestamp.

Sets an optional string specifying the file's type using types specified through the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) specification. When a file is embedded and a type is not specified the default type application/octet-stream is used.

PDF/A only. Sets an optional string describing the relationship of the embedded file and the containing document. This string can be a predefined value or should follow the rules for second-class names (ISO 32000-1, Annex E). Predefined values are "Source", "Data", "Alternative", "Supplement" or "Unspecified".

Represents a collection of embedded files.

Adds an embedded binary file to the collection.

Adds an embedded text file to the collection.

Removes the embedded file at the given index.

Callback function for empty requests.

Encapsulates information about an error.

Specifies whether the error has been handled.

The error message.

Callback function for handling errors.

Callback function for events which do not have event arguments.

Callback function for the fileDropped event.

The event argument object for the fileDropped event.

Set this property to true to cancel the event.

The file name of the dropped file.

The size of the file in bytes.

The MIME type of the file.

A Footnote object represents a footnote in a TextControl document.

Sets the current text input position in the footnote section at the end of the current footnote text, so that the text can be edited or formatted.

Gets the highlight color for the reference mark and the footnote mark.

Gets a value indicating whether the reference mark and the footnote mark is highlighted.

Gets a user-defined identifier. It must be a one-based value. A value of zero indicates that the footnote has no identifier.

Gets the footnote's name. An empty string indicates that the footnote has no name.

Gets the footnote's number in the text. The first footnote in the document has the number 1. The number is defined through the textflow.

Gets the number of characters the reference mark consists of.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character of the footnote's reference mark.

Scrolls the beginning of the footnote mark into the visible part of the document using a default position depending on the previous position.

Scrolls the beginning of the footnote mark into the visible part of the document using the specified position.

Sets the highlight color for the reference mark and the footnote mark.

Sets a value indicating whether the reference mark and the footnote mark is highlighted.

Sets a user-defined identifier. It must be a one-based value. A value of zero indicates that the footnote has no identifier.

Sets a name for the footnote. An empty string indicates that the footnote has no name.

Callback function for events related to a footnote.

The type of the response parameter of the AddFootnoteCallback callback function.

Indicates whether the footnote was added successfully.

The added footnote.

Contains all footnotes in a Text Control document.

Adds a new footnote with the given text to the document at the current input position. A footnote consists of a reference mark in the document and the footnote itself appearing at the bottom of the page.

Gets the default highlight color for the reference mark and the footnote mark.

Gets a value indicating whether all the footnote numbers, reference marks as well as footnote marks, in the document are highlighted.

Gets the footnotes' number format.

Gets the number for the first footnote.

Removes a footnote from a Text Control document.

Sets a value indicating whether all the footnote numbers, reference marks as well as footnote marks, in the document are highlighted.

Sets the footnotes' number format.

Sets the number for the first footnote.

The event argument for footnote related events.

The footnote's highlight color.

The footnote's highlight mode (see TXTextControl.HighlightMode).

The footnote's identifier.

The footnote's name.

The footnote's 1-based number in the text flow.

The footnote's reference mark length in characters.

The footnote's 1-based reference mark start position.

Callback function for the forEach function of a collection.

Represents a form field.

Gets a value indicating whether the form field is enabled.

Sets a value indicating whether the form field is enabled. This property has only an effect, when the when the edit mode is set to TXTextControl.EditMode.ReadAndSelect and the allowEditingFormFields property of the document permissions has been set to true. In this case a Formfield can only be edited, when its Enabled property is true. When a FormField is disabled, the TextFieldClicked and TextFieldDoubleClicked of the Formfield are suppressed. The default value of this property is true.

The FormFieldCollection contains all form fields in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Adds a new CheckFormField.

Adds a new DateFormField.

Adds a new SelectionFormField.

Adds a new TextFormField.

Gets the form field at the current text input position or the form field with the specified id.

Removes the form field from the Text Control document.

Represents a part of the document.

Finds a text string. The search starts at the specified position.

Returns an array of static text field information objects.

Gets a collection of all Microsoft Word fields that have been created or imported from a Microsoft Word or RTF document.

Gets a collection of all comments in this text part.

Gets a collection of all links which point to targets in the same document.

Gets a collection of all document targets.

Gets a collection of all editable regions.

Gets a collection of all form fields in the text part.

Gets a collection of all frames in the document.

Gets a collection of all hypertext links.

Gets a collection of all text lines.

Gets a collection of all misspelled words.

Gets a collection of all paragraphs.

Gets the current selection.

Gets the current subtextparts.

Gets a collection of all tables.

Gets the current tables of contents.

Gets a collection of all text characters.

Gets a collection of all standard text fields.

Gets the Text part type.

Gets a collection of all tracked changes.

The FormattingStyle object represents a styling for a text range.

Applies all set attributes of the style to the current document.

Gets values specifying automatic sub- or superscripted text. When using automatic sub- and superscript the font is scaled and moved above or below the baseline with values defined through the font itself. Automatic sub- and superscript can be combined with a user-defined baseline which can be set with the Baseline property.

Gets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the style.

Gets the FormattingStyle which is the base style of this style.

Gets the bold attribute of the style.

Gets values specifying wheather lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters. Lowercase letters are displayed either with capital letters of the same size or with capital letters which have a smaller size. The smaller size is either the size of the lowercase 'x' (petite caps) or the size of the lowercase 'x' + 10% (small caps).

Gets or sets the style's character scaling, in percent of the average character width.

Gets the style's character spacing value, in twips. This value is added to each character. When it is negative, character spacing is reduced, otherwise it is extended.

Gets the culture as a languagecode2-country / regioncode2 string value. Takes a callback function as a parameter which is called with a languagecode2-country / regioncode2 string ("de-DE", "en-US" or "en", for example) as a parameter upon receiving the culture value.

Gets the font of the style.

Gets the font's size of the style.

Gets the style's color used to display the text.

Gets the italic attribute of the style.

Gets the name of the style.

Gets the strikeout attribute of the style.

Gets the style's text background color.

Gets the underlining styles for the style.

Sets values specifying automatic sub- or superscripted text. When using automatic sub- and superscript the font is scaled and moved above or below the baseline with values defined through the font itself. Automatic sub- and superscript can be combined with a user-defined baseline which can be set with the Baseline property.

Sets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the style.

Sets the bold attribute of the style.

Sets values specifying wheather lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters. Lowercase letters are displayed either with capital letters of the same size or with capital letters which have a smaller size. The smaller size is either the size of the lowercase 'x' (petite caps) or the size of the lowercase 'x' + 10% (small caps).

Sets or sets the style's character scaling, in percent of the average character width.

Sets the style's character spacing value, in twips. This value is added to each character. When it is negative, character spacing is reduced, otherwise it is extended.

Sets the culture as a languagecode2-country / regioncode2 string value.

Sets the font of the style.

Sets the font's size of the style.

Sets the style's color used to display the text.

Sets the italic attribute of the style.

Sets the name of the style.

Sets the strikeout attribute of the style.

Sets the style's text background color.

Sets the underlining styles for the style.

The FormattingStyleCollection contains a collection of formatting styles.

Removes a formatting style from the collection.

The FrameBase object is the base of the Image, TextFrame and BarcodeFrame object.

Changes the frame's z-order.

Gets the frame's horizontal alignment when it is anchored to a paragraph.

Gets the frame's bounding rectangle relative to the upper left corner of the document.

Gets an identifier for the frame. A value of zero indicates that the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing has no identifier.

Gets a value determining whether the frame is treated as a single character or the document's text either flows around or overwrites the frame. If the document's text flows around or overwrites the frame, this property also determines whether the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is moved with the text or fixed positioned on a page.

Gets, in twips, the frame's current location. If the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is anchored to a paragraph, the location is relative to the paragraph. Otherwise, it is relative to the document. If the frame has a horizontal alignment or if it is inserted inline, this property returns zero. This property cannot be set for images, text frames, charts, barcodes or drawings which are inserted inline.

Gets whether a frame can be moved in the document at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Gets the name for the frame. An empty string indicates that the frame has no name.

Gets the frame's size in twips.

Gets whether the frame can be resized at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Gets the distances, in twips, between the frame and the document's text.

Gets the frame's character position in the document's text (one-based).

Sets the frame's horizontal alignment when it is anchored to a paragraph.

Sets an identifier for the frame. It must be a one-based value. A value of zero indicates that the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing has no identifier. Zero can also be used to delete a previously set identifier.

Sets a value determining whether the frame is treated as a single character or the document's text either flows around or overwrites the frame. If the document's text flows around or overwrites the frame, this property also determines whether the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is moved with the text or fixed positioned on a page.

Sets, in twips, the frame's current location. If the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is anchored to a paragraph, the location is relative to the paragraph. Otherwise, it is relative to the document. If the frame has a horizontal alignment or if it is inserted inline, this property returns zero. This property cannot be set for images, text frames, charts, barcodes or drawings which are inserted inline.

Sets whether a frame can be moved in the document at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Sets a name for the frame. An empty string indicates that the frame has no name. An empty string can also be used to delete a previously set name.

Sets the frame's size in twips. For images this property is read only. To change the size of an image in a document, use the setHorizontalScaling and setVerticalScaling methods.

Sets whether the frame can be resized at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Sets the distances, in twips, between the frame and the document's text. If a value is set to -1, it is not changed.

Base of all collections containing frame objects.

Removes all objects from the collection and from the document.

Callback function for a frame related event.

Contains all frames of a Text Control document or part of the document.

Gets the frame selected by the user or the frame with the specified identifier.

Gets the frame with the specified name.

Removes a frame from a Text Control document.

The event argument for frame related events.

Information about the frame.

Information about a frame.

The frame's identifier.

The frame's location in twips.

The frame's name.

The frame's character position in the document's text (one-based).

Callback function for retrieving a list of dictionary file names via TXTextControl.Proofing.getDictionaryList.

Callback function for retrieving user dictionary information via TXTextControl.Proofing.getUserDictionaryInfo.

Represents a header or footer in the document.

Activates the this header or footer.

Deactivates the this header or footer.

Gets a value specifying whether the header or footer is connected with the header or footer of the previous section. If headers or footers are connected, they have always the same contents.

Gets the distance, in twips, of a header or footer to the top or bottom of the page.

Gets the type of the header or footer.

Sets a value specifying whether the header or footer is connected with the header or footer of the previous section. If headers or footers are connected, they have always the same contents.

Sets the distance, in twips, of a header or footer to the top or bottom of the page.

A collection of page number fields in the header or footer.

Callback function for events related to a header or a footer.

Contains all headers and footers in a document or part of the document.

Adds a new header or footer to a document or to a certain section of the document. If a header or footer is added to the complete document the first section receives the header or footer and all other sections receive headers or footers which are connected to their previous section. To add more than one header or footer a combination of the HeaderFooterType enumeration values can be used.

Gets a particular header or footer from the collection.

Removes a header or footer from the document or from a certain section.

The event argument header and footer related events.

Specifies whether the header or footer is connected to previous section.

The distance, in twips, of a header or footer to the top or bottom of the page.

The type of the header or footer.

Information about a hyperlink.

The link target.

Callback function for the hyperlinkClicked event.

The event argument object for the hyperlinkClicked event.

The link target.

The HypertextLink object represents a hypertext link in a document that points to a target outside of the document.

Gets a string that specifies the target to where the hypertext link points.

Sets a string that specifies the target to where the hypertext link points.

Callback function for events related to a hypertext link.

The HypertextLinkCollection object contains all hypertext links in a Text Control document.

Inserts a new hypertext link at the current input position.

Gets the hypertext link with the specified id.

Removes a hypertext link from a Text Control document.

The event argument object for hypertext link related events.

Information about the hypertext link.

Callback function for a word-hyphenation related event.

The event argument for a word-hyphenation related event.

The position at which the word should be divided.

The maximum dividing position.

The word to hyphenate.

The Image object represents an image in a Text Control document.

Gets an images's horizontal scaling factor in percent.

Gets an images's vertical scaling factor in percent.

Sets an images's horizontal scaling factor in percent.

Sets an images's vertical scaling factor in percent.

Callback function for an image related event.

Contains all images of a Text Control document or part of the document.

Creates and inserts a new image which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored image are moved with the text.

Inserts a new image which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified location relative to the paragraph it is anchored to and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored images are moved with the text.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page.

Creates and inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a location relative to the top left corner of the complete document. All gaps between the pages must be included.

Inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page.

Creates and inserts a new image inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The image is inserted at the specified text input position.

Gets the image selected by the user or the image with the specified identifier.

Gets the image with the specified name.

Removes an image from a Text Control document.

The event argument for image related events.

The image's information.

The InlineStyle object defines a formatting style that can be used to format single words in a line of text.

Determines the style's attributes.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's FontName property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's FontSize property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Bold property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Italic property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Underline property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Strikeout property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Baseline property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's ForeColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's TextBackColor property.

Informs about whether one or more of the style's attributes are inherited from the surrounding paragraph.

Resets one or more of the style's attributes to its default value which is the same value as defined for the surrounding paragraph.

Contains all formatting styles in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Adds a new style to the current document.

Gets a style from the collection by the style's name.

The InputFormat object represents all formatting attributes at the current text input position.

The addEventListener function registers event listener functions on the InputFormat object.

Gets a value specifying whether all frame lines, including all inner frame lines, are set for the selected text.

Gets a value specifying whether text is bold at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether text is bottom aligned at the current input position.

Gets bottom's paragraph distance, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether there is a complete frame around the text.

Gets the bullet character at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether there is a bulleted list at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether text is centered at the current input position.

Gets the font family at the current input position.

Gets the font's size, in points, at the current input position.

Gets the color used to display the frame fill color at the current input position.

Gets the color used to display the color of frame lines at the current text input position.

Gets the line width, in twips, of the paragraph's or table's frame at the current input position.

Gets the hanging indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether all inner horizontal frame lines are set for the selected text.

Gets a value specifying whether all inner vertical frame lines are set for the selected text.

Gets a value specifying whether the text is italic at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether text is justified at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether text is left aligned at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the left side of the text.

Gets the left indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether the writung direction is left-to-right at the current input position.

Gets the line spacing, in percent, at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether there is a numbered list at the current input position.

Gets the number format for a numbered list at the current input position.

Gets an array of all supported number formats for numbered and structured lists.

Gets a value specifying whether text is right aligned at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the right side of the text.

Gets the right indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether the writing direction is right-to-left at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether the text is strikeout at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether there is a structured list at the current input position.

Gets the number format for a structured list at the current input position.

Gets the structure level of all selected paragraphs. The level can be between 0 and 10. A level of 0 indicates that the paragraph belongs to the body of the document.

Gets the formatting style name at the current input position.

Returns an array of the names of all formatting styles, the document contains.

Gets a value specifying whether text is subscript at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether text is superscript at the current input position.

Returns an array of strings specifying all supported fonts.

Gets an array of strings specifying all possible font sizes for the font at the text input position. If the font is free scalable, standard sizes are returned. The return value is the list of possible font sizes. Null is returned, if the specified font is not supported or if text is selected and the selection contains several different fonts.

Gets an array of all supported underline styles.

Gets the color used to display the text's background color at the current input position.

Gets the color used to display the text at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether text is top aligned at the current input position.

Gets a top paragraph distance, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the top of the text.

Gets a value specifying whether text is underlined at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying the style at the current input position.

Gets a value specifying whether text is vertically centered at the current text input position.

The removeListener function removes the specified event listener from the InputFormat object.

Sets a value specifying whether all frame lines, including all inner frame lines, are set for the selected text.

Sets a value specifying whether text is bold at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is bottom aligned at the current input position.

Sets a bottom paragraph distance, in twips, at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether there is a complete frame around the text.

Sets the bullet character at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether there is a bulleted list at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is centered at the current input position.

Sets the font family at the current input position.

Sets the font's size, in points, at the current input position.

Sets the color used to display the frame fill color at the current input position.

Sets the color used to display the color of frame lines at the current text input position.

Sets the line width, in twips, of the paragraph's or table's frame at the current input position.

Sets the hanging indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether all inner horizontal frame lines are set for the selected text.

Sets a value specifying whether all inner vertical frame lines are set for the selected text.

Sets a value specifying whether the text is italic at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is justified at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is left aligned at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the left side of the text.

Sets the left indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether the writung direction is left-to-right at the current input position.

Sets the line spacing, in percent, at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether there is a numbered list at the current input position.

Sets the number format for a numbered list at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is right aligned at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the right side of the text.

Sets the right indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether the writing direction is right-to-left at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether the text is strikeout at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether there is a structured list at the current input position.

Sets the number format for a structured list at the current input position.

Sets the structure level of all selected paragraphs. The level can be between 0 and 10. A level of 0 indicates that the paragraph belongs to the body of the document.

Sets the formatting style name at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is subscript at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is superscript at the current input position.

Sets the color used to display the text background color at the current input position.

Sets the color used to display the text at the current input position as a CSS color string.

Sets a value specifying whether text is top aligned at the current input position.

Sets a top paragraph distance, in twips, at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the top of the text.

Sets a value specifying whether text is underlined at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying the style at the current input position.

Sets a value specifying whether text is vertically centered at the current text input position.

Represents the current text input position of a document.

Determines a position to where the input position is scrolled.

Scrolls the current input position into the visible part of the document using a default position depending on the previous position.

Scrolls the input position to the left side of the visible portion of the document

Scrolls the input position to the right side of the visible portion of the document.

Scrolls the input position to the top of the visible portion of the document.

Scrolls the input position to the bottom of the visible portion of the document.

Gets the size of the caret, in pixels, at the current text input position.

Gets the column number of the current text input position.

Gets whether the current text input position when the TextControl is inactive and the blinking caret is not visible.

Gets the line number of the current text input position.

Gets the geometric location of the current text input position.

Gets the page number of the current text input position.

Gets the page number in the section containing the current text input position.

Gets the section number of the current text input position.

Gets the text position of the current text input position.

Scrolls the contents of a Text Control so that the current input position becomes visible.

Sets whether the current text input position when the TextControl is inactive and the blinking caret is not visible.

Callback function for the inputPositionChanged event.

The event argument object for the inputPositionChanged event.

The column number of the current text input position.

The line number of the current text input position.

The page number of the current text input position.

The section number of the current text input position.

The 0-based text position of the current text input position.

The Line object represents a single line in a document.

Gets the line's baseline position.

Gets the number of characters in the line including the break character.

Gets the line's number.

Gets the number of the page to which the line belongs.

Gets the number (one-based) of the first character in the line.

Gets the line's text.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the text belonging to the line.

Saves the line in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

The LineCollection object contains all text lines in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Gets a particular line from the collection.

Gets the line at a certain geometrical position.

The ListFormat object defines the formatting attributes of a bulleted or numbered list.

Determines a certain list format attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Level property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FormatCharacter property.

Specifies the attribute set through the NumberFormat property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FirstNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the CharBeforeNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the CharAfterNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RestartNumbering property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BulletCharacter property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BulletSize property.

Specifies the attribute set through the HangingIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Type property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TextBeforeNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TextAfterNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FontName property.

Specifies all attributes of the ListFormat.

Gets the symbol character for a bulleted list.

Gets the size of the symbol character for a bulleted list.

Gets the starting number for a numbered list.

Gets the font used for the bullet character.

Gets the formatting character for a bulleted or numbered list.

Gets the hanging indent of a numbered list.

Gets the left indent for a numbered list.

Gets the level for a bulleted or numbered list.

Gets the number format for a numbered list.

Gets a value determining whether a new numbered list begins.

Gets the text that is displayed behind the number in a numbered list.

Gets the text that is displayed in front of the number in a numbered list.

Gets the type of the list, bulleted, numbered or none.

Sets the symbol character for a bulleted list.

Sets the size of the symbol character for a bulleted list.

Sets the starting number for a numbered list.

Sets the font used for the bullet character.

Sets the formatting character for a bulleted or numbered list.

Sets the hanging indent of a numbered list.

Sets the left indent for a numbered list.

Sets the level for a bulleted or numbered list.

Sets the number format for a numbered list.

Sets the value determining whether a new numbered list begins.

Sets the text that is displayed behind the number in a numbered list.

Sets the text that is displayed in front of the number in a numbered list.

Sets the type of the list, bulleted, numbered or none.

Callback function which receives information about a loaded document.

The type of the result parameter of the LoadDocumentCallback callback function.

The document's author

The number of bytes read during the load operation.

The document's creation date.

The application, which has created the document.

The path and filename of the CSS file belonging to an HTML or XML document.

The document's keywords.

SpreadsheetML only. The name of the part of the loaded document.

The document's subject string.

The date the document is last modified.

The name and path of the file that has been loaded.

The StreamType of the file that has been loaded.

The margins of the loaded document's pages.

The width and height of the loaded document's pages.

The MisspelledWord object represents a misspelled word in a document's text.

Gets a value which marks the misspelled word as duplicate.

Gets a value which marks the misspelled word as ignored. An ignored misspelled word remains in the collection of misspelled words, but it is not underlined in the text with a red zigzag line

Gets the length of a misspelled word.

Gets the number of this misspelled word. All misspelled words are counted from the beginning to the end of a document. The first word has the number 1.

Gets the starting position of a misspelled word. It is a one-based index of the word's first character.

Gets the text of the misspelled word.

Selects the misspelled word in the text.

Sets a value which marks the misspelled word as duplicate. A duplicate word is not misspelled, but it has the same text as the word in front of it.

Sets a value which marks the misspelled word as ignored. An ignored misspelled word remains in the collection of misspelled words, but it is not underlined in the text with a red zigzag line.

The MisspelledWordCollection contains all misspelled words in the main part of a Text Control document.

Gets the number of misspelled words with a special meaning from the collection.

Gets the misspelled word of the specified kind at the current text input position. If there is no misspelled word, the next possible word of is returned. If there is no misspelled word of the specified kind between the current input position and the end of the text, the first word of the specified kind is returned.

Gets the misspelled word at a certain geometrical location. If there is no misspelled word, null is returned.

Gets the misspelled word of the specified kind at the specified text input position. If there is no misspelled word, the next possible word is returned. If there is no misspelled word of the specified kind between the specified input position and the end of the text, the first word of the specified kind is returned.

Changes the text of the specified misspelled word and marks it as ignored. Ignored misspelled words are not underlined with a red zigzag line.

Removes the specified misspelled word from a Text Control document. The method removes the word's reference in the list of misspelled words and replaces the word's text with the specified text.

Information about a misspelled word.

A value which marks the misspelled word as duplicate.

A value which marks the misspelled word as ignored.

The length of the misspelled word.

The number of the misspelled word.

The starting position of the misspelled word.

The text of the misspelled word.

A Page object represents a formatted page of a document.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the page, in twips, relative to the top of the document.

Gets the footer of the page.

Gets the header of the page.

Gets an image of the page's contents as in the specified format in screen resolution.

Gets the number of characters of the page, including the page break character at the end of the page.

Gets the page's number.

Gets the page number relative to the beginning of the section the page belongs to.

Gets the number, one-based, of the section the page belongs to.

Gets the number (one-based) of the page's first character.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the page's text, in twips, relative to the top of the document.

Selects the text of the page.

The PageBorder represents the attributes of a border, which is drawn in the margin area of a page.

Determines a certain page border attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the MeasureFromText property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FirstPageOnly property.

Specifies the attribute set through the OmitFirstPage property.

Specifies the attribute set through the SurroundHeader property.

Specifies the attribute set through the SurroundFooter property.

Specifies all attributes of the PageSize.

Gets the distance, in twips, of the bottom border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText.

Gets the color of the bottom border line.

Gets the width of the bottom border line.

Gets whether the page border is drawn only on the first page of the section.

Gets the distance, in twips, of the left border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText.

Gets the color of the left border line.

Gets the width of the left border line.

Gets whether the page border's distances are measured from the text.

Gets whether the page border is not drawn on the first page of the section.

Gets the distance, in twips, of the right border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText.

Gets the color of the right border line.

Gets the width of the right border line.

Gets whether the page border surrounds the section's footer.

Gets whether the page border surrounds the section's header.

Gets the distance, in twips, of the top border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the {@link MeasureFromText}.

Gets the color of the top border line.

Gets the width of the top border line.

Sets the distance, in twips, of the bottom border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText.

Sets the color of the bottom border line.

Sets the width of the bottom border line.

Sets whether the page border is drawn only on the first page of the section.

Sets the distance, in twips, of the left border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText.

Sets the color of the left border line.

Sets the width of the left border line.

Sets whether the page border's distances are measured from the text.

Sets whether the page border is not drawn on the first page of the section.

Sets the distance, in twips, of the right border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText.

Sets the color of the right border line.

Sets the width of the right border line.

Sets the whether the page border surrounds the section's footer.

Sets the whether the page border surrounds the section's header.

Sets the distance, in twips, of the top border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText.

Sets the color of the top border line.

Sets the width of the top border line.

Contains all pages in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Gets the Page containing the current text input position from the collection.

Gets the page at a certain text input position.

Represents the page margins of a document or document section.

Determines a certain page margins attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Left property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Top property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Right property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Bottom property.

Specifies all attributes of the PageMargins.

Gets the bottom margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Gets the left margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Gets the right margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Gets the top margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Sets the bottom margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Sets the left margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Sets the right margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Sets the top margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

The PageNumberField object supports text field formats of applications such as Microsoft Word.

Gets the number format.

Gets a value indicating whether the field shows the page number or the total number of pages.

Gets the page number for the first page.

Sets the number format.

Sets a value indicating whether the field shows the page number or the total number of pages.

Sets the page number for the first page.

Contains the page number fields in a header or footer of a Text Control document.

Inserts a new page number field at the current input position which displays Arabic numbers starting with 1.

Gets the field at the current input position or null, if there is no such field at the current input position.

Removes a page number from a header or footer of a Text control document.

Represents the page's size of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Determines a certain page size attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Width property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Height property.

Specifies all attributes of the PageSize.

Gets the page height of a document or document section.

Gets the page width of a document or document section.

Sets the page height of a document or document section.

Sets the page width of a document or document section.

A Paragraph object represents a single paragraph in a Text Control document.

Gets the paragraph's formatting style.

Gets the number of characters in the paragraph including the paragraph end character.

Gets the number of lines the paragraph consists of.

Gets the paragraph's list number.

Gets the paragraph's list number text. The text consists of the text in front of the number, the number itself and the text behind the list number. It is an empty string, if the paragraph does not belong to a numbered list.

Gets the number (one-based) of the paragraph's first character.

Gets the number (one-based) of the paragraph's first line.

Gets the paragraph's text.

Saves the paragraph in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Selects the paragraph.

Sets the paragraph's formatting style. The specified style must be the name of a style contained in the ParagraphStyles collection of a Text Control document.

The paragraph's formatting attributes.

The paragraph's bulleted or numbered list and/or its formatting attributes.

A ParagraphCollection contains all paragraphs in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Gets a particular Paragraph from the collection.

Gets the Paragraph at a certain geometrical position.

Represents the formatting attributes of a paragraph.

Determines a certain paragraph format attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Alignment property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LineSpacing property.

Specifies the attribute set through the AbsoluteLineSpacing property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TabPositions property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TabTypes property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Frame property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameStyle property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the HangingIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the KeepLinesTogether property.

Specifies the attribute set through the KeepWithNext property.

Specifies the attribute set through the PageBreakBefore property.

Specifies the attribute set through the WidowOrphanLines property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Direction property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Justification property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BackColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameLineColor property.

Specifies all attributes of the ParagraphFormat.

Gets the line spacing of a paragraph in twips.

Gets the horizontal text alignment.

Gets the background color of a paragraph.

Gets the bottom distance, in twips, between this and the next paragraph.

Gets the writing direction.

Gets the framesetting of the paragraph.

Gets the distance, in twips, between the text and the paragraph's frame.

Gets the color used for the frame lines of a paragraph.

Gets the line width, in twips, of the paragraph's frame.

Gets the style of the paragraph's frame.

Gets the distance, in twips, for the hanging indent.

Gets the kind of justification in documents containing Arabic or Hebrew characters.

Gets a value indicating whether a page break is allowed within the paragraph.

Gets whether the paragraph is displayed on the same page as its following paragraph.

Gets the distance, in twips, between the left edge of the Text Control and the left edge of the text.

Gets the line spacing of a paragraph as a percentage of the font size.

Gets whether the paragraph is always displayed on top of a page.

Gets the distance, in twips, between the right edge of a Text Control document and the right edge of the text.

Gets the structure level of a paragraph in the document. The level can be between 0 and 10. A level of 0 indicates that the paragraph belongs to the body of the document.

Gets an array containing the tab leaders in a paragraph. A tab leader defines how a tab gap is filled.

Gets the absolute tab stop positions, in twips, in a paragraph.

Gets the tab types in a paragraph.

Gets the distance, in twips, between this and the previous paragraph.

Gets the number of lines for widow/orphan control.

Sets the line spacing of a paragraph in twips.

Sets the horizontal text alignment.

Sets the background color of a paragraph.

Sets the bottom distance, in twips, between this and the next paragraph.

Sets the writing direction.

Sets the framesetting of the paragraph.

Sets the distance, in twips, between the text and the paragraph's frame.

Sets the color used for the frame lines of a paragraph.

Sets the line width, in twips, of the paragraph's frame.

Sets the style of the paragraph's frame.

Sets the distance, in twips, for the hanging indent.

Sets the kind of justification in documents containing Arabic or Hebrew characters.

Sets a value indicating whether a page break is allowed within the paragraph.

Sets whether paragraph is displayed on the same page as its following paragraph.

Sets the distance, in twips, between the left edge of the Text Control and the left edge of the text.

Sets the line spacing of a paragraph as a percentage of the font size.

Sets whether the paragraph is always displayed on top of a page.

Sets the distance, in twips, between the right edge of a Text Control document and the right edge of the text.

Sets the structure level of a paragraph in the document. The level can be between 0 and 10. A level of 0 indicates that the paragraph belongs to the body of the document.

Sets an array containing the tab leaders in a paragraph. A tab leader defines how a tab gap is filled.

Sets an array containing the absolute tab stop positions, in twips, in a paragraph.

Sets an array containing the tab types in a paragraph.

Sets distance, in twips, between this and the previous paragraph.

Sets the number of lines for widow/orphan control.

The ParagraphStyle class defines a formatting style for paragraphs.

Gets the name of the style that the document automatically uses for the following paragraph after the user has pressed the ENTER key.

Gets the style's paragraph attributes.

Sets the name of the style that the document automatically uses for the following paragraph after the user has pressed the ENTER key.

The paragraph style's bulleted or numbered list and/or its formatting attributes.

The paragraph style's paragraph attributes.

Contains all paragraph formatting styles in the current document.

Adds a new style to the current document.

Gets a style from the collection by the style's name.

Represents a pair of x- and y-coordinates that defines a point in a two-dimensional plane.

The x-coordinate of the point.

The y-coordinate of the point.

Callback function for events related to a property change.

The event argument for events related to a property change.

The new value of the changed property.

Stores a Point and a Size object that represent the location and size of a rectangle.

The location of the rectangle.

The size of the rectangle.

Callback function for requests expecting an ActivationState value.

Callback function for requests expecting an ApplicationField value.

Callback function for requesting a AutoBaseline value.

Callback function for requesting a barcode alignment value.

Callback function for requests expecting a BarcodeFrame object.

Callback function for requesting a barcode text alignment value.

Callback function for requesting a barcode type value.

Callback function for requesting a boolean value.

Callback function for requesting a value.

Callback function for requests expecting a TableCellFormat value.

Callback function for requests expecting a ChangeKind value.

Callback function for requesting a CheckFormField.

Callback function for getNext() requests executed on collections.

Callback function for requests expecting a CSS color string.

Callback function for requests retrieving a CommentedText object from a comment collection.

Callback function for requests retrieving an array of CommentedText objects.

Callback function for requesting a DateFormField.

Callback function for requests expecting a writing direction value.

Callback function for requests expecting a Distances object.

Callback function for requesting a document link.

Callback function for requesting a document target.

Callback function for requests expecting an EditMode value.

Callback function for functions requesting editable regions.

Callback function for requesting a font underline style.

Callback function for requesting a FormField.

Callback function for requesting a style.

Callback function for requests expecting a formula reference style value.

Callback function for requests retrieving a FrameBase object from a frame collection.

Callback function for requests expecting a Frame value.

Callback function for requests expecting a FrameInsertionMode value.

Callback function for requests expecting a FrameStyle value.

Callback function for requesting a header or footer.

Callback function for requesting a type of header or footer.

Callback function for requesting a highlighting mode.

Callback function for requests expecting a horizontal alignment value.

Callback function for requesting a hypertext link.

Callback function for requests creating and adding a new Image object to a image collection.

Callback function for requesting a style.

Callback function for requests expecting a Justification value.

Callback function for requesting a line.

Callback function for requesting a ListFormatCharacter value.

Callback function for requests expecting an MeasuringUnit value.

Callback function for requesting a misspelled word.

Callback function for requesting a number.

Callback function for requesting a NumberFormat value.

Callback function for requesting an array of NumberFormat values.

Callback function for requesting an array of numerical values.

Callback function for requests expecting arbitrary objects.

Callback function for requesting a page.

Callback function for requests expecting a PageNumberField value.

Callback function for requesting an array of paper sizes.

Callback function for requesting a Paragraph object.

Callback function for requesting a paragraph's format.

Callback function for requesting a paragraph's style.

Callback function for requests expecting a PermanentControlChar value.

Callback function for requests expecting a Point object.

Callback function for requests expecting a Rectangle object.

Callback function for requests expecting a ComponentRenderMode value.

Callback function for requests expectiong a RulerBarBorderStyle value.

Callback function for requests expectiong a RulerBarFormulaMode value.

Callback function for requests expectiong a RulerBarScaleUnit value.

Callback function for requests expecting a SectionBreakKind value.

Callback function for requests expecting a Section object.

Callback function for methods requesting the start position and length of the current selection.

Callback function for requesting a SelectionFormField.

Callback function for requests receiving a SignatureField object.

Callback function for requests receiving a SignatureImage object.

Callback function for requests receiving a SignerData object.

Callback function for requests expecting a Size object.

Callback function for requests expectiong a StatusBarBorderStyle value.

Callback function for requesting a string.

Callback function for requesting a string array.

Callback function for requesting a subtextpart.

Callback function for requests retrieving an array of SubTextPart objects.

Callback function for requests expecting a Section object.

Callback function for requests expecting a Table object.

Callback function for requests expecting a TableCell object.

Callback function for requests expecting a TableColumn object.

Callback function for requests expectiong a TableOfContents object.

Callback function for requests expecting a TableRow object.

Callback function for requests expecting a character object.

Callback function for requests expecting a TextField value.

Callback function for requests retrieving an array of TextFieldInfo objects.

Callback function for requesting an array of text field objects.

Callback function for requesting a TextFormField.

Callback function for requests creating and adding a new TextFrame object to a text frame collection.

Callback function for requests expecting a FormattedText object.

Callback function for requesting an array of text part objects.

Callback function for requests expecting a text type.

Callback function for requests expecting a TrackedChange value.

Callback function for requests expecting a vertical alignment value.

Callback function for requests expecting a ViewMode object.

The type of the ribbon property of the TXTextControl object.

Expands the ribbon bar if it is currently minimized.

Minimizes the ribbon bar so that only the tab names stay visible.

Gets or sets the currently selected ribbon tab name.

The type of the ribbonPermissionsTab property.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user can add user names by the RibbonPermissionsTab's Add Users dialog that are not represented by the registeredUserNames property.

Gets or sets an array of strings that represents those registered user names that can be added by the "Permissions" ribbon tab's Add Users dialog.

Callback function for the ribbonTabIndexChanged event.

The event argument object for the ribbonTabIndexChanged event.

The name of the ribbon tab which is now active.

Callback function for the ribbonTabLoaded event.

The event argument object for the ribbonTabLoaded event.

The HTML element of the ribbon tab.

The name of the ribbon tab.

Callback function for the ribbonTabsLoaded event.

Provides functions and properties for requesting properties and executing server side methods for a ruler bar.

Gets the border style of the ruler bar.

Gets whether page margins can be set via the ruler bar.

Gets the formula mode of the ruler bar.

Gets a value determining the ruler bar's read only mode. When the ruler bar is set to read only, it still shows all formatting attributes of the connected TextControl, but formatting attributes cannot be changed.

Gets the scale unit of the ruler bar.

Resets all display colors of a ruler bar to their system dependent default values.

Sets the border style of the ruler bar.

Sets whether page margins can be set via the ruler bar.

Sets the formula mode of the ruler bar.

Sets a value determining the ruler bar's read only mode. When the ruler bar is set to read only, it still shows all formatting attributes of the connected TextControl, but formatting attributes cannot be changed.

Sets the scale unit of the ruler bar.

The displayed colors of the ruler bar.

The RulerBarViewGeneratorColors object provides methods for getting, setting or resetting the display colors of a ruler bar.

Gets the background color at the left or top edge of the ruler bar.

Gets the color used for the numbers of the ruler.

Gets the background color at the right or bottom edge of the ruler bar.

Gets the color of the ruler.

Gets the color of dark separators.

Gets the color of light separators.

Resets the ruler bar's backColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's foreColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's gradientBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's rulerColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's separatorColorDark to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's separatorColorLight to its system dependent default value.

Sets the background color at the left or top edge of the ruler bar.

Sets the color used for the numbers of the ruler.

Sets the background color at the right or bottom edge of the ruler bar.

Sets the color of the ruler.

Sets the color of dark separators.

Sets the color of light separators.

Callback function receiving the document data when saving a document or a selection.

The callback function argument for the saveDocument and the saveSelection functions.

Specifies the number of bytes written during a save operation.

The Document data.

Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Callback function for functions saving document data.

Callback function for saving a user dictionary via TXTextControl.Proofing.saveUserDictionary.

Represents a section of a document.

Gets the number of characters in the section.

Gets the section's number.

Gets the number (one-based) of the first character in the section.

Selects the section.

The section's formatting attributes.

The section's headers and footers.

Contains all sections of a document.

Adds a new section at the current text input position. The new section ends at the end position of the section containing the input position. If a new section is inserted in a paragraph or table, the paragraph or table is split into two paragraphs or tables.

Adds a new section at the specified text input position. The new section ends at the end position of the section containing the input position. If a new section is inserted in a paragraph or table, the paragraph or table is split into two paragraphs or tables.

Gets the section at the current input position or or the section in the collection with the given number.

Represents the formatting attributes of a section.

Determines a certain section format attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the BreakKind property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Landscape property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Columns property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnWidths property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnDistances property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the EqualColumnWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RestartPageNumbering property.

Specifies all attributes of the SectionFormat.

Gets the kind of the section break the section starts with.

Gets the distances, in twips, between the columns on a page.

Gets the color of a dividing line between two columns.

Gets the width of a dividing line between two columns. If this property's value is zero there is no dividing line. Otherwise it is a value in twips.

Gets the number of columns on a page.

Gets the widths, in twips, of the columns on a page.

Gets a value indicating whether the columns on a page have all the same width and the same distance between them. If this property is set to true, the width of the columns are automatically calculated from the page size.

Gets a value indicating whether the section's page size is in landscape orientation.

Gets a value indicating whether page numbering is restarted at the section's beginning.

Sets the kind of the section break the section starts with.

Sets the color of a dividing line between two columns.

Sets the width of a dividing line between two columns. If this property's value is zero there is no dividing line. Otherwise it is a value in twips.

Sets the number of columns on a page.

Sets the widths, in twips, of the columns on a page.

Sets a value indicating whether the columns on a page have all the same width and the same distance between them. If this property is set to true, the width of the columns are automatically calculated from the page size.

Sets a value indicating whether the section's page size is in landscape orientation.

Sets a value indicating whether page numbering is restarted at the section's beginning.

Gets the attributes of a section's page border.

Gets the section's page margins.

Gets the section's page size.

Describes and handles the attributes of a text selection.

Determines a certain selection attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Baseline property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Bold property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Italic property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FontName property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FontSize property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Strikeout property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Underline property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ForeColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TextBackColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Start property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Length property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Text property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FormattingStyle property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Culture property.

Specifies all attributes of the Selection.

Changes the capitalization of all selected characters depending on the 'capitalizationParameter' parameter.

Changes the writing direction of all selected paragraphs. When the direction of a paragraph is changed, this paragraph's alignment is toggled from left to right or from right to left. The alignment of centered and justified paragraphs is not changed. Left and right tabulators are also toggled.

Decreases the left indent of all paragraphs contained in the current text selection. If no text is selected, this method decreases the left indent at the text input position. Left indent positions are defined through the paragraphs' tab positions and the indents of the paragraphs in front and behind the paragraph with the text input position.

Gets values specifying automatic sub- or superscripted text. When using automatic sub- and superscript the font is scaled and moved above or below the baseline with values defined through the font itself. Automatic sub- and superscript can be combined with a user-defined baseline which can be set with the Baseline property.

Gets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the selected text. Takes a callback function as a parameter which is called with the baseline alignment, in twips, of the selected text. Positive values moves the baseline to superscript, negative values move the baseline to subscript.

Gets the bold attribute of the selected text.

Gets values specifying wheather lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters. Lowercase letters are displayed either with capital letters of the same size or with capital letters which have a smaller size. The smaller size is either the size of the lowercase 'x' (petite caps) or the size of the lowercase 'x' + 10% (small caps).

Gets or sets the style's character scaling, in percent of the average character width.

Gets the style's character spacing value, in twips. This value is added to each character. When it is negative, character spacing is reduced, otherwise it is extended.

Gets the culture as a languagecode2-country / regioncode2 string value. Takes a callback function as a parameter which is called with a languagecode2-country / regioncode2 string ("de-DE", "en-US" or "en", for example) as a parameter upon receiving the selection information from the server.

Gets the font name of the selected text.

Gets the font's size, in points, of the selected text.

Gets the color used to display the selected text.

Gets the formatting style of the selected text.

Gets the italic attribute of the selected text.

Gets the number of selected characters.

Gets the starting point of selected text.

Gets the strikeout attribute of the selected text.

Gets the currently selected text.

Gets the background color of the selected text.

Gets the underlining styles of the selected text.

Increases the font size of each font contained in the current text selection.If no text is selected, this method increases the font size at the text input position.

Increases the left indent of all paragraphs contained in the current text selection. If no text is selected, this method increases the left indent at the text input position. Left indent positions are defined through the paragraphs' tab positions and the indents of the paragraphs in front and behind the paragraph with the text input position.

Informs about whether an attribute from the ListFormat.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Informs about whether an attribute from the PageBorder.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Informs about whether an attribute from the PageMargins.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Informs about whether an attribute from the PageSize.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Informs about whether an attribute from the ParagraphFormat.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Informs about whether an attribute from the SectionFormat.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Informs about whether an attribute from the Selection.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Loads text in a certain format into the current selection.

Resets all character based formatting attributes of the selected text to its default values. If nothing or more than one paragraph is selected, all paragraph based formatting attributes are also reset.

Removes all character based styles of the selected text so that all attributes are reset to the attributes of the paragraph style.

Saves the current selection in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Sets values specifying automatic sub- or superscripted text. When using automatic sub- and superscript the font is scaled and moved above or below the baseline with values defined through the font itself. Automatic sub- and superscript can be combined with a user-defined baseline which can be set with the Baseline property.

Sets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the selected text.

Sets the bold attribute of the selected text.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Sets the selection's start position and length.

Sets values specifying wheather lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters. Lowercase letters are displayed either with capital letters of the same size or with capital letters which have a smaller size. The smaller size is either the size of the lowercase 'x' (petite caps) or the size of the lowercase 'x' + 10% (small caps).

Sets or sets the style's character scaling, in percent of the average character width.

Sets the style's character spacing value, in twips. This value is added to each character. When it is negative, character spacing is reduced, otherwise it is extended.

Sets the culture as a languagecode2-country / regioncode2 string value.

Sets the font's name of the selected text.

Sets the font's size, in points, of the selected text.

Sets the selection's foreground color.

Sets the formatting style of the selected text.

Sets the italic attribute of the selected text.

Sets the number of selected characters.

Sets the starting point of selected text.

Sets the strikeout attribute of the selected text.

Sets the currently selected text.

Sets the selection's background color.

Sets the underlining styles for the selected text.

Decreases the font size of each font contained in the current text selection. If no text is selected, this method decreases the font size at the text input position.

Gets a bulleted or numbered list and / or its formatting attributes for the selected text.

Gets the formatting attributes of the selected paragraphs.

Gets page settings such as margins, size and orientation for the selected text.

Contains the start position and the length of a selection.

The length of the selection in characters.

The 0-based start character position of the selection.

The SelectionFormField objet represents a combobox or a drop-down list on a form.

Gets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the selection formfield, when it is empty.

Gets a value indicating whether a dropdown arrow is shown so that the user can select an item.

Gets a list of items for the SelectionFormField. An item must not be an empty string.

Gets the index of the selected item of the SelectionFormField. If the property value is -1, no item is selected and the currently selected item is deselected.

Sets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the selection formfield, when it is empty.

Sets a value indicating whether a dropdown arrow is shown so that the user can select an item.

Sets a list of items for the SelectionFormField. An item must not be an empty string.

Sets the index of the selected item of the SelectionFormField. If the property value is -1, no item is selected and the currently selected item is deselected.

Callback function for selection form field events.

The event argument for selection form field related events.

The selection form field.

Information about a selection form field.

Initializes a new instance of the SelectionFormFieldInfo class.

The sidebar toggle button shown at the top right of the ribbon.

Returns the side bars which are currently shown in the side bar toggle / drop down button at the top right of the ribbon bar.

Returns the side bar which is shown in the side bar toggle / drop down button at the top right of the ribbon bar.

Sets the side bars which are shown in the side bar toggle / drop down button at the top right of the ribbon bar. The value TXTextControl.SideBarType.None or 0 removes the button altogether.

Sets the side bar which is shown in the side bar toggle / drop down button at the top right of the ribbon bar.

Callback function for requests expectiong a SideBarType value.

The SignatureField object represents a rectangle that can be filled with text by an end-user and can be edited like the main text.

Gets the signer data of the signature field.

Sets the signature field's image.

Sets the signer data of the signature field.

The signature field's image.

Callback function for an event related to a signature field.

Contains all signature fields of a Text Control document or part of the document.

Creates and inserts a new signature field which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored text frames are moved with the text.

Inserts a new signature field which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified location relative to the paragraph it is anchored to and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored signature fields are moved with the text.

Creates and inserts a new signature field which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a location relative to the top left corner of the complete document. All gaps between the pages must be included.

Inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page.

Inserts a signature field inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The signature field is inserted at the specified text input position.

Inserts a signature field with the built-in mouse interface. The signature field's size is determined through the end-user. A cross cursor indicates where the signature field can be inserted. Changing the document aborts the insertion process.

Gets the signature field selected by the user or the signature field with the specified identifier.

Gets the signature field with the specified name.

Removes a signature field from a Text Control document.

The event argument for signature field related events.

Information about the signature field.

Information about a signature field.

Information about the signature image.

The signer data.

The SignatureImage object represents a signature image of a signature field in a Text Control document.

Gets the images's export compression quality as a value between 1 and 100.

Gets an images's vertical scaling factor in percent.

Sets the images's export compression quality as a value between 1 and 100.

Sets an images's vertical scaling factor in percent.

Information about a signature image.

Export compression quality.

Maximum export resolution.

The data of a suggested signer connected with a SignatureField.

The address of a suggested signer.

The contact information of a suggested signer, such as a phone number.

The name of a suggested signer.

A reason why the document is signed.

The title of a suggested signer.

Stores a pair of numbers which specify a height and width.

The height.

The width.

Callback function for a spell check related event.

The event argument for a spell check related event.

An array of misspelled words.

The text to check.

Provides functions and properties for requesting properties and executing server side methods for the status bar.

Gets the border style of the status bar.

Gets the text in the 'Column' area of the status bar.

Gets the text in the 'Line' area of the status bar.

Gets the text in the 'Page counter' area of the status bar.

Gets the text in the 'Page' area of the status bar.

Gets the text in the 'Section counter' area of the status bar.

Gets the text in the 'Section' area of the status bar.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the column number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the key state of the CAPSLOCK and the NUMLOCK key and the current insertion mode, insert or overwrite.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the language of the text selection or the text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the line number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the page number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of pages the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the section number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of sections the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the current zoom factor.

Specifies whether the status bar displays a track bar instead of a simple number to show and to set the zooming factor.

Resets all display colors of a status bar to their system dependent default values.

Sets the border style of the status bar.

Sets the text in the 'Column' area of the status bar.

Sets the text in the 'Line' area of the status bar.

Sets the text in the 'Page counter' area of the status bar.

Sets the text in the 'Page' area of the status bar.

Sets the text in the 'Section counter' area of the status bar.

Sets the text in the 'Section' area of the status bar.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the column number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the key state of the CAPSLOCK and the NUMLOCK key and the current insertion mode, insert or overwrite.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the language of the text selection or the text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the line number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the page number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of pages the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the section number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of sections the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the current zoom factor.

Specifies whether the status bar displays a track bar instead of a simple number to show and to set the zooming factor.

The displayed colors of the status bar.

The StatusBarViewGeneratorColors object provides methods for getting, setting or resetting the display colors of a status bar.

Gets the background color at the left edge of the status bar.

Gets the background color at the bottom of the status bar.

Gets the background color in the middle of the status bar.

Gets the background color at the top of the status bar.

Gets the color used for text and numbers.

Gets the color of the status bar's frames.

Gets the background color at the right edge of the status bar.

Gets the color of the dark part of a separator.

Gets the color of the light part of a separator.

Resets the ruler bar's backColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's backColorBottom to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's backColorMiddle to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's backColorTop to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's foreColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's frameColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's gradientBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's separatorColorDark to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's separatorColorLight to its system dependent default value.

Sets the background color at the left edge of the ruler bar.

Sets the background color at the bottom of the status bar.

Sets the background color in the middle of the status bar.

Sets the background color at the top of the status bar.

Sets the color used for text and numbers.

Sets the color of the status bar's frames.

Sets the background color at the right edge of the status bar.

Sets the color of the dark part of a separator.

Sets the color of the light part of a separator.

A SubTextPart object represents a user-defined part of a document.

Returns an array of the children of this SubTextPart.

Gets additional data of the subtextpart.

Gets the highlight color for the subtextpart.

Gets a value indicating when the subtextpart is highlighted.

Gets an identifier for a subtextpart.

Gets the number of characters in a subtextpart.

Relates a user-defined name to a subtextpart.

Gets the subtextpart's nested level.

Gets the subtextpart's number.

Gets a subtextpart's outermost subtextpart.

Gets a subtextpart's outer subtextpart.

Gets the first character position (one-based) of a subtextpart.

Gets the subtextpart's text.

Returns an array of static text field information objects.

Saves the subtextpart in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of a subtextpart and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Sets additional data of the subtextpart.

Sets the highlight color for the subtextpart.

Sets a value indicating when the subtextpart is highlighted.

Sets an identifier for the subtextpart.

Sets the name of a subtextpart.

Callback function for SubTextPart related events.

The type of the response parameter of the AddSubTextPartCallback callback function.

The added subtextpart.

The SubTextPartCollection object represents a collection of subtextparts.

Specifies the result when a subtextpart has been added to the document.

An unexpected error has occurred.

The subtextpart has successfully been inserted.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because there is no selection.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because the selection is too complex. It is not a continuous sequence of characters.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because the specified position values are invalid. Invalid start and/or length values have been specified.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because it already exists.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because it overlaps with an existing textpart.

The subtextpart was inserted and combined with an existing one. A subtextpart is combined with an existing one, when it immediately follows it and has the same name and id.

Adds a new SubTextPart to the collection.

Removes all subtextparts from a Text Control document.

Gets the subtextpart at the current text input position.

Removes a subtextpart from the collection including all its nested subtextparts.

The event argument object for SubTextPart related events.

The subtextpart's identifier.

The length of the SubTextPart in characters.

The name of the subtextpart.

The subtextpart's nested level.

The subtextpart's number.

The 1-based position of the first character which belongs to the subtextpart.

Specifies the properties of a new SubTextPart added via the (deprecated) method TextPart.addSubTextPart.

Optional. The highlight mode.

Optional. The ID of the SubTextPart.

Optional. The length of the SubTextPart.

The name of the SubTextPart.

Optional. The one-based starting position of the SubTextPart.

The TXTextControl JavaScript object provides a public API to manipulate the web editor via JavaScript functions in the browser.

The current activation state.

The control is activated, which means that it has the keyboard input focus.

The control is deactivated, which means that it has not the keyboard input focus.

The control is disabled, which means that it cannot get the keyboard input focus.

Specifies the result when a subtextpart has been added to the document.

An unexpected error has occurred.

The subtextpart has successfully been inserted.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because there is no selection.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because the selection is too complex. It is not a continuous sequence of characters.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because the specified position values are invalid. Invalid start and / or length values have been specified.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because it already exists.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because it overlaps with an existing textpart.

The subtextpart was inserted and combined with an existing one. A subtextpart is combined with an existing one, when it immediately follows it and has the same name and id.

Determines how text is appended to the document.

The loaded text is inserted at the end of the last paragraph of the existing document.

A new paragraph is created at the end of the document and the text is inserted in this paragraph.

A new section is created at the end of the document and the text is inserted in this section.

The possible application field formats.

Unspecified field format.

The field is supported and defined through Microsoft Word.

The field is supported and defined through the Heiler HighEdit component.

This value can only be used with the LoadSettings.ApplicationFieldFormat property.

Specifies how text is automatically sub- or superscripted.

Text is moved above the baseline.

Text is moved below the baseline.

Text is scaled und moved above the baseline. The moved text does not extend above the upper edge of capital letters. This can be used for nominators of diagonal fractions.

Text is scaled, but is not moved below the baseline. This can be used for denominators of diagonal fractions.

Text is scaled, but is not moved below the baseline. This can be used for denominators of diagonal fractions.

Defines the type of document link auto-generation.

The document link is not automatically generated.

The document link has automatically been generated for an entry in a table of contents.

Determines the alignment of the barcode image inside the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the top left of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the top center of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the top right of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the middle left of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the middle center of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the middle right of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the bottom center of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the bottom left of the control.

Sets the alignment of the barcode to the bottom right of the control.

Determines the alignment of the barcode text and additional text that is displayed inside the control.

The text is displayed below the barcode image.

The text is displayed above the barcode image.

Specifies where and how a text or section breaks.

Break the line.

Break the column

Break the page.

Begin the section at new page.

Begin the section at new line.

Specifies the settings for capitalization.

All letters are changed to uppercase.

All letters are changed to lowercase.

The first letter of each word is capitalized.

The first letter of each sentence is capitalized.

Lowercase letters are changed to uppercase and vice versa.

Specifies whether the lowercase letters of text are displayed with capital letters.

All lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters.

All lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters which have the size of the lowercase 'x' + 10%.

All lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters which have the size of the lowercase 'x'.

There are no text effects with capital letters.

Specifies the kind of a tracked change.

Text has been inserted.

Text has been deleted.

Possible clipboard modes.

Specifies client clipboard mode (content is copied to and from the client clipboard).

Specifies server clipboard mode (content is copied to and from the server clipboard).

Component render mode.

Bitmap based render mode (PNG).

Vector based render mode (SVG).

Automatic render mode selection depending on current connection quality.

Determines the location in the document where a context menu will be shown.

The menu context is a text selection.

The menu context is the text input position.

The menu context is the top page margin which contains a header.

The menu context is the top page margin which contains no header.

The menu context is the bottom page margin which contains a footer.

The menu context is the bottom page margin which contains no footer.

The menu context is the top or the bottom page margin.

The menu context is a page number field.

The menu context is a selected frame (text frame, image, chart or barcode).

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a table.

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a text field.

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a misspelled word.

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a table of contents.

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a tracked change.

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a comment.

Determines values for the control characters used in a TextControl document.

Defines a tabulator (Keyboard: TAB).

Defines the end of a paragraph (Keyboard: ENTER).

Defines a line break without beginning a new paragraph (Keyboard: SHIFT+ENTER).

Defines a page break (Keyboard: CTRL+ENTER).

Defines a page column break (Keyboard: CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER).

Defines a non-visible hyphen (Keyboard: CTRL+(-)).

Defines a non-breaking space (Keyboard: CTRL+SHIFT+Space).

Possible built-in dialog box types.

Fonts and character attributes.

Paragraph formatting attributes.

Inserting a new table.

Formatting attributes of bulleted and numbered lists.

Creating, deleting and modifying formatting styles.

Section attributes.

Language of the selected text.

Table formatting attributes.

Tabulator settings.

Formatting attributes of the currently selected frame. (Chart frame, text frame, drawing etc.)

Find a text string in the text part with the input focus.

Replace a text string in the text part with the input focus.

Text color.

Text background color.

Add a symbol.

Background color of a paragraph or a table cell.

Frame line color of a paragraph or a table cell.

Page color.

Inserting or changing a table of contents.

Determines the writing direction of a paragraph.

The writing direction is left to right, which means that blocks of text with left to right and right to left characters are ordered from left to right.

The writing direction is right to left, which means that blocks of text with left to right and right to left characters are ordered from right to left.

Specifies how a document can be accessed after it has been opened.

Allows none of the possible permissions.

Allows authoring comments and fill in interactive form fields (including signature fields).

Fill-in existing interactive form fields (including signature fields) is allowed.

Allows content access for the visually impaired only.

Allows to assemble the document (insert, rotate or delete pages and create bookmarks or thumbnails).

Copying or otherwise extracting text and/or graphics is allowed.

Allows modifying the document's contents.

Printing the document is fully allowed.

Printing the document is allowed (low-level).

Allows all of the possible permissions.

Determines the possible document edit modes.

The document's text can be edited.

The document's text is read only but can be selected.

The document's text is read only.

A dialog box to enter a password is opened to protect the edit mode. This value can only be combined with EditMode.ReadAndSelect using the bitwise or operator.

Determines the possible MS Word specific merge field types supported by the TX Text Control JavaScript API.

Specifies the MS Word specific MERGEFIELD field type.

Specifies the MS Word specific IF field type.

Specifies the MS Word specific INCLUDETEXT field type.

Specifies the MS Word specific DATEFIELD field type.

Specifies the MS Word specific NEXT field type.

Specifies the MS Word specific NEXTIF field type.

Specifies the kind of file types.

Specifies document file types.

Specifies image file types.

Specifies database file types.

Determines search options for the find method.

The search starts at the end of the control's document and searches to the beginning of the document.

Locates only instances of the search text that have the exact casing.

The search text, if found, is not highlighted.

Does not display message boxes to inform about search results.

Locates only instances of the search text which are whole words.

Specifies the style of the underline below a text.

Only the words of the text are underlined with a doubled line.

Text is underlined with a doubled line.

Only the words of the text are underlined with a single line.

Text is underlined with a single line.

Text is not underlined.

Specifies the style of references to table cells in formulas.

A table cell in formulas is addressed with a column letter and a row number

A table cell in formulas is addressed with a column number and a row number.

Determines which frame borders are visible of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing.

Left frame line.

Right frame line.

Frame line at the top.

Frame line at the bottom.

Complete frame.

The paragraph has a complete frame. If the following or the previous paragraph also has a frame, the frames are merged to a single frame.

No frame.

Determines how the frame of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing can be inserted in the text.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location above the text. This means that the frame overwrites the text.

The frame is inserted in the text as a single character.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location below the text. This means that the text overwrites the frame.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location.

Determines the style of a frame of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing.

The frame is drawn with a single line.

The frame is drawn with a doubled line.

Determines the type of a header or footer.

The object is a header. When an even header exists, the object represents the odd header. Otherwise it represents the header of all pages.

The object represents a special header of the document's or section's first page.

The object is a footer. When an even footer exists, this member represents the odd footer. Otherwise it represents the footer of all pages.

The object represents a special footer of the document's or section's first page.

The object represents an even header.

The object represents an even footer.

The object represents an footer or header.

Contains all possible highlight mode values.

The element is never highlighted.

The element is only highlighted, when it contains the current text input position and when the control has the input focus.

The element is always highlighted.

The element's highlight mode is governed by the global highlight mode property.

Specifies the horizontal alignment of a text.

Text is aligned at the left.

Text is aligned at the right.

Text is aligned at the center.

Text is justified.

Possible built-in HTML based dialog box types.

General options.

Spell checking.

Loading dictionaries.

Accessing the thesaurus.

Loading thesaurus files.

Add a user.

Insert or edit a bookmark.

Insert or edit a hyperlink.

Specifies the file format of an image.

Bitmap image format.

Enhanced metafile image format.

Graphics Interchange Format image format.

Joint Photographic Experts Group image format.

W3C Portable Network Graphics image format.

Tagged Image File Format image format.

Windows metafile image format.

Determines how an image can be inserted in the text.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location above the text. This means that the image overwrites the text.

The image is inserted in the text as a single character.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location below the text. This means that the text overwrites the image.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location.

Specifies the kind of justification.

To justify a line additional space is added to the spaces between the words.

To justify a line Kashida lines are inserted.

To justify a line both kinds of justification are used.

Specifies the list format character.

The text of the list immediately follows the bullet or number character.

The text of the list follows the bullet or number character at the next tab position.

The text of the list follows the bullet or number character separated through a space character.

Specifies the type of a list.

The text is neither a bulleted nor a numbered list.

The list is a bulleted list.

The list is a numbered list.

The list is a structured list. All numbers of higher levels (lower level numbers) are displayed in front of the list number. The additional text of all levels in front and behind the list numbers is also displayed.

Specifies the measuring unit.

Centi Inch.

Standard WPF Unit.

Twips.

Millimeter

Centimeter

Point

Determines the possible text formats for merge fields containing text.

The text is displayed normally.

The text is displayed in uppercase.

The text is displayed in lowercase.

The first character is displayed in uppercase.

The text is displayed in title case.

Specifies the kind of a misspelled word.

Specifies all misspelled words.

Specifies all misspelled words which are marked as duplicate.

Specifies all misspelled words which are marked as ignored.

Specifies all misspelled words which do not have a special meaning.

Specifies the format of a numbered list.

A text selection contains different number formats.

The list is numbered with Arabic numbers (1, 2, 3...).

The list is numbered with letters (a, b, c...).

The list is numbered with capital letters (A, B, C...).

The list is numbered with Roman numbers (I, II, III...).

The list is numbered with small Roman numbers (i, ii, iii...).

Defines the contents of a page's image returned from the Page.getImage method.

The image contains the background of the page.

The image contains the header and the footer of the page.

The image contains the page's text contents.

The image contains all parts without the screen elements.

The image contains all elements which are additionally displayed on a screen, such as the selection, the control characters and helper lines.

Defines a control character which is shown permanently on the screen.

Shows the control character of a space.

Shows the control character of a tabstop.

Shows the control character for the end of a paragraph.

Shows the control character of a forced line break.

Shows the anchor position of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing.

Marks a forced page break.

Marks a section break.

Shows the control character of a hyphen.

Shows the control character of a non-breaking space.

Shows the control character for the end of a table cell.

Shows a dot in front of the first line of a paragraph with one of the pagination settings 'keep with next', 'page break before' and 'keep lines together'.

Shows all control characters.

Determines the relational operator used by some types of merge fields.

The expression values must be equal.

The expression values must be not equal.

Expression 1 is less than expression 2.

Expression 1 is greater than expression 2.

Expression 1 is greater than or equal to expression 2.

Expression 1 is less than or equal to expression 2.

The border style of a ruler bar.

The ruler bar has a 3D design and no border.

The ruler bar has a flat design and no border.

The ruler bar has a 3D design and a border with a single line.

The ruler bar has has a flat design and a border with a single line.

The ruler bar has a flat design without a border. The colors depend on the color scheme currently set through the system or on the colors set with the displayColors property.

Specifies whether a ruler bar shows cell references when the current input position is in a table cell.

Default. The ruler bar does not show cell references.

The ruler bar only shows cell references when the text input position is in a table cell containing a formula.

The ruler bar shows cell references when the text input position is in a table call. When the input position changes to another cell, all references are shown relative to this new cell.

The ruler bar shows cell references relative to the cell which contains the text input position when this mode is switched on. When the input position changes to another cell, all references remain relative to the first cell.

Specifies whether a ruler bar shows cell references when the current input position is in a table cell.

The ruler is automatically scaled in inch or in millimeter depending on the currently set culture.

The ruler bar is scaled in centimeter including millimeter marks.

The ruler bar is scaled in centimeter without millimeter marks.

The ruler bar is scaled in inch.

Specifies the kind of a section break.

The section begins on the next line with a new paragraph.

The section begins on the next page with a new paragraph.

Specifies the existing side bar types.

No side bar.

The "Track Changes" side bar.

The "Field Navigator" side bar.

The "Comments" side bar.

All possible side bar types.

Determines the special zoom factor values for property TXTextControl.zoomFactor.

The zoom factor is calculated so that the complete width of a page becomes visible.

The zoom factor is calculated so that the current visible page becomes completely visible.

The zoom factor is calculated so that the complete text of a line becomes visible.

The border style of a status bar.

The status bar has a 3D design and a border with a single line.

The status bar has a 3D design and no border.

The status bar has a flat design and a border with a single line.

The status bar has a flat design and no border.

The status bar has a flat design without a border and with a horizontal color gradient in the background. The colors depend on the color scheme currently set through the system or on the colors set with the DisplayColors property.

The status bar has a flat design without a border and with a vertical color gradient in the background. The colors depend on the color scheme currently set through the system or on the colors set with the DisplayColors property.

Determines a certain text format.

Specifies HTML format (Hypertext Markup Language).

Specifies RTF format (Rich Text Format).

Specifies text in Unicode format.

Specifies the internal Text Control format (Unicode).

Specifies Microsoft Word format (.DOC version).

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF).

Specifies Microsoft Word format (.DOCX version).

Specifies Microsoft Excel format (Office Open XML version).

Specifies the position where to split the table.

The table is split in front of the row with the current input position.

The table is split behind the row with the current input position.

Defines how a tab gap is filled.

The tab gap is not filled.

The tab gap is filled with periods.

The tab gap is filled with dots.

The tab gap is filled with dashes.

The tab gap is underlined.

Determines the tabulator type.

The tab position is at the left side of the text.

The tab position is at the right side of the text.

The text is centered to the tab position.

The decimal sign is aligned at the tab position.

The tab is positioned right most and the text is diplayed at the left of this position. The tab position set with the TabPositions property is ignored. Only one tab of this kind is possible in a paragraph.

Specifies special text input positions at the beginning and the end of a text field.

The specified position is inside the field.

The specified position is outside the field.

The specified position is inside the next field. This member is only possible, if there are two following text fields without any character bewteen the fields. In this case InsideTextField is in the first field, OutsideTextField is between the fields and InsideNextTextField is in the second field.

Possible types of text fields.

The field type is ApplicationField.

The field type is CheckFormField.

The field type is DateFormField.

All FormField types.

The field type is HypertextLink.

The field type is Documentlink.

The field type is PageNumberField.

The field type is SelelctionFormField.

The field type is TextFormField.

The field type is TextField.

All types of text fields.

Determines how a text frame can be inserted in the text.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location above the text. This means that the text frame overwrites the text.

The text frame is inserted in the text as a single character.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location below the text. This means that the text overwrites the text frame.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location.

Specifies how a text is represented and interpreted.

The text type is text and it is displayed as it is.

The text is interpreted as a number.

Specifies the vertical alignment of a text.

Text is aligned at the top.

Text is aligned at the center.

Text is aligned at the bottom.

The mode how Text Control displays a document.

Text is formatted like in Normal view mode, and additionally the Text Control displays the pages in 3D view with gaps and a desktop background. Headers and footers are displayed in WYSIWYG mode.

Text is formatted according to the settings of the PageSize and the PageMargins properties. Headers and footers can be inserted but they are not displayed.

Specifies how the z-order of a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) can be changed.

If the frame is in front of the text, it becomes the bottommost of all objects in front of the text. If it is behind the text, it is becomes the bottommost of all objects.

The frame is moved behind the text below all other objects. This member is only possible, if the insertion mode is BehindTheText.

The frame is moved down one plane. If it is the bottommost object in front of the text, it is not moved behind the text.

The frame is moved in front of the text at the top of all other objects.

If the frame is behind the text, it becomes the topmost of all objects behind the text. If it is in front of the text, it becomes the topmost of all objects.

The frame is moved up one plane. If it is the topmost object behind the text, it is not moved in front of the text.

The addEventListener function registers event listener functions on the TXTextControl object.

Inserts a merge field at the current input position.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Inserts a new ApplicationField or TextField at the current input position.

Appends text to the document in a certain format.

Appends text in a certain format to the current document.

Decodes a string of data which has been encoded using base-64 encoding.

Begins a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between beginUndoAction and endUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step. The specified user-defined name is available via getUndoActionName.

Creates a base-64 encoded ASCII string from a unicode string. In contrast to the browser provided method btoa() this method handles all unicode characters and not only characters in the Latin1 range.

Clears the selected text or the character right from the current input position.

Clears the undo buffer.

Ends a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between beginUndoAction and endUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step.

Sets the text input focus to the web editor.

Gets a value indicating the current activation state. It can be activated, deactivated or disabled.

Gets a value indicating whether the undo buffer is active or not.

Gets the Text Control's background color.

Gets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the Text Control.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with character formatting attributes. The value depends on whether the formatting is allowed and the currently set edit mode.

Informs whether a part of a Text Control document has been selected and can be copied to the clipboard. The value depends on whether the formatting is allowed and the currently set edit mode.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with page and section formatting attributes. The value depends on whether the formatting is allowed and the currently set edit mode.

Informs whether the document's text and/or formatting attributes can be changed. The value depends on DocumentPermissions.readOnly and the currently set edit mode.

Informs whether the document can be printed. The value depends on the DocumentPermissions.allowPrinting and the currently set edit mode.

Informs whether an operation can be re-done using the Redo method.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with formatting styles. The value depends on the DocumentPermissions.allowFormattingStyles and the currently set edit mode.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with table formatting attributes.

Gets a value indicating whether the user can undo the previous operation in a Text Control.

Gets the global comment highlight mode.

Gets whether the control characters are visible or not.

Returns the culture and the UI culture of the control. The UI culture affects the string resource language. The culture represents date and time string formats, for example.

Gets a value indicating that markers for hypertext targets are shown or not.

Gets whether a marker frame is shown around a drawing to indicate its position and size.

Gets the global editable region highlight mode.

Gets a value indicating whether the document's text is protected, or can be freely edited and formatted.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Requests the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored on the web server.

Gets underlining style for the text displayed by the control. This property only determines the style.

Gets the foreground color of the control which is the color of the document's text.

Returns the name of the currently selected formatting printer by calling a provided callback function. For more information on the formatting printer see function setFormattingPrinter.

Gets a value determining how references to table cells in formulas are specified. Supported are the A1 and the R1C1 notation. The A1 notation specifies a table cell with a column letter and a row number, for example B3 refers to the table cell in the third row and the second column. The R1C1 notation addresses a table cell with a row number and a column number, for example R3C2 refers to the table cell in the third row and the second column. Relative addresses can be expressed with square brackets. R[-3]C[-2]. The numbers inside the square brackets show how many rows or columns the cell is relative to itself. Negative row numbers mean that the referenced cell is above the cell containing the formula. Negative column numbers mean that the referenced cell is to the left of the cell containing the formula.

Gets the names of the printers installed on the server which are usable by Text Control.

Gets a value indicating whether form field validation is active or not.

Gets a value indicating whether formulas in tables are automatically calculated when the text of an input cell is changed.

Gets a value indicating whether hyphenation is active or not.

Gets a value indicating whether language detection is active or not.

Gets a value indicating whether spell checking is active or not.

Gets a value indicating whether track changes is active or not.

Gets a value indicating whether the page orientation is landscape.

Gets the number of pages contained in the current document.

Gets the measure used for page sizes and page margins.

Gets a value indicating which control characters are shown permanently on the screen.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the redo method is made.

Gets the component render mode.

Gets a value controlling the selection of objects which are inserted behind the text. When the property is set to true, a mouse click selects the object behind the text. Otherwise, when this property is set to false, text in front of the object can be selected.

Returns the background color of the status bar by calling a provided callback function.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Requests a collection of either all subtextparts the current text part contains or only the subtextpart containing the input position from the server and returns the collection by calling a callback function which has to be provided as a parameter to the function.

Gets an array of strings specifying the names of all currently supported fonts.

Gets an array of PaperSize structures specifying the names and the size of all currently supported paper sizes.

Gets the control's text.

Gets the background color for the text.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Requests a collection of either all text fields the current text part contains or only the text field containing the input position from the server and returns the collection by calling a callback function which has to be provided as a parameter to the function.

Gets whether text frames that have no border line are shown with marker lines.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Requests a collection of either all text parts the current document contains or only the text part containing the input position from the server and returns the collection by calling a callback function which has to be provided as a parameter to the function.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the undo method is made. The property's value is null if there is no action that can be undone.

Gets a list of names specifying users who have access to editable regions. When a document is set to read-only all editable regions that are related to these users can be edited.

Gets the mode how Text Control displays a document.

Initializes the document editor.

Loads text in a certain format. The complete contents of the web editor are replaced.

Loads text in a certain format. The complete contents of the web editor are replaced.

Loads JSON data which is used to create table and field name menu items in the mailings ribbon tab.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Loads text in a certain format into the current selection.

Loads an XML database which is used to create table and field name menu items in the mailings ribbon tab.

Attempts to print the current document in the browser. Not all browsers support this.

Redoes the last Text Control operation.

Forces a layout refresh of the document editor. Use this method in cases where the editor doesn't automatically react to layout changes of your web site.

The removeListener function removes the specified event listener from the TXTextControl object.

Closes the WebSocket connection gracefully and removes the whole editor from the DOM.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. The removeTextField method removes a text field from the document.

Deletes the entire contents of the control.

Saves the current document in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Saves the current document in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Saves the current selection in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Selects text within the control.

Selects all text in the control.

Selects the word at the current text input position.

Sets a value indicating the current activation state. It can be activated, deactivated or disabled.

Sets a value indicating whether the undo buffer is active or not.

Sets the Text Control's background color.

Sets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the Text Control.

Sets the global comment highlight mode.

Sets whether the control characters are visible or not.

Sets a value indicating that markers for hypertext targets are shown or not.

Sets whether a marker frame is shown around a drawing to indicate its position and size.

Sets the global editable region highlight mode.

Sets a value indicating whether the document's text is protected, or can be freely edited and formatted.

Sets the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored on the web server.

Sets underlining style for the text displayed by the control. This property only determines the style.

Sets the foreground color of the control which is the color of the document's text.

Sets the name of a printer the text dimensions and capabilities of which are used to format the document. If the document is printed with this printer the displayed and the printed document have the same dimensions. If the property is set to "Standard", the system installed standard printer is used to format the document. If the property is set to "Display", the font dimensions of the display device are used to format the document. If the specified printer is not installed, the standard printer is used.

Sets a value determining how references to table cells in formulas are specified. Supported are the A1 and the R1C1 notation. The A1 notation specifies a table cell with a column letter and a row number, for example B3 refers to the table cell in the third row and the second column. The R1C1 notation addresses a table cell with a row number and a column number, for example R3C2 refers to the table cell in the third row and the second column. Relative addresses can be expressed with square brackets. R[-3]C[-2]. The numbers inside the square brackets show how many rows or columns the cell is relative to itself. Negative row numbers mean that the referenced cell is above the cell containing the formula. Negative column numbers mean that the referenced cell is to the left of the cell containing the formula.

Sets a new input position from a geometric location.

Sets a new input position from a page, line and column number.

Sets a new input position from a text position.

Sets a value indicating whether form field validation is active or not.

Sets a value indicating whether formulas in tables are automatically calculated when the text of an input cell is changed.

Sets a value indicating whether hyphenation is active or not.

Sets a value indicating whether language detection is active or not.

Sets a value indicating whether spell checking is active or not.

Sets a value indicating whether track changes is active or not.

Sets a value indicating whether the page orientation is landscape.

Sets the measure used for page sizes and page margins.

Sets a value indicating which control characters are shown permanently on the screen.

Sets the component render mode.

Sets a value controlling the selection of objects which are inserted behind the text. When the property is set to true, a mouse click selects the object behind the text. Otherwise, when this property is set to false, text in front of the object can be selected.

Sets the background color of the status bar.

Sets the control's text.

Sets the background color for the text.

Sets whether text frames that have no border line are shown with marker lines.

Sets the mode how Text Control displays a document.

Shows a built-in dialog box.

Shows or hides the web editor's horizontal ruler bar.

Shows one of the a built-in HTML dialog boxes.

Opens a field dialog either for changing properties of an existing merge field or for creating a new merge field. If the fieldType parameter is omitted, the field dialog for the merge field at the current input position is shown (if there is one). Setting the fieldType parameter to a valid value creates a new field or replaces the field at the current position.

Shows or hides the ribbon bar.

Shows or hides a specified side bar.

Shows or hides the web editor's status bar.

Shows or hides the web editor's vertical ruler bar.

Undoes the last Text Control operation.

Zooms the contents of the TextControl.

Gets a collection of all barcode frames contained in the text part with the input focus.

The type specific settings for the currently used barcode.

Gets or sets the clipboard mode (client or server).

Gets or sets if a right click into the text area opens a context menu or not.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets whether control characters are visible.

The displayed colors of the text control.

The document permission settings.

The DocumentSettings class provides properties which inform about general document settings, such as author and title, contained in the document the user is currently working on.

Gets or sets whether document target markers are visible.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets the edit mode the control is in.

All footnotes contained in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all headers and footers in the document.

Gets a collection of all images contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all inline styles the current document contains.

All formatting attributes at the current text input position.

The current text input position.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets a value indicating whether hyphenation is active or not.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets a value indicating whether language detection is active or not.

Gets or sets whether a wait dialog is shown while a document is being loaded.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets a value indicating whether spell checking is active or not.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets a value indicating whether change tracking is active or not.

The type and the formatting attributes of a bulleted or numbered list.

The margins for the pages of the current document.

Gets a collection of all pages in the document.

The width and height of the pages for the current document.

The paragraph formatting attributes of the text displayed by the control.

All paragraph formatting styles in the current document.

Gets the control's ribbon bar object.

Returns the "Permissions" ribbon tab object.

The horizontal ruler bar.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets if a confirmation dialog should be shown before discarding unsaved changes.

Gets a collection of all sections in the document.

Returns the current selection or sets the selection's position and length.

The sidebar toggle button shown at the top right of the ribbon.

Gets a collection of all signature fields in the document.

The status bar.

Gets or sets if table grid lines are visible.

Gets or sets if text fields are editable or not.

Gets or sets if text frame marker lines are visible.

Gets a collection of all text frames in the document.

Gets a collection of all main text parts the current document contains.

The vertical ruler bar.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Gets or sets the zoom factor, in percent, for a Text Control.

Represents a ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the ApplicationField class.

Displays a merge field dialog for certain merge field types.

The ApplicationField's parameters.

The merge field type ("MERGEFIELD", "DATE", "IF" etc.).

Contains the existing barcode types.

Represents an ARGB (alpha, red, green, blue) color.

Initializes a new instance of the Color class.

The alpha component of the color.

The blue component of the color.

The green component of the color.

The red component of the color.

Represents an MS Word specific DATE field.

Specifies the format of the field.

Specifies whether the field's formatting should be preserved.

Represents an MS Word specific IFFIELD field.

Specifies the first expression text that should be compared.

Specifies the second expression text that should be compared to Expression1.

Specifies the text that should be displayed when the comparison is false.

Specifies the comparison operator.

Specifies whether the field's formatting should be preserved.

Specifies the text that should be displayed when the comparison is true.

Represents an MS Word specific INCLUDETEXT field.

Specifies the bookmark switch of the field.

Specifies the file name of the document that should be inserted.

Specifies whether the field's formatting should be preserved.

Specifies the text format of the field.

The LoadSettings object provides properties for advanced settings and information during load operations.

Specifies how reporting merge blocks are handled when a document is saved.

Text only,images and paragraph formatting are discarded. This option is best suited for searching PDF files.

Generates paragraphs from the text flow. Images are discarded.

Default. Uses tables, images and text frames to create a document that best matches the original document's appearance.

Creates an XML format where each line of text has attributes like page number and geometrical position.

Default. Files embedded in the PDF document are loaded and provided through the LoadSettings.EmbeddedFiles property.

Provides the PDF document's metadata, form fields and text coordinates through the LoadSettings.EmbeddedData property.

Same as GenerateTextFrames, but only the first page is loaded. Can be used for previewing the document.

Specifies whether or not a new paragraph is created before text is loaded.

Specifies the format of text fields which are imported.

Specifies an array of strings containing the type names of fields which are to be imported.

Specifies how a document can be accessed after it has been loaded.

Sets a file path that is used to search for resources like images or hypertext links.

SpreadsheetML only. Gets or sets the name of the part of the document to be loaded.

Sets a file path that is used to search for resources like images or hypertext links.

Specifies whether or not the document background color is loaded.

Specifies whether or not hypertext links are loaded.

Specifies whether or not images are loaded.

DOCX Format only: Specifies whether or not bookmarks which extend over several characters are converted to SubTextParts.

Specifies the password when the document is restricted with access permissions.

Specifies how the document structure is generated when a PDF document is imported.

Specifies how reporting merge blocks are handled when a document is loaded.

Specifies the password for the user to open a password protected document.

Represents an MS Word specific MERGEFIELD field.

Specifies a string format which is applied to date / time values.

Specifies the name of the field.

Specifies a string format which is applied to numeric values.

Specifies whether the field's formatting should be preserved.

Specifies the text of the field.

Specifies the text of the field that is displayed after the field's text.

Specifies the text of the field that is displayed before the field's text.

Specifies the text format of the field.

Represents an MS Word specific NEXT field.

Specifies whether the field's formatting should be preserved.

Represents an MS Word specific NEXTIF field.

Specifies the first expression text that should be compared.

Specifies the second expression text that should be compared to Expression1.

Specifies the comparison operator.

Specifies whether the field's formatting should be preserved.

A JavaScript object which was introduced to act as a namespace for all proofing and spell checking methods and properties.

Adds a word to an existing user dictionary.

Retrieves a list of the names of all dictionary files on the server.

Retrieves information about all currently existing user dictionaries via a callback function.

Loads a dictionary.

Loads a list of words given as a string array as a user dictionary.

Removes a dictionary from the loaded dictionaries.

Removes an existing user dictionary.

Removes a word from an existing user dictionary.

Saves an existing user dictionary by supplying the contained words as a string array to a callback function.

The SaveSettings class provides properties for advanced settings and information during save operations.

HTML only. Specifies how to save stylesheet data with an HTML document.

All format information is saved in the body of the HTML document through HTML tags.

Stylesheets are saved in a newly created CSS file. This file has the same name and location as the corresponding HTML file or is specified through the SaveSettings.CssFileName property. The file is only created if it does not exist. If the HTML document is saved in a memory buffer, this setting cannot be used.

Stylesheets are saved in a newly created CSS file. This file has the same name and location as the corresponding HTML file or is specified through the SaveSettings.CssFileName property. If the file already exists, it is overridden. If the HTML document is saved in a memory buffer, this setting cannot be used.

Stylesheets are saved in the head of the HTML document.

Specifies data to be omitted when the document is saved.

Nothing is omitted.

Subtextparts are omitted. Only the subtextpart is omitted, the text and formatting attributes belonging to the subtextpart are saved.

Tracked changes are omitted. Only the markup is omitted, the text and formatting attributes belonging to the tracked change are saved.

Editable regions are omitted. Only the region marker are omitted, the text and formatting attributes belonging to the editable region are saved.

Sections are omitted.

Text fields are omitted.

Specifies how reporting merge blocks are handled when a document is saved.

The document is saved as it is. Reporting merge blocks are not converted.

If the document contains reporting merge blocks marked with subtextparts, these subtextparts are converted to document targets.

This member is not used, when a document is saved.

The document's author which will be saved in the document.

The document's creation date which will be saved in the document.

The application, which has created the document.

HTML only. Specifies how to save stylesheet data with an HTML document.

Specifies how a document can be accessed after it has been opened.

Sets the document's keywords which will be saved in the document.

Specifies an array of strings containing Javascript.

Sets the document's subject string which will be saved in the document.

Sets the document's title that will be saved in the document.

Sets a value between 1 and 100, which is the quality of a lossy image compression used when a document is saved.

Sets the format used for saving all images contained in the document.

Sets the maximum resolution for all images in the document in dots per inch when the document is saved.

Sets the date the document is last modified.

Specifies a password for the document's access permissions.

Specifies data to be omitted when the document is saved.

Specifies how reporting merge blocks are handled when a document is saved.

Specifies whether or not the document background color is saved.

Specifies the password for the user when the document is reopened.

Represents a text field in a Text Control document.

Initializes a new instance of the TextField class.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The bounding rectangle of a text field.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Returns true if the Textfield contains the current text input position.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Specifies whether a text field can be deleted by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Specifies whether a text field has a doubled input position in front of its first character and behind its last character.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Specifies whether the text of a text field can be changed by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The identifier of the text field.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Specifies whether a text field's text is checked on misspelled words.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The number of characters in the text field.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The Text field's name.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. Specifies whether a text field toggles its background to gray, if the current input position is in the field.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The 1-based first character position of the text field.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The Text field's text.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The field type ("APPLICATIONFIELD" or "TEXTFIELD").

The Table object represents a table in a document.

Checks whether table cells can be merged. Table cells can only be merged, if more than one cell in this table is selected.

Checks whether this table can be split. A table can only be split if it contains the current input position and no further text is selected.

Checks whether previously merged table cells in this table can be split. Only selected table cells can be split.

Gets the table's identifier.

Gets the nested level for the specified table. Top level tables have a level of 1.

Gets a table's outermost table. This is a top-level table with a nested level of 1. The property's value is an object of the prototype Table or null if this table is already a top-level table.

Gets table's outer table.

Merges all selected table cells in this table. {@link Table#getCanMergeCells} can be used to determine, if table cells can be merged or not.

Selects the complete table.

Selects the part of the table defined through two table cells.

Sets the table's id.

Splits a table below or above the current input position. If the table does not contain the current input position it cannot be split. The getCanSplit method can be used to determine if a table can be split or not. If a table is split above the first row a new line is inserted above the table and if a table is split below the last row a new line is inserted below the table. This is useful to insert text above or below a nested table that immediately starts and/or ends at the beginning or the end of the cell in which it is nested.

Splits all selected table cells in this table. Only previously merged cells can be split. The getCanSplitCells method can be used to determine, if table cells can be split or not.

The collection of all table cells the table consists of.

Gets a collection of all columns the table consists of.

Gets a collection of all tables nested in this table.

Gets a collection of all rows the table consists of.

The base class for table collections.

Gets the first table in the collection with the given id.

Removes the table at the current input position.

Removes the first table with the passed id.

Callback function for table events.

Represents a single cell of a table in a Text Control document.

Gets the formatting attributes of a table cell. The property's value is an object of type TableCellFormat.

Gets the table cell's column number.

Gets the table cell's formula. For each table cell a formula can be defined which is used to calculate the cell's text. The formula can contain references to other table cells in the same table. When the text of a referenced cell changes, the cell which references it is automatically updated.

Gets the number of characters in the table cell. If the table cell is merged, the property returns -1.

Gets the cell's name. Each table cell can have a name, which can be used to store any string data associated with the cell.

Gets, in twips, the horizontal position of the cell.

Gets the table cell's row number.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character in the table cell.

Gets the cell's text.

Gets, in twips, the width of the cell.

Selects the table cell.

Sets the table cell's formula. For each table cell a formula can be defined which is used to calculate the cell's text. The formula can contain references to other table cells in the same table. When the text of a referenced cell changes, the cell which references it is automatically updated.

Sets the cell's name. Each table cell can have a name, which can be used to store any string data associated with the cell.

Sets, in twips, the horizontal position of the cell.

Sets the cell's text.

Sets, in twips, the width of the cell.

A TableCellBorder object represents the border of a table cell.

Gets the cell's border color.

Gets the distance between the table cell's border and its text in twips.

Gets the cell's width in twips.

Sets the cell's border color.

Sets the distance between the table cell's border and its text in twips.

Sets the cell's width in twips.

Contains all cells of a table.

Gets a value indicating whether table cells can be removed. Table cells can be removed, if either the current text input position is in a table, or if a part of a table is selected.

Gets the cell with the specified row and column number.

Gets table's cell at the current input position.

Removes the table cell at the current text input position or all selected table cells when a text selection exists.

The TableCellFormat object represents the formatting attributes of a table cell.

Gets the table cell's background color.

Gets a number format for the table cell. The number format is used, when a formula is defined and the table cell's text is automatically calculated. When a number format is not defined, the property's value is an empty string. The number format string has a format as described in Office Open XML File Formats - ISO/IEC 29500 - 1, Chapter: 18.8.31 Number Formats.

Gets the text type of the table cell which determines whether the cell's text is interpreted as a number or as text When the type is Text, the cell's text is interpreted as text and it is displayed as it is. When the type is Number, the cell's text is interpreted as a number. The period character (.) is defined as decimal separator, the comma character (,) is defined as thousands separator.

Gets the vertical alignment of the text in the table cell.

Sets the table cell's background color.

Sets the table cell's number format.

Sets the table cell's text type.

Sets the vertical alignment of the text in the table cell.

The cell's bottom border.

The cell's left border.

The cell's right border.

The cell's top border.

Contains all tables of a Text Control document or part of the document.

Adds a table at the current input position.

Gets a value indicating whether a new table can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets a value indicating whether table's gridlines are shown or not.

Gets the table at the current input position or the first table in the collection with the given id.

Sets a value indicating wether table grid lines are shown or not.

Represents a single column of a table in a Text Control document.

Gets the formatting attributes of a table column.

Gets the number of the table column represented through this table column object.

Gets, in twips, the horizontal position of the column.

Gets, in twips, the width of the column.

Selects the table column.

Sets, in twips, the horizontal position of the column.

Sets, in twips, the width of the column.

Contains all columns of a table in a Text Control document

Adds a new table column at the current text input position.

Gets a value indicating whether a new column can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets a value indicating whether the selected columns can be removed. Columns can be removed, if either the current text input position is in a column, or if a part of a table is selected.

Gets the table column with the specified index or the column at the current input position.

Removes the table column at the current text input position or all selected columns when a text selection exists.

The event argument for table related events.

The table's information.

Information about a table.

The table's id.

The table's nesting level.

A TableOfContents object defines the position and the properties of a table of contents.

Gets value specifying whether each entry in the table of contents is a DocumentLink with a corresponding DocumentTarget.

Gets a value specifying whether the table of contents contains page numbers.

Gets a value specifying whether the page numbers in the table of contents are right-aligned.

Gets the highlight color for the table of contents.

Gets a value indicating whether the table of contents is highlighted.

Gets an identifier for a table of contents.

Gets the number of characters which belong to the table of contents.

Gets the maximum structure level for this table of contents. The table of contents contains all paragraphs with a structure level less than or equal this value. It must be between 1 and 10.

Gets the minimum structure level for this table of contents. The table of contents contains all paragraphs with a structure level less than or equal this value. It must be between 1 and 10.

Gets a name for the table of contents.

Gets the number of the table of contents in the text. The first table of contents has the number 1. The number is defined through the textflow. A table of contents with a smaller start position has a smaller number.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the table of contents.

Gets the text of the table of contents.

Gets a title for the table of contents.

Saves the TableOfContents in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of a table of contents and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Sets a value specifying whether each entry in the table of contents is a DocumentLink with a corresponding DocumentTarget.

Sets a value specifying whether the table of contents contains page numbers.

Sets a value specifying whether the page numbers in the table of contents are right-aligned.

Sets the highlight color for the table of contents.

Sets a value indicating whether the table of contents is highlighted.

Sets an identifier for the table of contents.

Sets the maximum structure level for this table of contents. The table of contents contains all paragraphs with a structure level less than or equal this value. It must be between 1 and 10.

Sets the minimum structure level for this table of contents. The table of contents contains all paragraphs with a structure level less than or equal this value. It must be between 1 and 10.

Sets a name for the table of contents.

Sets a title for the table of contents. An empty string indicates that the table of contents has no title.

Updates the content and the page numbers of the table of contents.

Callback function for table of contents related events.

Contains all tables of contents in a certain part of the document.

Adds a new table of contents to the document at the current text input position.

Gets the table of contents at the current input position or the table of contents with the specified identifier.

Gets the table of contents with the specified name.

Removes a table of contents from the collection including all its text and including all DocumentTargets to where the table's links point.

The method parameters for the TableOfContentsCollection.add() method.

Optional. Specifies whether each entry in the table of contents is a DocumentLink with a corresponding DocumentTarget.

Optional. Specifies whether the table of contents contains page numbers.

Optional. Specifies whether the page numbers in the table of contents are right-aligned.

Optional. The minimum structure level for this table of contents.

Optional. The maximum structure level for this table of contents.

Optional. The title for the table of contents.

The event argument for table of contents related events.

The table of contents' information.

Information about a table of contents.

Specifies whether each entry in the table of contents is a DocumentLink with a corresponding DocumentTarget.

Specifies whether the table of contents contains page numbers.

Specifies whether the page numbers in the table of contents are right-aligned.

The highlight color for the table of contents.

Indicates how the text of the table of contents is highlighted.

The table of contents' identifier.

The number of characters which belong to the table of contents.

The maximum structure level for this table of contents.

The minimum structure level for this table of contents.

The table of contents' name.

The table of contents' one-based number in the document.

The one-based index of the first character which belongs to the table of contents.

Represents a single row of a table in a Text Control document.

Gets a value specifying how the table row is formatted at page breaks.

Gets the formatting attributes of a table row.

Gets a value specifying whether the table row is part of the table's header.

Gets the minimum height, in twips, of the table row. The table row is formatted with this height if the text is smaller. Otherwise the row grows as necessary. If the property value is zero, the table row's height is always determined through the containing text.

Gets the number of the table row represented through this table row object.

Selects the table row.

Sets a value specifying how the table row is formatted at page breaks. The property value is True, if the table row can be formatted across page breaks. The property value is False, if the table row must not be formatted across page breaks.

Sets a value specifying whether the table row is part of the table's header.

Sets the minimum height, in twips, of the table row. The table row is formatted with this height if the text is smaller. Otherwise the row grows as necessary. If the property value is zero, the table row's height is always determined through the containing text.

Contains all rows of a table in a Text Control document.

Adds a count of rows before or after the first or last selected row.

Gets a value indicating whether a new row can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets a value indicating whether the selected rows can be removed. Rows can be removed, if either the current text input position is in a row, or if a part of a table is selected.

Gets the table row at the current input position or the table row with the specified number.

Removes the table row at the current text input position or all selected rows when a text selection exists.

The TextChar object represents a single character in a document.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the character.

Gets the value of the character.

Gets the character's number.

Contains all characters in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Inserts a character at the specified position using the specified font.

Inserts a control character at the specified text input position.

Gets a particular character from the collection specified through a certain geometrical position.

Removes the character by number.

Callback function for the textControlChanged event.

Callback function for the textControlLoaded event.

Callback function for the textDropped event.

The event argument object for the textDropped event.

Set this property to true to cancel the event.

The dropped text.

The MIME type of the dropped text.

Represents a text field in a document.

Gets the bounding rectangle of a text field.

Returns true, if the Textfield contains the current text input position.

Gets whether a text field can be deleted by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Sets whether a text field has a doubled input position in front of its first character and behind its last character.

Gets whether the text of a text field can be changed by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Gets the formatting rectangle of a text field.

Gets the highlight color for the text field.

Gets a value indicating when the text field is highlighted.

Gets an identifier for a text field.

Gets whether a text field's text is checked on misspelled words.

Gets the number of characters in a text field.

Relates a user-defined name to a text field.

Gets the first character position (one-based) of a text field.

Gets the text which is contained within a text field.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of a text field and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Sets whether a text field can be deleted by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Gets whether a text field has a doubled input position in front of its first character and behind its last character.

Sets whether the text of a text field can be changed by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Sets the highlight color for the text field.

Sets a value indicating when the text field is highlighted.

Sets an identifier for the text field.

Gets whether a text field's text is checked on misspelled words.

Sets the name of a text field.

Sets the text which is contained within a text field.

Callback function for text field related events.

Contains all standard text fields in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Adds a new TextField to the collection.

Adds a new TextField with the given text to the collection.

Removes all text fields from a Text Control document.

Gets the text field at the current text input position or the text field with the specified id.

Removes the text field from the Text Control document.

Contains all standard text fields in a Text Control document or part of the document.

Gets a value indicating whether a new text field can be inserted at the current input position.

The event argument object for text field related events.

The text field.

The type of the text field object in TextFieldEventArgs or in other properties / methods returning static field information (or arrays thereof).

The bounding rectangle of a text field.

Returns true if the Textfield contains the current text input position.

Specifies whether a text field can be deleted by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Specifies whether a text field has a doubled input position in front of its first character and behind its last character.

Specifies whether the text of a text field can be changed by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

The formatting rectangle of a text field.

The identifier of the text field.

Specifies whether a text field's text is checked on misspelled words.

The number of characters in the text field.

The text field's name.

Specifies whether a text field toggles its background to gray, if the current input position is in the field.

The 1-based first character position of the text field.

The text field's text content.

The field type ("APPLICATIONFIELD" or "TEXTFIELD").

The TextFormField object represents a text input field on a form.

Gets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the text formfield, when it is empty.

Sets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the text formfield, when it is empty.

Callback function for textform field events.

The event argument for text form field related events.

The text form field.

Information about a text form field.

Initializes a new instance of the TextFormFieldInfo class.

The TextFrame object represents a rectangle that can be filled with text by an end-user and can be edited like the main text.

Activates the text frame. The text frame receives the input focus. A text frame can only be activated, if the text part that contains the text frame has the input focus.

Changes the frame's z-order.

Gets the frame's horizontal alignment when it is anchored to a paragraph.

Gets the background color of the text frame.

Gets the border color of the text frame.

Gets the style of a text frame's border line.

Gets the width, in twips, of a text frame's border line.

Gets the frame's bounding rectangle relative to the upper left corner of the document.

Gets an identifier for the frame. A value of zero indicates that the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing has no identifier.

Gets a value determining whether the frame is treated as a single character or the document's text either flows around or overwrites the frame. If the document's text flows around or overwrites the frame, this property also determines whether the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is moved with the text or fixed positioned on a page.

Sets the distances, in twips, between the text frame's border line and the text.

Gets, in twips, the frame's current location. If the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is anchored to a paragraph, the location is relative to the paragraph. Otherwise, it is relative to the document. If the frame has a horizontal alignment or if it is inserted inline, this property returns zero. This property cannot be set for images, text frames, charts, barcodes or drawings which are inserted inline.

Gets whether a frame can be moved in the document at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Gets the name for the frame. An empty string indicates that the frame has no name.

Gets the frame's size in twips.

Gets whether the frame can be resized at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Gets the distances, in twips, between the frame and the document's text.

Gets the frame's character position in the document's text (one-based).

Gets the text frame's transparency. Zero means opaque and 1.0 means completely transparent.

Sets the frame's horizontal alignment when it is anchored to a paragraph.

Sets the background color for the text frame.

Sets the border color for the text frame.

Sets the style of a text frame's border line.

Sets the width, in twips, of a text frame's border line. To alter the distance between the border line and the text, use the InternalMargins property. If this property is set to zero, the text frame has no border line.

Sets an identifier for the frame. It must be a one-based value. A value of zero indicates that the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing has no identifier. Zero can also be used to delete a previously set identifier.

Sets a value determining whether the frame is treated as a single character or the document's text either flows around or overwrites the frame. If the document's text flows around or overwrites the frame, this property also determines whether the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is moved with the text or fixed positioned on a page.

Sets the distances, in twips, between the text frame's border line and the text. If a value is set to -1, it is not changed.

Sets, in twips, the frame's current location. If the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing is anchored to a paragraph, the location is relative to the paragraph. Otherwise, it is relative to the document. If the frame has a horizontal alignment or if it is inserted inline, this property returns zero. This property cannot be set for images, text frames, charts, barcodes or drawings which are inserted inline.

Sets whether a frame can be moved in the document at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Sets a name for the frame. An empty string indicates that the frame has no name. An empty string can also be used to delete a previously set name.

Sets the frame's size in twips. For images this property is read only.

Sets whether the frame can be resized at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Sets the distances, in twips, between the frame and the document's text. If a value is set to -1, it is not changed.

Sets the text frame's transparency. It must be a value between 0.0 and 1.0. Zero means opaque and 1.0 means completely transparent.

Callback function for a text frame related event.

Contains all text frames of a Text Control document or part of the document.

Creates and inserts a new text frame which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored text frames are moved with the text.

Inserts a new text frame which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified location relative to the paragraph it is anchored to and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored text frame are moved with the text.

Creates and inserts a new text frame which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a location relative to the top left corner of the complete document. All gaps between the pages must be included.

Inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page.

Inserts a text frame inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The text frame is inserted at the specified text input position.

Inserts a text frame with the built-in mouse interface. The text frame's size is determined through the end-user. A cross cursor indicates where the text frame can be inserted. Changing the document aborts the insertion process.

Gets the text frame selected by the user or the text frame with the specified identifier.

Gets the text frame with the specified name.

Removes a text frame from a Text Control document.

The event argument for text frame related events.

The text frame's information.

Represents a part of the document, which can be the main text, a header or footer or a text frame.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Inserts a new SubTextPart into the TextPart at the current input position.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Inserts a new ApplicationField or TextField into the TextPart at the current input position.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Requests a collection of either all subtextparts the current text part contains or only the subtextpart containing the input position from the server and returns the collection by calling a callback function which has to be provided as a parameter to the function.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Requests a collection of either all text fields in the text part or only the text field containing the input position from the server and returns the collection by calling a callback function which has to be provided as a parameter to the function.

Obsolete. This method will be removed in one of the next versions. Removes a SubTextPart from the TextPart.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The 0-based index of the text part.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The getter returns an object of type Selection.

Obsolete. This property will be removed in one of the next versions. The Text part type.

Contains all text parts in a TX Text Control document.

Sets the input focus to the specified text part. If the activated text part is not in the visible part of the document, the document is scrolled.

Gets the text part with the input focus.

Gets the main text part of the document.

Callback function for the textPasted event.

The event argument object for the textPasted event.

Set this property to true to cancel the event.

The pasted text.

The MIME type of the text.

The TextViewGeneratorColors object provides methods for getting, setting or resetting the display colors of the TextControl.

Gets the highlight color of a form field containing the current text input position. If the property is not set, the return value is null.

Gets the display color for the shadow at the right and the bottom edge of the pages.

Gets the display color for the area around the pages.

Gets the default highlight color of form fields. If the property is not set, the return value is null.

Gets the display color for the label showing which header or footer is activated.

Gets the display color for the dividing line between headers and footers and the main text.

Gets the display color for the shadow at the left and the top edge of the pages.

Resets the text control's DarkShadowColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's DesktopColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's HeaderFooterLabelColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's HeaderFooterLineColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's LightShadowColor to its system dependent default value.

Sets the highlight color of a form field containing the current text input position. To suppress highlighting the active FormField the property value can be set to null.

Sets the display color for the shadow at the right and the bottom edge of the pages.

Sets the display color for the area around the pages.

Sets the default highlight color of a form field. To suppress highlighting the FormField the property value can be set to null.

Sets the display color for the label showing which header or footer is activated.

Sets the display color for the dividing line between headers and footers and the main text.

Sets the display color for the shadow at the left and the top edge of the pages.

Callback function for the textViewLocationChanged event.

The event argument object for the textViewLocationChanged event.

The new text view location in twips.

A TrackedChange object represents a change made to the document after anyone has revised the document.

Gets a value specifying whether the TrackedChange is currently active or not.

Gets the kind of change.

Gets the date and time when the change has been made.

Gets the highlight color for the tracked change.

Gets a value indicating whether the tracked change is highlighted.

Gets the number of changed characters.

Gets the change's number.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first changed character.

Gets the changed text.

Gets the name of the user who has done the change.

Saves the tracked change in a certain format and sends the result back asynchronously by calling a given callback function.

Sets a value specifying whether the TrackedChange is currently active or not.

Sets the highlight color for the tracked change.

Sets a value indicating whether the tracked change is highlighted.

Callback function for events related to a tracked change.

Contains all tracked changes in the main text or another part of a document.

Gets the change at the current text input position or the next or the previous change in the textflow. The search begins at the current text input position. If there is more than one change at the current input position the innermost change is returned.

Removes a tracked change from the collection. Depending on the accept parameter the change is either accepted or rejected. When a change is rejected, inserted text is removed and deleted text is reinserted.

The event argument for a tracked change related event.

The tracked change's information.

Information about a tracked change.

The tracked change's kind.

The tracked change's time.

The tracked change's highlighting color.

The tracked change's highlighting mode.

The tracked change's length.

The tracked change's number.

The tracked change's starting position.

The tracked change's user name.

This class contains read only information about a user dictionary.

Indicates whether the user dictionary is editable or not.

Indicates whether suggestions are created using this dictionary or not.

Indicates whether the dictionary is selected as the default dictionary by the Language property.

Indicates whether spell checking of this dictionary is enabled or not.

The user dictionary's language in the format languagecode2-country/regioncode2.

The number of words the user dictionary contains.

The user dictionary's name.

Callback function for the webSocketClosed event.

The event argument object for the webSocketClosed event.

The close code sent by the server.

The reason the server closed the connection.

Indicates whether or not the connection was cleanly closed.

Callback function for the zoomFactorChanged event.

The event argument object for the zoomFactorChanged event.

The new zoom factor in percent.

Determines how text is appended to the document.

The loaded text is inserted at the end of the last paragraph of the existing document.

A new paragraph is created at the end of the document and the text is inserted in this paragraph.

A new section is created at the end of the document and the text is inserted in this section.

Determines the format of an ApplicationField.

This value can only be used with the LoadSettings.ApplicationFieldFormat property.

The field is supported and defined through the Heiler HighEdit component.

The field is supported and defined through Microsoft Word.

This value can only be used with the LoadSettings.ApplicationFieldFormat property.

Determines values for the AutoSize.AutoExpand and AutoSize.AutoShrink properties.

The control does not shrink automatically.

The control automatically shrinks vertically.

The control automatically shrinks horizontally.

The control automatically shrinks in both directions.

Determines a certain text format that must be stored in a one-dimensional byte array.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). How a PDF document is loaded depends on the LoadSettings.PDFImportSettings property. Only a complete document can be saved with this format.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format Archive (PDF/A). This format can only be used in saving operations and only a complete document can be saved with this format.

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in ANSI format.

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in Unicode format.

Specifies Microsoft Word format.

Specifies Microsoft Excel format (Office Open XML version).

Specifies Microsoft Word format (Office Open XML version).

Determines the location in the document where a context menu will be shown.

The menu context is a text selection.

The menu context is the text input position.

The menu context is the top page margin which contains a header.

The menu context is the top page margin which contains no header.

The menu context is the bottom page margin which contains a footer.

The menu context is the bottom page margin which contains no footer.

The menu context is the top or the bottom page margin.

The menu context is a PageNumberField.

The menu context is a selected frame (text frame, image, chart or barcode).

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a Table.

The menu context is a text selection or a text input position in a TextField.

The menu context is a MisspelledWord.

The menu context is a TableOfContents.

The menu context is a TrackedChange.

The menu context is a CommentedText.

The menu context is a FormField.

The menu context is a Footnote reference mark.

Determines values for the control characters used in a TextControl document.

Defines the end of a paragraph (Keyboard: ENTER).

Defines a line break without beginning a new paragraph (Keyboard: SHIFT+ENTER).

Defines a page break (Keyboard: CTRL+ENTER).

Defines a page column break (Keyboard: CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER).

Defines a tabulator (Keyboard: TAB).

Defines a non-breaking space (Keyboard: CTRL+SHIFT+Space).

Defines a non-visible hyphen (Keyboard: CTRL+(-)).

Determines the kind of the cursor at a certain location in a document.

The cursor is an I-beam.

The cursor is an arrow cursor pointing to northeast.

The cursor is a vertical splitting cursor.

The cursor is an up arrow cursor.

The cursor is a standard arrow cursor pointing to northwest.

The cursor is a down arrow cursor.

The cursor is a two-headed horizontal (west/east) sizing cursor.

The cursor is the two-headed vertical (north/south) sizing cursor.

The cursor is the two-headed diagonal (northwest/southeast) sizing cursor.

The cursor is the two-headed diagonal (northeast/southwest) sizing cursor.

The cursor is the four-headed sizing cursor, which consists of four joined arrows that point north, south, east, and west.

The cursor is the crosshair cursor.

The cursor is the cursor that indicates that a particular region is invalid for the current operation.

The cursor is the standard cursor for copying data during a drag and drop operation.

The cursor is the standard cursor for moving data during a drag and drop operation.

Determines which frameborders are visible of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing.

The paragraph has no frame.

The paragraph has a left frame line.

The paragraph has a right frame line.

The paragraph has a frame line at the top.

The paragraph has frame line at the bottom.

The paragraph has a complete frame.

The paragraph has a complete frame. If the following or the previous paragraph also has a frame, the frames are merged to a single frame.

Determines the style of a frame of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing.

The paragraph's frame is drawn with a single line.

The paragraph's frame is drawn with a doubled line.

Determines the justification.

To justify a line additional space is added to the spaces between the words.

To justify a line Kashida lines are inserted.

To justify a line both kinds of justification are used.

Determines the tabulator type.

The tab position is at the left side of the text.

The tab position is at the right side of the text.

The text is centered to the tab position.

The decimal sign is aligned at the tab position.

The tab is positioned right most and the text is diplayed at the left of this position. The tab position set with the TabPositions property is ignored. Only one tab of this kind is possible in a paragraph.

Determines how the tab gap is filled.

The tab gap is not filled.

The tab gap is filled with periods.

The tab gap is filled with dots.

The tab gap is filled with dashes.

The tab gap is underlined.

Determines how the frame of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing can be inserted in the text.

The frame is inserted in the text as a single character.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location. The text stops at the top and continues at the bottom of the frame.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location. The text flows around the frame and empty areas at the left and right side are filled.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location above the text. This means that the frame overwrites the text.

The frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location below the text. This means that the text overwrites the frame.

The frame is anchored to a paragraph and moved with the text.

The frame is fixed positioned on a page.

Determines a certain clipboard format that can be pasted into a TextControl document.

Specifies a barcode.

Specifies a chart.

Specifies HTML format (Hypertext Markup Language).

Specifies an image. An image can be pasted, if it is a device dependent or a device independent bitmap, a TIFF image or a Windows metafile.

Specifies unformatted text.

Specifies RTF format (Rich Text Format).

Specifies formatted text in the internal TX Text Control format.

Specifies an image including information about how the image is positioned in the document (inline or geometrically positioned).

Specifies a TX Text Control textframe including its contents. The clipbord contains also information about how the textframe is positioned in the document (inline or geometrically positioned).

Determines the writing direction of a paragraph.

The writing direction is left to right, which means that blocks of text with left to right and right to left characters are ordered from left to right.

The writing direction is right to left, which means that blocks of text with left to right and right to left characters are ordered from right to left.

Determines the settings used with the Selection.ChangeCapitalization method.

The first letter of each sentence is capitalized.

The first letter of each word is capitalized.

All letters are changed to lowercase.

All letters are changed to uppercase.

Lowercase letters are changed to uppercase and vice versa.

Determines search options for the Find methods.

Locates only instances of the search text that have the exact casing.

Locates only instances of the search text which are whole words.

The search text, if found, is not highlighted.

Does not display message boxes to inform about search results.

The search starts at the end of the control's document and searches to the beginning of the document.

Determines the type of a header or footer.

The object is a header. When an even header exists, the object represents the odd header. Otherwise it represents the header of all pages.

The object represents a special header of the document's or section's first page.

The object is a footer. When an even footer exists, this member represents the odd footer. Otherwise it represents the footer of all pages.

The object represents a special footer of the document's or section's first page.

The object represents an even header.

The object represents an even footer.

Determines values for the horizontal alignment of the text or of text frames, images and charts.

The alignment is left aligned.

The alignment right aligned.

The alignment is centered.

The alignment is justified. This value is only used with text. It cannot be used with text frames, images and charts.

Determines how an Image can be inserted in the text.

The image is inserted in the text as a single character.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location. The text stops at the top and continues at the bottom of the image.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location. The text flows around the image and empty areas at the left and right side are filled.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location above the text. This means that the image overwrites the text.

The image is inserted at a certain geometrical location below the text. This means that the text overwrites the image.

The image is anchored to a paragraph and moved with the text. This member cannot be used with the ImageCollection.Add methods.

The image is fixed positioned on a page. This member cannot be used with the ImageCollection.Add methods.

Specifies the kind of a bulleted or numbered list.

The text is neither a bulleted nor a numbered list.

The list is a bulleted list.

The list is a numbered list.

The list is a structured list. All numbers of higher levels (lower level numbers) are displayed in front of the list number. The additional text of all levels in front and behind the list numbers is also displayed.

Specifies the kind of a misspelled word.

Specifies all misspelled words.

Specifies all misspelled words which are marked as duplicate.

Specifies all misspelled words which are marked as ignored.

Specifies all misspelled words which do not have a special meaning.

Specifies the format of a numbered list.

The list is numbered with Arabic numbers (1, 2, 3...).

The list is numbered with letters (a, b, c...).

The list is numbered with capital letters (A, B, C...).

The list is numbered with Roman numbers (I, II, III...).

The list is numbered with small Roman numbers (i, ii, iii...).

A text selection contains different number formats.

Defines the contents of a page's image returned from the Page.GetImage method.

The image contains all parts without the screen elements.

The image contains the background of the page.

The image contains the header and the footer of the page.

The image contains the page's text contents.

The image contains all elements which are additionally displayed on a screen, such as the selection, the control characters and helper lines.

Specifies how the document structure is generated when a PDF document is imported.

Text only,images and paragraph formatting are discarded. This option is best suited for searching PDF files.

Generates paragraphs from the text flow. Images are discarded.

Default. Uses tables, images and text frames to create a document that best matches the original document's appearance.

Same as GenerateTextFrames, but only the first page is loaded. Can be used for previewing the document.

Obsolete. This setting will be removed in a future version. Use LoadEmbeddedData instead.

Provides the PDF document's metadata, form fields and text coordinates through the LoadSettings.EmbeddedData property.

Default. Files embedded in the PDF document are loaded and provided through the LoadSettings.EmbeddedFiles property.

Specifies the format of additionally provided data when a PDF document is imported.

Specifies an XML format with information about the position and the kind of all form fields contained in the PDF document.

Specifies the PDF document's metadata.

Specifies an XML format where each line of text has attributes such as page number and geometrical position.

Defines a control character which is shown permanently on the screen.

Shows the control character of a space.

Shows the control character of a tabstop.

Shows the control character for the end of a paragraph.

Shows the control character of a forced line break.

Shows the anchor position of an image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing.

Marks a forced page break.

Marks a section break.

Shows the control character of a hyphen.

Shows the control character of a non-breaking space.

Shows the control character for the end of a table cell.

Shows a dot in front of the first line of a paragraph with one of the pagination settings 'keep with next', 'page break before' and 'keep lines together'.

Shows all control characters.

Specifies the kind of the section break.

The section begins on the next line with a new paragraph.

The section begins on the next page with a new paragraph.

Determines a certain text format.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). How a PDF document is loaded depends on the LoadSettings.PDFImportSettings property. Only a complete document can be saved with this format.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format Archive (PDF/A). This format can only be used in saving operations and only a complete document can be saved with this format.

Specifies whether an 'All Formats' item is added to the Load dialog. Selecting that item displayes all files that can be chosen by the dialog.

Specifies CSS format (Cascading Style Sheet). This format can only be used in saving operations.

Specifies HTML format (Hypertext Markup Language).

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in ANSI format.

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in Unicode format.

Specifies Microsoft Word format (.DOC version).

Specifies text in Windows ANSI format (an end of a paragraph is marked with the control characters 13 and 10).

Specifies text in Windows Unicode format (an end of a paragraph is marked with the control characters 13 and 10).

Specifies RTF format (Rich Text Format).

Specifies Microsoft Excel format (Office Open XML version).

Specifies Microsoft Word format (Office Open XML version).

Specifies XML format (Extensible Markup Language).

Determines a certain text format that can be stored as a string.

Specifies CSS format (Cascading Style Sheet). This format can only be used in saving operations.

Specifies HTML format (Hypertext Markup Language).

Specifies Text in Windows Unicode format (an end of a paragraph is marked with the control characters 13 and 10).

Specifies RTF format (Rich Text Format).

Specifies XML format (Extensible Markup Language).

Specifies the position where to add table rows and columns or where to split a table.

Table rows or columns are inserted or the table is split in front of the row or column with the current input position.

Table rows or columns are inserted or the table is split behind the row or column with the current input position.

Specifies special text input positions at the beginning and the end of a TextField.

The specified position is inside the field.

The specified position is outside the field.

The specified position is inside the next field. This member is only possible, if there are two following text fields without any character bewteen the fields. In this case InsideTextField is in the first field, OutsideTextField is between the fields and InsideNextTextField is in the second field.

Specifies types of text fields.

The field type is ApplicationField.

The field type is CheckFormField.

The field type is DateFormField.

Specifies all types of FormFields.

The field type is HypertextLink.

The field type is DocumentLink.

The field type is PageNumberField.

The field type is SelectionFormField.

The field type is TextFormField.

The field type is TextField.

Specifies all types of text fields.

Determines how a TextFrame can be inserted in the text.

The text frame is inserted in the text as a single character.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location. The text stops at the top and continues at the bottom of the text frame.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location. The text flows around the text frame and empty areas at the left and right side are filled.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location above the text. This means that the text frame overwrites the text.

The text frame is inserted at a certain geometrical location below the text. This means that the text overwrites the text frame.

The text frame is anchored to a paragraph and moved with the text.

The text frame is fixed positioned on a page.

Specifies options how to set the zoom factor of a TextControl.

The zoom factor is calculated so that the complete width of a page becomes visible.

The zoom factor is calculated so that the complete text of a line becomes visible.

The zoom factor is calculated so that the current visible page becomes completely visible.

Specifies how the z-order of a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) can be changed.

If the frame is in front of the text, it becomes the bottommost of all objects in front of the text. If it is behind the text, it is becomes the bottommost of all objects.

The frame is moved behind the text below all other objects. This member is only possible, if the insertion mode is BehindTheText.

The frame is moved down one plane. If it is the bottommost object in front of the text, it is not moved behind the text.

The frame is moved in front of the text at the top of all other objects.

If the frame is behind the text, it becomes the topmost of all objects behind the text. If it is in front of the text, it becomes the topmost of all objects.

The frame is moved up one plane. If it is the topmost object behind the text, it is not moved in front of the text.

The AdaptFontEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.AdaptFont, WPF.TextControl.AdaptFont and ServerTextControl.AdaptFont events.

Gets or sets the adapted font.

Gets the name of the original font which must be adapted.

Gets a list of all fonts currently supported.

The ApplicationField class supports text field formats of applications such as Microsoft Word.

Initializes a new instance of the ApplicationField class. The format of the parameters depends on the application that supports the field. The field is initialized without syntax check.

Specifies the format of the field. Specifies the type name of the field. Specifies the visible text of the field. Specifies an array of strings which are the field's parameters.

Gets or sets the field's format.

Gets or sets the field's type name.

Gets or sets the field's parameters.

An instance of the ApplicationFieldCollection class contains all created or imported Microsoft Word or Heiler HighEdit fields represented through objects of the type ApplicationField.

Inserts a new object of the type ApplicationField at the current input position.

Specifies the field to add.

Removes all fields of the type ApplicationField from a TX Text Control document.

If this parameter is set to true, all fields are removed without deleting their visible text.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the field at the current input position or null, if there is no such field at the current input position.

Gets the field with the specified id, previously set with the ID property.

Specifies the field's identifier set with the ID property.

Removes a field of the type ApplicationField including its visible text from a TX Text Control document.

Specifies the field to remove.

Removes a field of the type ApplicationField from a TX Text Control document. The visible text is deleted depending on the keepText parameter.

Specifies the field to remove. If this parameter is set to true, the field is removed without deleting its visible text.

Gets the field with the specified number from the collection.

The AutoSize class is used with the TextControl.AutoControlSize property, to enable automatic expansion or shrinking of a Text Control's width or height.

Initializes a new instance of the AutoSize class. The constructor offers the individual setting of all features.

Specifies possible directions for expanding the control. Specifies possible directions for shrinking the control. Specifies the maximum size, in twips, for expanding the control. Specifies the minimum size, in twips, for shrinking the control.

Gets or sets possible directions for expanding the control.

Gets or sets possible directions for shrinking the control.

Gets or sets the maximum size, in pixels, for expanding the control.

Gets or sets the minimum size, in pixels, for shrinking the control.

The BookmarkDialog class implements a Windows Forms dialog box to insert a DocumentTarget at the current input position.

Creates a BookmarkDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl. If there is a target at the current input position, the name of the target is shown and can be edited. Otherwise a new DocumentTarget can be inserted at the current input position.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Creates a BookmarkDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl. If the specified DocumentTarget is not null, the name of the target is shown and can be edited. Otherwise a new DocumentTarget can be inserted at the current input position.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened. Specifies the DocumentTarget to edit.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a BookmarkDialog dialog box.

Identifies the Bookmark Name label.

Identifies the Bookmark Name text box.

Identifies the Bookmark Names label.

Identifies the Bookmark Names list box.

Identifies the Deletable check box.

Identifies the Automatically Generated Bookmarks check box.

Identifies the OK button.

Identifies the Cancel button.

Finds a control that has the provided identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by an enum of type BookmarkDialog.DialogItem.

The ButtonBar class represents a Windows Forms tool bar which can be used to show or to set font and paragraph attributes of a Windows Forms TextControl.

Resets the offset array to its default state.

Resets the button array to its default state.

Resets the separator array to its default state.

Resets all display colors of a button bar to their system dependent default values.

Gets or sets the border style of the button bar.

Gets or sets an array of additional offsets, in pixels, between the buttons.

Gets or sets an array of buttons the button bar consists of.

Gets or sets an array of boolean values specifying whether or not a separator is drawn between two buttons.

Gets or sets the painting style of the buttons.

Gets or sets the colors of the button bar.

Gets or sets a value determining the button bar's read only mode.

The ButtonBar.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a Windows Forms ButtonBar control.

Initializes a new instance of the ButtonBar.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the ButtonBar.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Resets the button bar's BackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonBackColorBottom to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonBackColorMiddle to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonBackColorTop to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonHotTrackBottom to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonHotTrackTop to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonSelectedBottom to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonSelectedTop to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonPressedBottom to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonPressedTop to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ButtonFrameColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ComboBoxBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's ForeColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's GradientBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's SeparatorColorDark to its system dependent default value.

Resets the button bar's SeparatorColorLight to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the background color at the left edge of the button bar.

Gets or sets the background color at the bottom of a button.

Gets or sets the background color in the middle of a button.

Gets or sets the background color at the top of a button.

Gets or sets the background color at the bottom of a button, if the mouse cursor is over the button.

Gets or sets the background color at the top of a button, if the mouse cursor is over the button.

Gets or sets the background color at the bottom of a button used when the button is selected.

Gets or sets the background color at the top of a button used when the button is selected.

Gets or sets the background color at the bottom of a button used when the button is pressed down.

Gets or sets the background color at the top of a button used when the button is pressed down.

Gets or sets the frame color of a selected or pressed button.

Gets or sets the background color of the combo boxes.

Gets or sets the color used for text and the button images.

Gets or sets the background color at the right edge of the button bar.

Gets or sets the color of the dark part of a separator.

Gets or sets the color of the light part of a separator.

The CannotTrackChangeEventArgs class provides data for the CannotTrackChange event.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the change of the document should be performed.

Gets the default message for the user.

A subscriber can set this property to true to indicate that he has handled the event.

The CheckFormField class represents a checkbox in a document.

Initializes a new instance of the CheckFormField class.

Specifies whether the checkbox is initially checked or unchecked.

Represents the default character which is used to display the checkbox in the checked state.

Represents the default character which is used to display the checkbox in the unchecked state.

Gets or sets the character which is used to display the checkbox in the checked state.

Gets or set a value indicating whether the checkbox is in the checked state.

Gets possible characters which can be used to display the checkbox in the checked state.

Gets possible characters which can be used to display the checkbox in the unchecked state.

Gets or sets the character which is used to display the checkbox in the unchecked state.

The CheckFormFieldEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.FormFieldCheckChanged event.

Gets an object representing the CheckFormField that causes the event.

Contains all comments in the main text or another part of a document.

Specifies the result when a comment has been added to the document.

An unexpected error has occurred.

The comment input control was't opened or the comment wasn't inserted because there is no selection.

The comment wasn't inserted because the specified position values are invalid. Invalid start and/or length values have been specified.

The comment input control was't opened or the comment wasn't inserted because the selection is too complex. It is not a continuous sequence of characters.

The comment input control has been opened or the comment has successfully been inserted.

Opens a comment input control so that the end-user can type the comment's text. The new comment is inserted after the input control has been closed.

Adds a new comment given through the specified CommentedText object.The commented text is defined through the CommentedText.Start and CommentedText.Length properties. If the length of the commented text is zero, the current text selection is used to define the text associated with the comment.

Defines the commented text and its comment to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the comment at the current text input position. If there is more than one comment at the current text input position the innermost comment is returned.

Gets the next or the previous comment in the textflow. The search begins at the current text input position.

If this parameter is true, the next comment in the textflow is returned.

Removes a CommentedText from the collection. The method removes the saved position values and the comment string. The text, which is commented, is not removed from the document.

Specifies the CommentedText to remove.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets the comment with the specified number from the collection.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The CommentEventArgs class provides data for the CommentCreated, CommentDeleted, CommentedTextEntered, CommentedTextLeft, CommentChanged and CommentStateChanged events.

Gets an object that represents the commented text.

A CommentedText object represents a commented piece of text.

Creates a CommentedText object with the specified comment string. The current text selection defines the commented text.

Specifies a comment string.

Creates a CommentedText object with the specified comment string and start position and length specifying the commented text.

Specifies a comment string. Specifies the index (one-based) of the commented text's first character. Specifies the number of characters which belong to the commented text.

Creates a CommentedText object with the specified comment string which is a reply to the specified comment.

Specifies a comment string. The new comment is a reply to this comment.

Opens a comment input control to edit the comment's text.

Opens a comment input control to reply to this comment.

Saves the commented text in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the commented text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the commented text as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the commented text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the commented text in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the commented text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the commented text as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the commented text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Scrolls the beginning of the commented text into the visible part of the document using a default position depending on the previous position.

Scrolls the beginning of the commented text into the visible part of the document using the specified position.

Specifies an InputPosition.ScrollPosition value.

Selects the commented part of the document.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the comment is currently active or not.

Gets or sets a string which is the comment.

Gets the date and time when the comment has been inserted.

Gets the default highlight color for the commented text.

Gets or sets the highlight color for the commented text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the commented text is highlighted.

Gets or sets a user-defined identifier.

Gets the number of commented characters.

Gets the comment's number.

Gets the comment for which this comment is a reply.

Gets all replies of this comment or null if there are no replies.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first commented character.

Gets the commented text.

Gets the name of the user who has commented the document.

The CommentsDialog class implements a dialog box that shows all comments of the document.

Creates a CommentsDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a CommentsDialog dialog box.

Identifies the comments count label.

Identifies the refresh comments button.

Identifies the comments viewer.

Identifies the delete comment button.

Identifies the delete all comments button.

Identifies the edit comment button.

Identifies the reply comment button.

Identifies the close button.

Finds a control that has the provided identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by an enum of type CommentsDialog.DialogItem.

An object of the Condition class is an element of the ConditionalInstruction class and represents the state of a FormField that has to be fulfilled to execute the instructions of the related ConditionalInstruction object.To create a condition, the Condition object has to be initialized with a FormField that is located inside the document.Furthermore, a comparison value has to be defined by the constructor's comparisonValue parameter.• The constructor's isChecked parameter value of a condition that references to a CheckFormField represents a check state to be fulfilled.• Conditions that are related to form fields of type TextFormField or SelectionFormField execute a comparison to the form field's Text property value.• In addition, the text of a SelectionFormField object can be compared with one of its SelectionFormField.Items array entries or checked whether or not the string equals to one of its SelectionFormField.Items array entries.• Up to four different comparison types can be applied to compare the Date property of DateFormField objects with a specified value: If the comparison value is an object of type System.DateTime, the year, month and day of month is compared with the current property value.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that tests whether the CheckFormField's Checked property value equals the specified boolean value. The Condition.ComparisonValueType property is set to ComparisonValueTypes.CheckState.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the value that the CheckFormField.Checked property must have to fulfill the condition.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the TextFormField's Text property with the specified string value. If that value is null or an empty string, the condition's comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.NoValue. Otherwise as ComparisonValueTypes.CustomText.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the TextFormField's Text property with the specified string value. The textComparisonFlag parameter determines whether the comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.CustomText or ComparisonValueTypes.Regex. If the comparisonValue parameter is null or an empty string, a System.ArgumentException is thrown.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value. Determines whether the comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.CustomText or ComparisonValueTypes.Regex.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the SelectionFormField's Text property with the specified string value. If that value is null or an empty string, the condition's comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.NoValue.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the SelectionFormField's Text property with the specified string value. The textComparisonFlag parameter determines whether the comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.CustomText or ComparisonValueTypes.Regex. If the comparisonValue parameter is null or an empty string, a System.ArgumentException is thrown.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value. Determines whether the comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.CustomText or ComparisonValueTypes.Regex.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the SelectionFormField's Text property with the specified string value. The itemComparisonFlag parameter determines whether the comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.AnyItem or ComparisonValueTypes.SpecificItem. If the itemComparisonFlag parameter is set to ItemComparisonFlags.SpecificItem and the comparisonValue parameter is null, an empty string or not an element of the SelectionFormField.Items collection, a System.ArgumentException is thrown.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value. Determines whether the comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.AnyItem or ComparisonValueTypes.SpecificItem.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the DateFormField's Date property with the specified System.DateTime value. If that value is null, the condition's comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.NoValue. Otherwise as ComparisonValueTypes.Date.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the DateFormField's Date property with the specified integer value. If that value is greater than 1600 and less than 10000, the condition's comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.Year. If the value is a positive number between 1 and 31, the comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.DayOfMonth. For all other integer values a System.ArgumentException is thrown.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the DateFormField's Date property with the specified Condition.Month value. That condition's comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.Month.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Creates an instance of the Condition class that compares the DateFormField's Date property with the specified System.DayOfWeek value. That condition's comparison value is interpreted as ComparisonValueTypes.Weekday.

Specifies the form field whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value. Specifies the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value. Specifies the value that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Determines the comparison operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value or the interpretation of that value.

Form field value equals to the specified comparison value or the interpretation of that value.

Form field value does not equal to the specified comparison value or the interpretation of that value.

Form field value contains the specified comparison value.

Form field value starts with the specified comparison value.

Form field value ends with the specified comparison value.

Form field value does not contain the specified comparison value.

Form field value does not start with the specified comparison value.

Form field value does not end with the specified comparison value.

Form field value is greater than the specified comparison value.

Form field value is greater than or equals to the specified comparison value.

Form field value is less than the specified comparison value.

Form field value is less than or equals to the specified comparison value.

Determines how the condition's comparison value is interpreted by the condition.

The condition tests the check state of the related condition's CheckFormField. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property is set to true. The Condition.ComparisonOperator returns the enumeration value ComparisonOperators.Is, if the condition checks whether the check form field is checked. Otherwise ComparisonOperators.IsNot.

The condition examines whether the related condition's FormField property does not provide a suitable value that can be used for comparison. Form field values of type TextFormField and SelectionFormField are not suitable for comparison, if their FormField.Text property value is an empty string. The corresponding value of a DateFormField cannot be compared, if its DateFormField.Date property returns null. If the ComparisonValueTypes.NoValue value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property is set to null. The ComparisonValueTypes.NoValue enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is or ComparisonOperators.IsNot.

The condition compares the FormField.Text property value of the related condition's TextFormField or SelectionFormField with the value of the Condition.ComparisonValue property. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property value is an object of type string. Furthermore, all provided values of the ComparisonOperators enumeration can be set as Condition.ComparisonOperator property value.

The condition checks whether or not the FormField.Text property value of the related condition's TextFormField or SelectionFormField matches a specific regular expression. That regular expression is represented by the Condition.ComparisonValue property. It is an object of type string and conforms to the rules of the .NET Framework regular expression engine. The ComparisonValueTypes.Regex enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is or ComparisonOperators.IsNot.

The condition compares the FormField.Text property value of the related condition's SelectionFormField with an item of SelectionFormField.Items string array collection. The representation of that item is an object of type string, which is specified by the Condition.ComparisonValue property. All provided values of the ComparisonOperators enumeration can be set as Condition.ComparisonOperator property value.

The condition examines whether the related condition's SelectionFormField.Text property value matches one of the SelectionFormField.Items string array collection values. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property is set to null. The ComparisonValueTypes.AnyItem enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is or ComparisonOperators.IsNot.

The condition compares the DateFormField.Date property value of the related condition's DateFormField with a date that is specified by the Condition.ComparisonValue property. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property is an object of type System.DateTime. The ComparisonValueTypes.Date enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is, ComparisonOperators.IsNot,ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThan, ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThanOrEqual, ComparisonOperators.IsLessThan or ComparisonOperators.IsLessThanOrEqual.

The condition compares the DateFormField.Date property value of the related condition's DateFormField with a year that is specified by the Condition.ComparisonValue property. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property represents an integer between 1601 and 9999. The ComparisonValueTypes.Year enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is, ComparisonOperators.IsNot, ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThan, ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThanOrEqual, ComparisonOperators.IsLessThan or ComparisonOperators.IsLessThanOrEqual.

The condition compares the DateFormField.Date property value of the related condition's DateFormField with a month that is specified by the Condition.ComparisonValue property. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValueproperty is an object of type Condition.Month. The ComparisonValueTypes.Month enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is, ComparisonOperators.IsNot, ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThan, ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThanOrEqual, ComparisonOperators.IsLessThan or ComparisonOperators.IsLessThanOrEqual.

The condition compares the DateFormField.Date property value of the related condition's DateFormField with a day of the month that is specified by the Condition.ComparisonValue property. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property represents an integer between 1 and 31. The ComparisonValueTypes.DayOfMonth enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is, ComparisonOperators.IsNot, ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThan, ComparisonOperators.IsGreaterThanOrEqual, ComparisonOperators.IsLessThan or ComparisonOperators.IsLessThanOrEqual.

The condition compares the DateFormField.Date property value of the related condition's DateFormField with a weekday that is specified by the Condition.ComparisonValue property. If this enumeration value is returned by the Condition.ComparisonValueType property, the Condition.ComparisonValue property is an object of type System.DayOfWeek. The ComparisonValueTypes.Weekday enumeration value can only be combined with the operator ComparisonOperators.Is or ComparisonOperators.IsNot.

Determines how the specified comparison value has to be interpreted when comparing it with the SelectionFormField's Text property.

The comparison value represents an item of the SelectionFormField.Items array.

The condition checks whether or not the SelectionFormField's Text property value equals to one of its items.

Determines how the condition is related to the previous condition inside the corresponding ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array.

The condition is connected to the previous condition by a logical conjunction (ConditionA ∧ ConditionB)

The condition is connected to the previous condition by a logical disjunction (ConditionA ∨ ConditionB)

Determines the month that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Represents the month January.

Represents the month February.

Represents the month March.

Represents the month April.

Represents the month May.

Represents the month June.

Represents the month July.

Represents the month August.

Represents the month September.

Represents the month October.

Represents the month November.

Represents the month December.

Determines how the specified comparison value has to be interpreted when comparing it with the TextFormField's or SelectionFormField's Text property.

The comparison value has to be interpreted as custom text.

The comparison value has to be interpreted as a regular expression.

Gets the operator that is used to compare the condition's form field value with the specified comparison value.

Gets the value that is compared with the condition's form field value.

Gets a value of type ComparisonValueTypes that determines how the condition's comparison value is interpreted.

Gets the FormField whose property value is to be compared with the condition's comparison value.

Gets or sets a value of type Condition.LogicalConnectives that describes how the condition is related to the previous condition inside the corresponding ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array.

An object of the ConditionalInstruction class represents a list of form field related instructions that are executed when specific requirements, represented by an array of conditions, are fulfilled.

Initializes a new instance of the ConditionalInstruction class without any of the required values.

Initializes a new instance of the ConditionalInstruction class with all values that are necessary to provide a valid conditional instruction.

Specifies the name of the conditional instruction. Specifies the conditions of the conditional instruction. Specifies the instructions of the conditional instruction.

Returns a copy of this ConditionalInstruction object.

Gets or sets an array of conditions, that represent the requirements that has to be fulfilled to execute the specified instructions.

Gets or sets an array of instructions that are executed when the specified conditions are fulfilled.

Gets or sets a name of the conditional instruction.

An instance of the ConditionalInstructionCollection class contains all conditional instructions in a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of type ConditionalInstruction.

Inserts an instance of the class ConditionalInstruction to the collection and the document.

Specifies ConditionalInstruction element to add.

Removes all conditional instructions from the collection and the document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets that ConditionalInstruction element from the collection, where the Name property value equals the specified name.

Specifies the name of the requested ConditionalInstruction element.

Gets those ConditionalInstruction elements from the collection, where at least one Condition or Instruction element references the specified FormField.

Specifies the FormField that is referenced inside the requested ConditionalInstruction elements.

Returns a value indicating whether the value of a specific form field is marked as valid. The corresponding validation is executed by the conditions of a conditional instruction and applied by an Instruction object, that marks the related form field as valid or invalid.

Specifies the FormField that is checked.

Removes that ConditionalInstruction element from the collection and the document, where the Name property value equals the specified name.

Specifies the name of the ConditionalInstruction element to remove.

Gets the names of all ConditionalInstruction elements that are listed inside the collection.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

An object of the DateFormField class represents a date field on a form.

Initializes a new instance of an empty DateFormField. The date is set to January 1, 1601.

Specifies the horizontal extension, in twips, of the DateFormField, when a date is not set.

Initializes a new instance of a DateFormField with the specified date.

Specifies the date of the DateFormField. Specifies the horizontal extension, in twips, of the DateFormField, when a date is not set.

Gets or sets the DateFormField's date.

Gets or sets the date's format.

Gets or sets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the DateFormField, when a date is not set.

Gets or sets a value indicating wheather a date control is shown below the DateFormField so that the user can select a date.

Gets an array of format picture strings which can be used to format the date.

The DateFormFieldEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.FormFieldDateChanged event.

Gets an object representing the DateFormField that causes the event.

The DeleteBookmarksDialog class implements a Windows Forms dialog box which shows all targets in the current document.

Creates a DeleteBookmarksDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a DeleteBookmarksDialog dialog box.

Identifies the bookmark list label.

Identifies the bookmark listbox.

Identifies the Cancel button.

Identifies the Delete button.

Identifies the Automatically Generated Bookmarks check box.

Identifies the Goto button.

Finds a control that has the provided identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by an enum of type DeleteBookmarksDialog.DialogItem.

An instance of the DigitalSignature class represents an X.509 certificate which can be used to digitally sign a PDF or PDF/A document.

Initializes a new instance of the DigitalSignature class specifying a certificate and a time server.

Specifies an X509Certificate2 object which represents an X.509 certificate. Specifies the URL of a time server which is used to get a time stamp for the certification.

Initializes a new instance of the DigitalSignature class which is associated with a SignatureField.

Specifies an X509Certificate2 object which represents an X.509 certificate. Specifies the URL of a time server which is used to get a time stamp for the certification. Specifies the name of a SignatureField contained in a document.

The DocumentLink class represents a link in a Text Control document that points to a target in the same document.

Initializes a new instance of the DocumentLink class.

Specifies the visible text of the link. Specifies an object of the type DocumentTarget specifying to where the link points.

Gets the type of auto-generation.

Gets or sets an object of the type DocumentTarget specifying to where the link points.

An instance of the DocumentLinkCollection class contains all links in a Text Control document that point to targets in the same document.

Inserts a new document link at the current input position.

Specifies the document link to add.

Removes all document links from a Text Control document.

If this parameter is set to true, all document links are removed without deleting their texts.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the document link at the current input position or null if there is no document link at the current input position.

Gets the document link with the specified id, previously set with the DocumentLink.ID property.

Specifies the document link's identifier.

Removes a document link including its visible text from a Text Control document.

Specifies the document link to remove.

Removes a document link from a Text Control document. The visible text is deleted depending on the keepText parameter.

Specifies the document link to remove. If this parameter is set to true, the document link is removed without deleting its text.

Gets the field with the specified number from the collection.

The DocumentLinkEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.DocumentLinkClicked event.

Gets an object that represents the clicked document link.

The DocumentPermissions class provides settings determining how the document can be edited, when the EditMode is changed from Edit to ReadAndSelect.

Specifies whether document content can be copied to the clipboard.

Specifies whether form fields can be edited.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the document can be formatted.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether formatting styles can be used to format the document.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the document can be printed.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the document is read only.

The DocumentSettings class provides properties which inform about general document settings, such as author and title, contained in the document the user is currently working on.

Gets or sets the author of the current document.

Gets or sets the document's creation date.

Gets or sets the application, which has created the current document.

Gets or sets a file path that is used to search for resources like images or hypertext links.

Gets or sets the current document's keywords.

Gets or sets the subject string of the current document.

Gets or sets the current document's title.

Gets or sets an array of EmbeddedFile objects providing the name, data and additional optional properties of files, which are embedded in the current document.

Gets or sets a dictionary with all user-defined document properties contained in the current document.

The DocumentTarget class represents a text position in a Text Control document that can be a target of a document link or a bookmark.

Creates a new instance of the DocumentTarget class with the specified target name.

Specifies the name of the target.

Creates a new instance of the DocumentTarget class with the specified target name and position.

Specifies the name of the target. Specifies the one-based character position where to insert the target.

Sets the current text input position to the target's position and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Gets the type of auto-generation.

Gets the bounding rectangle of a target.

Returns true, if the target's position is the same as the current text input position.

Specifies whether the target can be deleted by the end-user while the document is being edited.

Gets or sets an identifier for the document target.

Relates a user-defined name to a target, that can be any kind of text in addition to the target's TargetName.

Gets the character position (one-based) of the target.

Gets or sets the target name.

An instance of the DocumentTargetCollection class contains all targets in a Text Control document represented through objects of the type DocumentTarget.

Inserts the specified target at the current text input position.

Specifies the document target to add.

Removes all document targets from a Text Control document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the first document target at the current text input position or null if there is no document target. This method is for compatibility only with prior versions. Use GetItems to get all targets at the current text input position.

Gets the document target with the specified id, previously set with the DocumentTarget.ID property.

Specifies the document target's identifier.

Gets the document target with the specified target name, previously set with the DocumentTarget.TargetName property.

Specifies the document target's target name.

Gets all document targets at the current text input position. The method returns null, if there is no target at the current input position.

Removes the specified target from a Text Control document.

Specifies the document target to remove.

Gets a value indicating whether a new document target can be inserted at the current text input position.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets the field with the specified number from the collection.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The DocumentTargetEventArgs class provides data for the DocumentTargetCreated and DocumentTargetDeleted events.

Gets an object that represents the document target which causes the event.

An EditableRegion object represents an editable region in a TX Text Control document.

Creates an editable region with the specified user name and/or id. The start and length of the editable region are initialized to zero. When a zero-length editable region is inserted, the current text selection defines it position and length.

Specifies the name of the user who can edit the region. Specifies an identifier for the editable region.

Creates an editable region with the specified user name, id, start position and length.

Specifies the name of the user who can edit the region. Specifies an identifier for the editable region. Specifies the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the editable region. Specifies the number of characters which belong to the editable region.

Saves the editable region's text in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the editable region's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the editable region's text as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the editable region's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the editable region's text in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the editable region's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the editable region's text as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the editable region's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of an editable region and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Gets the default highlight color of an editable region.

Gets or sets the highlight color for the editable region.

Gets or sets a value indicating when the editable region is highlighted.

Gets or sets the editable region's identifier.

Gets the number of characters which belong to the editable region.

Gets or sets the name of the user who can edit the region.

Gets the editable region's number.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the editable region.

Gets the editable region's text.

Contains all editable regions in the main text or another part of a document.

Specifies the result when an editable region has been added to the document.

The editable region was inserted and combined with an existing one. An editable region is combined with an existing one, when it overlaps or immediately follows it and has the same user name and id.

An unexpected error has occurred.

The editable region wasn't inserted because there is no selection.

The editable region wasn't inserted because the specified position values are invalid. Invalid start and/or length values have been specified.

The editable region wasn't inserted because the selection is too complex. It is not a continuous sequence of characters.

The editable region has successfully been inserted.

Adds a new editable region to the document. Its position is defined through the EditableRegion.Start and EditableRegion.Length properties. If the editable region's length is zero, the current text selection is used to define the position.

Specifies the editable region to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the editable region with the specified id. The method returns null, if such a region does not exist. If more than one region with this id exists, the first found region is returned.

Specifies the editable region's identifier.

Gets all editable regions at the current text input position. The method returns null, if there is no region at the current input position.

Removes an editable region from the collection. The region's text is not removed.

Specifies the editable region to remove. When this parameter is true, only the selected part of the editable region is removed.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets the editable region with the specified number from the collection.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The EditableRegionEventArgs class provides data for the EditableRegionCreated, EditableRegionDeleted, EditableRegionEntered and EditableRegionLeft events.

Gets an object that represents the editable region which causes the event.

The EmbeddedFile class represents a file embedded in another document.

Initializes a new instance of an embedded file with the specified name. The file's data is given through the specified file handle. When the document is saved, the data is read from the file and embedded in the document.

Specifies the file's name. Identifies a file from which the data to embed is read. Specifies additional metadata with properties of the document which is embedded.

Initializes a new instance of an embedded file with the specified name and string data.

Specifies the file's name. Specifies the file's data. Specifies additional metadata with properties of the document which is embedded.

Initializes a new instance of an embedded file with the specified name and binary data.

Specifies the file's name. Specifies the file's data. Specifies additional metadata with properties of the document which is embedded.

Gets or sets the file's creation date.

Gets the file's data.

Gets or sets an optional file description.

Gets the file's name.

Gets or sets the date the file was last modified.

Gets or sets an optional string specifying the file's type using types specified through the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) specification.

PDF/A only. Gets or sets an optional string describing the relationship of the embedded file and the containing document.

The FilterException class informs about errors which can occur when a text filter is used to convert a document to or from another format.

Initializes a new instance of the FilterException class with a specified error.

The error that is the cause of the current exception.

Initializes a new instance of the FilterException class with a specified error and a specified error message.

The error that is the cause of the current exception. The error message that explains the reason for the exception.

Enumerates errors which can occur when a text filter is used to convert a TX Text Control document to or from another format.

The file type is not supported through the filter.

There is a logical error in the file.

Unable to allocate enough memory.

File read error.

File write error.

Unable to open the file.

The input file is too big.

Unsupported format version.

Unspecified internal error.

The filter is obsolete.

The file contains not well-formed syntax.

The document cannot be imported because the used encryption scheme is not supported.

The document cannot be saved, because it contains a non-embeddable font.

The specified certificate is invalid or has no private key.

The specified time server does not exist or retrieves invalid data.

The specified user-password is invalid.

Gets the error which is the cause of this exception.

The FontSettings class provides settings determining which fonts can be used in a document.

Specifies whether a TextControl.AdaptFont event is raised, if a font must be adapted.

Gets or sets a value specifying that only embeddable fonts can be used in a document.

Gets or sets a value specifying that only free scalable fonts can be used in a document.

Gets or sets a value specifying that only TrueType and OpenType fonts can be used in a document.

A Footnote object represents a footnote in a TextControl document.

Creates a Footnote object with the specified footnote text.

Specifies the footnote's text.

Creates a Footnote object with the specified footnote text and a name and/or an identifier.

Specifies the footnote's text. Specifies the footnote's name. Specifies the footnote's id.

Sets the current text input position in the footnote section at the end of the current footnote text, so that the text can be edited or formatted.

Saves the footnote's text in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the footnote's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the footnote's text as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the footnote's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the footnote's text in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the footnote's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the footnote's text as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the footnote's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Scrolls the beginning of the footnote mark into the visible part of the document using a default position depending on the previous position.

Scrolls the beginning of the footnote mark into the visible part of the document using the specified position.

Specifies an InputPosition.ScrollPosition value.

Gets the default highlight color for the reference mark and the footnote mark.

Gets or sets the highlight color for the reference mark and the footnote mark.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the reference mark and the footnote mark is highlighted.

Gets or sets a user-defined identifier.

Gets or sets a name for the footnote.

Gets the footnote's number in the text.

Gets the number of characters the reference mark consists of.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character of the footnote's reference mark.

Gets the footnote's text including the footnote mark in front of the text.

An instance of the FootnoteCollection class contains all footnotes in a Text Control document represented through objects of the type Footnote.

Adds a new footnote to the document at the current text input position. A footnote consists of a reference mark in the document and the footnote itself appearing at the bottom of the page.

Specifies the footnote to add. If this parameter is true, the text input position is set in the footnote section at the bottom of the page, so that the footnote's text can be edited.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the footnote at the current text input position. If there is no footnote, null is returned.

Gets the next or the previous footnote in the textflow. The search begins at the current text input position.

If this parameter is true, the next footnote in the textflow is returned.

Gets the footnote with the specified identifier.

Specifies the footnote's identifier set with the footnote's constructor or the ID property.

Gets the footnote with the specified name.

Specifies the footnote's name set with set with the footnote's constructor or the Name property.

Removes a footnote from a Text Control document.

Specifies the footnote to remove.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether all the footnote numbers, reference marks as well as footnote marks, in the document are highlighted.

Gets the footnote with the specified number from the collection.

Gets or sets the footnotes' number format.

Gets or sets the number for the first footnote.

The FootnoteEventArgs class provides data for the FootnoteCreated, FootnoteDeleted, FootnoteReferenceMarkEntered and FootnoteReferenceMarkLeft events.

Gets an object that represents the footnote which causes the event.

The FootnoteSection class represents a footnote section at the bottom of a page.

Gets a collection of all charts contained in the footnote section of a page.

Gets a collection of all text frames contained in the footnote section of a page.

The FootnoteText class represents the text of all footnotes contained in a document.

Gets a collection of all charts contained in the footnotes' text.

Gets a collection of all text frames contained in the footnotes' text.

The FormField class is the base class of all form fields.

Opens a dialog box to alter the formatting attributes of the form field.

Gets or set a value indicating whether the form field is enabled.

An instance of the FormFieldCollection class contains all form fields in a Text Control document represented through objects of the types TextFormField, CheckFormField and SelectionFormField.

Inserts the specified form field at the current input position.

Specifies the form field to add.

Removes all form fields from a Text Control document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the form field at the current input position or null if there is no form field at the current input position.

Gets the form field with the specified id, previously set with the FormField.ID property.

Specifies the form field's identifier.

Removes the specified form field from a Text Control document.

Specifies the formr field to remove.

Gets a collection of all conditional instructions that references to the form fields of the collection.

Gets the form field with the specified number from the collection.

The FormFieldEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.FormFieldSettingsChanged event, which occurs, when the name, the id and/or formatting attributes of a form field have been changed.

Gets an object that represents the form field which causes the event.

The FormattingStyle class is the base class for the InlineStyle and ParagraphStyle classes.

Applies all set attributes of the style to the current document.

Gets or sets values specifying automatic sub- or superscripted text.

Gets or sets a user-defined baseline alignment, in twips, of the style.

Gets the FormattingStyle which is the base style of this style.

Gets or sets the bold attribute of the style.

Gets or sets values specifying wheather lowercase letters are displayed with capital letters.

Gets or sets the style's character scaling, in percent of the average character width.

Gets or sets the style's character spacing value, in twips.

Gets or sets the style's culture.

Gets or sets the font of the style.

Gets or sets the font's size of the style.

Gets or sets the style's color used to display the text.

Gets or sets the italic attribute of the style.

Gets or sets the name of the style.

Gets or sets the strikeout attribute of the style.

Gets or sets the style's text background color.

Gets or sets underlining styles for the style.

The FormattingStyleCollection class is the base class of the ParagraphStyleCollection and InlineStyleCollection classes.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Removes a formatting style from a Text Control document.

Specifies the name of the style to remove.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The FormulaException class informs about an invalid syntax or missing parameters of formulas used in tables.

Gets the one-based character index of the first invalid character in the formula string.

The FrameBase class is the base class of the Image, TextFrame, ChartFrame, BarcodeFrame and DrawingFrame classes.

Changes the frame's z-order.

Specifies how the z-order is changed.

Gets or sets the frame's horizontal alignment when it is anchored to a paragraph.

Gets the frame's bounding rectangle relative to the upper left corner of the document.

Gets or sets an identifier for the frame.

Gets or sets a value determining whether the frame is treated as a single character or the document's text either flows around or overwrites the frame.

Gets or sets, in twips, the frame's current location.

Determines whether a frame can be moved in the document at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Gets or sets a name for the frame.

Gets or sets the frame's size in twips.

Determines whether the frame can be resized at run time with the built-in mouse interface.

Gets or sets the distances, in twips, between the frame and the document's text.

Read only. Gets the frame's character position in the document's text (one-based).

The FrameBaseCollection class is the base class of the ImageCollection and TextFrameCollection classes.

Removes all objects from the collection and from the document.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

An instance of the FrameCollection class contains all images, text frames and charts in a document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing selected by the user.

Gets the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing with the specified identifier. An identifier can be set with the FrameBase.ID property.

Specifies the frame's identifier.

Gets the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing with the specified name. A name can be set with the FrameBase.Name property.

Specifies the frame's name.

Removes a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) from a document.

Specifies the image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing to remove.

The FrameEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with frames.

Gets an object that represents the frame which causes the event.

The GotoDialog class implements a Windows Forms dialog box which can be used to move the current input position to a certain page, section, line, table or bookmark.

Creates a GotoDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a GotoDialog dialog box.

Identifies the label of the Go to listbox.

Identifies the Go to listbox.

Identifies the label of the Number textbox.

Identifies the Number respectively Bookmark combobox.

Identifies the Previous button.

Identifies the Next button.

Identifies the Close button.

Finds a control that has the provided identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by an enum of type GotoDialog.DialogItem.

An instance of the HeaderFooter class represents a header or footer in a Text Control document.The TextControl class has events that inform about different occurrences like activation or deactivation of a header or footer.

Activates a header or a footer.

Adds the current state of the header or footer to the undo stack. Programmatic changes performed with the header's or footer's properties and methods are not automatically added to a TextControl's undo stack. Calling this method is not necessary, when the header's or footer's text and/or formatting is changed.

Deactivates a header or a footer.

Finds a text string in a header or footer.

Specifies the text to search for. Specifies the text position where the search starts, beginning with 0. Specifies search options.

Returns a collection containing text fields of the specified types.

Specifies types of text fields.

Gets a collection of all Microsoft Word or Heiler HighEdit fields that have been created or imported from a Microsoft Word or RTF document.

Gets a collection of all barcodes contained in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all charts contained in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all comments in the header or footer.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the header or footer is connected with the header or footer of the previous section.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, of a header or footer to the top or bottom of the page.

Gets a collection of all links in a header or footer which point to targets in the same document.

Gets a collection of all targets in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all drawings contained in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all editable regions in the header or footer.

Gets a collection of all form fields contained in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all images, textframes, charts, barcodes and drawings in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all hypertext links the header or footer contains.

Gets a collection of all images the header or footer contains.

Gets a collection of all text lines the header or footer contains.

Gets a collection of all misspelled words the header or footer contains.

Gets a collection of page number fields in the header or footer.

Gets a collection of all paragraphs the header or footer contains.

Returns the number of the section to which the header or footer belongs.

Gets or sets the current selection in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all subtextparts in the header or footer.

Gets a collection of all tables in the header or footer.

Gets a collection of all tables of contents in the header or footer.

Gets a collection of all characters the header or footer contains.

Gets a collection of all standard text fields in the header or footer.

Gets a collection of all text frames contained in a header or footer.

Gets a collection of all changes made in the header or footer.

Gets the type of the header or footer.

An instance of the HeaderFooterCollection class contains the headers and footers in a Text Control document represented through objects of the type HeaderFooter.

Adds a new header or footer to a Text Control document or to a certain section of the document. If a header or footer is added to the complete document the first section receives the header or footer and all other sections receive headers or footers which are connected to their previous section. To add more than one header or footer a combination of the HeaderFooterType enumeration values can be used.

Specifies the headers and/or footers to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets a particular header or footer from the collection. If the specified header or footer does not exist in the collection an ArgumentException is thrown.

Specifies the header or footer to return.

Removes a header or footer from a Text Control document or from a certain section. To remove more than one header or footer a combination of the HeaderFooterType enumeration can be used.

Specifies the headers and/or footers to remove.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

The HeaderFooterEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.HeaderFooterActivated and TextControl.HeaderFooterDeactivated events.

Gets an object that represents the header or footer which causes the event.

The HyperlinkDialog class implements a Windows Forms dialog box for inserting and editing a hyperlink at the current text input position.

Creates a HyperlinkDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a HyperlinkDialog dialog box.

Identifies the Hyperlink text label.

Identifies the Hyperlink text edit control.

Identifies the Hyperlink label.

Identifies the Hyperlink edit control.

Identifies the Select File button.

Identifies the bookmark list label.

Identifies the bookmark listbox.

Identifies the Show Bookmarks label.

Identifies the Current Document radio button.

Identifies the Selected File radio button.

Identifies the Automatically Generated Bookmarks check box.

Identifies the Delete Hyperlink button.

Identifies the OK button.

Identifies the Cancel button.

Finds a control that has the provided identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by an enum of type HyperlinkDialog.DialogItem.

The HypertextLink class represents a hypertext link in a Text Control document that points to a target outside of the document.

Initializes a new instance of the HypertextLink class.

Specifies the visible text of the hypertext link. Specifies a string specifying to where the hypertext link points.

Gets or sets a string that specifies the target to where the hypertext link points.

An instance of the HypertextLinkCollection class contains all hypertext links in a Text Control document represented through objects of the type HypertextLink.

Inserts a new hypertext link at the current input position.

Specifies the hypertext link to add.

Removes all hypertext links from a Text Control document.

If this parameter is set to true, all hypertext links are removed without deleting their texts.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the hypertext link at the current input position or null if there is no hypertext link at the current input position.

Gets the hypertext link with the specified id. An id can be set with the HypertextLink.ID property.

Specifies the hypertext link's identifier.

Removes a hypertext link including its visible text from a Text Control document.

Specifies the hypertext link to remove.

Removes a hypertext link from a Text Control document. The visible text is deleted depending on the keepText parameter.

Specifies the hypertext link to remove. If this parameter is set to true, the hypertext link is removed without deleting its text.

Gets the field with the specified number from the collection.

The HypertextLinkEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.HypertextLinkClicked event.

Gets an object that represents the clicked hypertext link.

The HyphenateWordEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.HyphenateWord, ServerTextControl.HyphenateWord and WPF.TextControl.HyphenateWord events.

Gets the culture of the word to hyphenate.

Gets or sets the position at which the word should be divided.

Gets the maximum dividing position.

Gets the word to hyphenate.

The IFormattedText interface contains properties and methods common to all text parts in a TX Text Control document.

Finds a text string in the text part.

Specifies the text to search for. Specifies the text position where the search starts, beginning with 0. Specifies search options.

Returns a collection containing text fields of the specified types.

Specifies types of text fields.

Gets a collection of all Microsoft Word or Heiler HighEdit fields that have been created or imported from a Microsoft Word or RTF document.

Gets a collection of all barcodes in the text part.

Gets a collection of all comments in the text part.

Gets a collection of all links in the text part which point to targets in the same document.

Gets a collection of all targets in the text part.

Gets a collection of all drawings in the text part.

Gets a collection of all editable regions in the text part.

Gets a collection of all form fields in the text part.

Gets a collection of all images, textframes, charts, barcodes and drawings in the text part.

Gets a collection of all hypertext links in the text part.

Gets a collection of all images in the text part.

Gets a collection of all lines the text in the text part consists of.

Gets a collection of all misspelled words in the text part.

Gets a collection of all paragraphs the text in the text part consists of.

Gets or sets the current selection in the text part.

Gets a collection of all subtextparts in the text part.

Gets a collection of all tables in the text part.

Gets a collection of all tables of contents.

Gets a collection of all characters the text in the text part consists of.

Gets a collection of all standard text fields in the text part.

Gets a collection of all tracked changes made in the text part.

An instance of the Image class represents an image in a Text Control document.

Creates an empty instance of the Image class.

Initializes a new image from the specified image file and filter.

Specifies the name and the path of the file from which the image is loaded. Specifies the index of the filter used to load the image.

Initializes a new image from the specified System.Drawing.Image.

Specifies a System.Drawing.Image object which is used to initialize the TXTextControl image.

Initializes a new image from the specified memory stream.

Specifies a memory stream from which the data for the TXTextControl image is read.

Initializes a new image from the specified unmanaged memory stream.

Specifies an unmanaged memory stream from which the data for the TXTextControl image is read.

Sets a value between 1 and 100, which is the quality of a lossy data compression used if this image is saved.

Gets or sets the file name of an image used, if a Text Control document is saved.

Gets or sets the format used if an image is saved.

Gets or sets the maximum resolution in dots per inch used if this image is saved.

Gets or sets the corresponding file name and path from which an inserted image is loaded.

Gets or sets the format used, if an image is inserted.

Gets or sets an images's horizontal scaling factor in percent.

(Only for compatibility) Gets or sets a value determining whether an image is treated as a single character or the document's text either flows around or overwrites the image.

Determines whether the image is stored through its data or through its file reference.

Gets or sets an images's vertical scaling factor in percent.

An instance of the ImageCollection class contains all images in a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of the type Image.

Inserts an image inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The image is inserted at the current text input position. A file open dialog box is shown to get the image's file name and filter.

Inserts an image inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The image is inserted at the specified text input position. A file open dialog box is shown to get the image's file name and filter. To avoid opening the dialog box set the Image.FileName and the Image.FilterIndex properties of the specified Image object.

Specifies the image to add. Specifies the text position at which the image is to be inserted.

Inserts a new image which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored images are moved with the text. A file open dialog box is shown to get the image's file name and filter. To avoid opening the dialog box set the Image.FileName and the Image.FilterIndex properties of the specified Image object.

Specifies the image to add. Specifies the image's horizontal alignment. Specifies the text position at which the image is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a new image which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified location relative to the paragraph it is anchored to and a textflow which is given through the insertionMode parameter. Anchored images are moved with the text. A file open dialog box is shown to get the image's file name and filter. To avoid opening the dialog box set the Image.FileName and the Image.FilterIndex properties of the specified Image object.

Specifies the image to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the image is to be inserted. Specifies the text position at which the image is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page. A file open dialog box is shown to get the image's file name and filter. To avoid opening the dialog box set the Image.FileName and the Image.FilterIndex properties of the specified Image object.

Specifies the image to add. Specifies the number of a page beginning with 1 where the image is located. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the image is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a new image which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a location relative to the top left corner of the complete document. All gaps between the pages must be included. A file open dialog box is shown to get the image's file name and filter. To avoid opening the dialog box set the Image.FileName and the Image.FilterIndex properties of the specified Image object.

Specifies the image to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the image is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the image selected by the user.

Gets the image with the specified identifier. An identifier can be set with the Image.ID property.

Specifies the image's identifier.

Gets the image with the specified name. A name can be set with the Image.Name property.

Specifies the image's name.

Removes an image from a Text Control document.

Specifies the image to remove.

Gets all available filters for exporting images.

Gets all available filters for importing images.

The ImageEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with images.

Gets an object that represents the image which causes the event.

The InlineStyle class defines a formatting style that can be used to format single words in a line of text.

Creates a new instance of the InlineStyle class based on the TextControl root style named [Normal].

Specifies the new style's name.

Creates a new instance of the InlineStyle class based on the specified base style.

Specifies the new style's name. Specifies the name of the style the new style based on.

Creates a new root style that has all attributes of the specified style.

Is a style the attributes of which are used to initialize the new style.

Determines the style's attributes.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Baseline property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Bold property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's FontName property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's FontSize property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's ForeColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Italic property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Strikeout property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's TextBackColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the style's Underline property.

Informs about whether one or more of the style's attributes are inherited from the surrounding paragraph. Text formatted through an inline style has all the attributes defined through the surrounding paragraph except the attributes explicitly defined through the inline style.

Specifies one or more attributes.

Resets one or more of the style's attributes to its default value which is the same value as defined for the surrounding paragraph. Text formatted through an inline style has all the attributes defined through the surrounding paragraph except the attributes explicitly defined through the inline style.

Specifies one or more attributes to reset.

An instance of the InlineStyleCollection class contains all inline formatting styles in the current document represented through objects of the type InlineStyle.

Adds to new formatting style to the current document.

Specifies the style to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets a particular style from the collection.

Specifies the name of the style.

The InputFormat class represents all formatting attributes at the current text input position.

Returns an array of strings specifying all supported fonts. These fonts depend on the formatting device set with the WPF.TextControl.FormattingPrinter or TextControl.FormattingPrinter property and on attributes set with the WPF.TextControl.FontSettings or TextControl.FontSettings property.

Returns an array of strings specifying all possible font sizes for the font at the text input position. If the font is free scalable, standard sizes are returned.

Returns an array of strings specifying all possible font sizes for specified font. If the font is free scalable, standard sizes are returned.

Specifies the font the possible sizes of which are returned.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether all frame lines, including all inner frame lines, are set for the selected text.

Gets or sets the color used to display the frame fill color at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is bold at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is bottom aligned at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is vertically centered at the current text input position.

Gets or sets a bottom paragraph distance, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the bottom of the text.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a complete frame around the text.

Gets or sets the bullet character at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a bulleted list at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is centered at the current input position.

Gets or sets the font family at the current input position.

Gets or sets a number format which can be used to automatically format numbers in table cells.

Gets or sets the font's size, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets or sets the color used to display the color of frame lines at the current text input position.

Gets or sets the line width, in twips, of the paragraph's or table's frame at the current input position.

Gets or sets the hanging indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether all inner horizontal frame lines are set for the selected text.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether all inner vertical frame lines are set for the selected text.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the text is italic at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is justified at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is left aligned at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the left side of the text.

Gets or sets the left indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the writung direction is left-to-right at the current input position.

Gets or sets the line spacing, in percent, at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a numbered list at the current input position.

Gets or sets the number format for a numbered list at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text at the current input position is interpreted as a number which means that the period character (.) is defined as decimal separator and the comma character (,) is defined as thousands separator.

Returns an array of all supported number formats for numbered and structured lists.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is right aligned at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the right side of the text.

Gets or sets the right indent, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the writing direction is right-to-left at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the text at the current input position is interpreted as standard text which means that it is displayed as it is.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the text is strikeout at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a structured list at the current input position.

Gets or sets the number format for a structured list at the current input position.

Gets or sets the structure level of all selected paragraphs.

Gets or sets the formatting style name at the current input position.

Returns an array of the names of all formatting styles, the document contains.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is subscript at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is superscript at the current input position.

Gets or sets the color used to display the text background color at the current input position.

Returns or sets the color used to display the text at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is top aligned at the current input position.

Gets or sets a top paragraph distance, in twips, at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether there is a frame line at the top of the text.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether text is underlined at the current input position.

Gets or sets the underline style at the current input position.

Returns an array of all supported underline styles.

An instance of the InputPosition class represents the current text input position of a TXTextControl document.

Creates a new input position from a page, line and column number.

Specifies a page number. Specifies a line number. Specifies a column number.

Creates a new input position from a text position.

Specifies a text position.

Creates a new input position from a text position with a special handling at the beginning and the end of a TextField.

Specifies a text position. If the textPosition parameter is a position at the beginning or at the end of a TextField with a doubled input position, this parameter can be used to define whether the position is inside or outside the field.

Creates a new input position from a geometric location.

Specifies a geometric location.

Determines a position to where the input position is scrolled.

Scrolls the input position to the left side of the visible portion of the document.

Scrolls the input position to the top of the visible portion of the document.

Scrolls the input position to the right side of the visible portion of the document.

Scrolls the input position to the bottom of the visible portion of the document.

Scrolls the current input position into the visible part of the document using a default position depending on the previous position.

Scrolls the current input position into the visible part of the document using the specified position.

Specifies an InputPosition.ScrollPosition value.

Gets the size of the caret, in pixels, at the current text input position.

Gets the column number of the current text input position.

Shows or hides a marker which indicates the current text input position when the TextControl is inactive and the blinking caret is not visible.

Gets the line number of the current text input position.

Gets the geometric location of the current text input position.

Gets the page number of the current text input position.

Gets the page number in the section containing the current text input position.

Gets the section number of the current text input position.

Gets the text position of the current text input position.

An object of the Instruction class is an element of the ConditionalInstruction class and represents actions that are execute´d when the corresponding conditions are fulfilled.To specify such an instruction, the Instruction object has to be initialized with a FormField that is located inside the document.In this context, up to four different types of actions can be executed: Changing the FormField.Enabled property, marking the form field value as valid or invalid, setting a new value and replacing the SelectionFormField.Items array with another string array.To specify a value that is set by the specified action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are fulfilled, the constructor's instructionValue parameter must be used.

Initializes a new instance of the Instruction class to determine the executing action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are fulfilled. Using this overload, by default, no else instruction is applied when the corresponding conditions are not fulfilled. Accordingly, the Instruction.IsElseInstructionEnabled property is set to false and the Instruction.ElseInstructionValue property value returns the instruction type depending default value.

Specifies the form field to which the specified action is executed. Specifies the type of the action to perfom. Specifies the desired value that is set by the specified action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are fulfilled.The type of the instructionValue parameter depends on the Instruction.InstructionTypes enumeration value that is specified by the instructionType parameter and, in case Instruction.InstructionTypes.SetValue is set, the related form field type:

Initializes a new instance of the Instruction class to determine the executing actions when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are fulfilled or not fulfilled. Apart from the instructionValue parameter value, that is set by the specified action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are fulfilled, an else instruction value must be specified. It is set if the corresponding condtitions are not fulfilled. On using this overload, the Instruction.IsElseInstructionEnabled property is set to true and the Instruction.ElseInstructionValue property represents the set else instruction value.

Specifies the form field to which the specified action is executed. Specifies the type of the action to perfom. Specifies the desired value that is set by the specified action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are fulfilled.The type of the instructionValue parameter depends on the Instruction.InstructionTypes enumeration value that is specified by the instructionType parameter and, in case Instruction.InstructionTypes.SetValue is set, the related form field type: Specifies the desired value that is set by the specified action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are not fulfilled.The type of the elseInstructionValue parameter depends on the Instruction.InstructionTypes enumeration value that is specified by the instructionType parameter and, in case Instruction.InstructionTypes.SetValue is set, the related form field type:

Determines the type of action to execute.

The instruction sets the FormField.Enabled property to true or false. This enumeration value is used in combination with an instruction value of type boolean that represents the new desired FormField.Enabled value.

The instruction marks the form field value as valid or invalid. This enumeration value is used in combination with an instruction value of type boolean. To retrieve the result of an instruction with that instruction type, the ConditionalInstructionCollection.IsValueValid method is provided.

The instruction sets a new value to a FormField type specific property. If the related FormField is an object of type CheckFormField, the instruction type is used in combination with an instruction value of type boolean that represents the new desired CheckFormField.Checked property value. At form fields of type TextFormField and SelectionFormField, the Text property is updated with a string value. The corresponding property of date form fields is the DateFormField.Date property. To update that property, the Instruction.InstructionValue property needs a value of type System.DateTime.

The instruction replaces the SelectionFormField.Items array with the string array that is represented by Instruction.InstructionValue property.

Gets the value that is set by the specified action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are not fulfilled and the Instruction.IsElseInstructionEnabled property is set to true.

Gets the FormField to which the specified action is executed.

Gets the type of action to execute.

Gets the value that is set by the specified action when the defined requirements of the ConditionalInstruction.Conditions array are fulfilled.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this Instruction allows to execute else instructions.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this Instruction listens to value changes of the related conditions' form fields.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this Instruction is handled when the document is initialized as a form.

A LicenseLevelException is thrown when a feature is not contained in the currently licensed product level.

Initializes a new instance of the LicenseLevelException class.

Initializes a new instance of the LicenseLevelException class with a specified error message.

The error message that explains the reason for the exception.

Initializes a new instance of the LicenseLevelException class with a specified error message and a reference to the inner exception that is the cause of this exception.

The error message that explains the reason for the exception. The exception that is the cause of the current exception.

An instance of the Line class represents a single line in a Text Control document.

Saves the line's text in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the line's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the line's text as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the line's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the line's text in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the line's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the line's text as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the line's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Gets the line's baseline position.

Gets the number of characters in the line including the break character.

Gets the line's number.

Gets the number of the page to which the line belongs.

Gets the number (one-based) of the first character in the line.

Gets the line's text.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the text belonging to the line.

An instance of the LineCollection class contains all text lines in a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of the type Line.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the line at a certain geometrical position.

Specifies the line's location.

Gets the line at a certain text position.

Specifies a zero-based text position.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets the line from the collection.

An instance of the ListFormat class represents the formatting attributes of a bulleted or numbered list.

Creates a new empty instance of the ListFormat class.

Creates a new instance of the ListFormat class which has the specified list type.

Specifies one of the ListType values.

Determines a certain list format attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the BulletCharacter property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BulletSize property.

Obsolete. Use the TextAfterNumber attribute instead.

Obsolete. Use the TextBeforeNumber attribute instead.

Specifies the attribute set through the FirstNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FontName property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FormatChar property.

Specifies the attribute set through the HangingIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Level property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the NumberFormat property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RestartNumbering property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TextAfterNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TextBeforeNumber property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Type property.

Represents the maximum of levels for bulleted and numbered lists.

Represents the maximum number of charcters for the additinal text in front and behind the number of a numbered list.

Gets or sets the symbol character for a bulleted list.

Gets or sets the size of the symbol character for a bulleted list.

Obsolete. Gets or sets a character that is displayed behind the number in a numbered list.

Obsolete. Gets or sets a character that is displayed in front of the number in a numbered list.

Gets or sets the starting number for a numbered list.

Gets or sets the font used for the bullet character.

Gets or sets the formatting character for a bulleted or numbered list.

Gets or sets the hanging indent of a numbered list.

Gets or sets the left indent for a numbered list.

Gets or sets the level for a bulleted or numbered list.

Gets or sets the number format for a numbered list.

Gets or sets a value determining whether a new numbered list begins.

Gets or sets the text that is displayed behind the number in a numbered list.

Gets or sets the text that is displayed in front of the number in a numbered list.

Gets or sets the type of the list, bulleted, numbered or none.

The LoadSaveSettingsBase class is the base class of the LoadSettings and SaveSettings classes.

Determines the default StreamType used in the file Open... and file Save As... dialogboxes.

Sets a base path saved in the document that is used to resolve relative file paths.

Specifies an array of EmbeddedFile objects which will be embedded in the saved document.

Specifies a password for the document's access permissions.

Specifies how reporting merge blocks are handled when a document is saved.

Specifies the password for the user when the document is reopened.

The LoadSettings class provides properties for advanced settings and information during load operations.

Gets the names of all document parts from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the document is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Gets the names of all document parts from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the document is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Specifies whether or not a new paragraph is created before text is loaded.

Specifies the format of text fields which are imported.

Specifies an array of strings containing the type names of fields which are to be imported.

Gets the document's author.

Gets the number of bytes read during the load operation.

Gets the document's creation date.

Gets the application, which has created the document.

Gets the path and filename of the CSS file belonging to a HTML or XML document.

Specifies how a document can be accessed after it has been loaded.

Gets the document's keywords.

SpreadsheetML only. Gets or sets the name of the part of the document to be loaded.

Gets the document's subject string.

Gets the document's title.

Gets a System.Collections.Generic.Dictionary containing additional embedded data contained in a PDF document.

Sets a file path that is used to search for resources like images or hypertext links.

Gets the date the document is last modified.

Specifies whether or not the document background color is loaded.

Gets the name and path of the file that has been loaded.

Gets the StreamType of the file that has been loaded.

Specifies whether or not hypertext links are loaded.

Specifies whether or not images are loaded.

DOCX, DOC and RTF Formats only: Specifies whether or not bookmarks which extend over several characters are converted to SubTextParts.

Gets the margins of the loaded document's pages.

Gets the width and height of the loaded document's pages.

Specifies how the document structure is generated when a PDF document is imported.

Gets a dictionary with all user-defined document properties contained in the loaded document.

The MainText class represents the main text of a TX Text Control document.

Gets a collection of all charts contained in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all text frames contained in the main text of the document.

The MiniToolbar class is the base class of the built-in mini toolbars TextMiniToolbar and ObjectMiniToolbar of a Windows Forms TextControl.

Initializes a new instance of the MiniToolbar class.

Gets a collection of all ribbon groups in a MiniToolbar.

The MiniToolbarInitializedEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.TextMiniToolbarInitialized or TextControl.ObjectMiniToolbarInitialized event of a Windows Forms TextControl just after the pre-defined TextMiniToolbar or ObjectMiniToolbar was created.

Considering which event (TextControl.TextMiniToolbarInitialized or TextControl.ObjectMiniToolbarInitialized) is raised the property provides an object of type TextMiniToolbar or ObjectMiniToolbar that can be altered, extended or completely replaced.

The MiniToolbarOpeningEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.MiniToolbarOpening event of a Windows Forms TextControl.

Gets the location, in pixels, where the mini toolbar is displayed.

Gets or sets the mini toolbar, which will be shown.

Gets the context in the document for which a mini toolbar will be opened.

The MisspelledWord class represents a misspelled word in a document's text.

Initializes a new instance of the MisspelledWord class with the specified starting position and length.

Specifies the starting position of the misspelled word. Specifies the length of the misspelled word.

Selects the misspelled word in the text.

Gets the culture of the misspelled word.

Gets or sets a value which marks the misspelled word as duplicate.

Gets or sets a value which marks the misspelled word as ignored.

Gets the length of a misspelled word.

Gets the number of this misspelled word.

Gets the starting position of a misspelled word.

Gets the text of the misspelled word.

An instance of the MisspelledWordCollection class contains all misspelled words in the main part of a Text Control document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Returns the number of misspelled words with a special meaning from the collection.

Specifies the word's kind.

Gets the misspelled word at the current text input position. If there is no misspelled word, the next possible word is returned. If there is no misspelled word between the current input position and the end of the text, the first word is returned.

Gets the misspelled word of the specified kind at the current text input position. If there is no misspelled word, the next possible word of is returned. If there is no misspelled word of the specified kind between the current input position and the end of the text, the first word of the specified kind is returned.

Specifies the word's kind.

Gets the misspelled word at a certain geometrical location. If there is no misspelled word, null is returned.

Specifies the word's location.

Gets the misspelled word at the specified text input position. If there is no misspelled word, the next possible word is returned. If there is no misspelled word between the specified input position and the end of the text, the first word is returned.

Specifies a zero-based text postion.

Gets the misspelled word of the specified kind at the specified text input position. If there is no misspelled word, the next possible word is returned. If there is no misspelled word of the specified kind between the specified input position and the end of the text, the first word of the specified kind is returned.

Specifies a zero-based text postion. Specifies the word's kind.

Changes the text of the specified misspelled word and marks it as ignored. Ignored misspelled words are not underlined with a red zigzag line.

Specifies the misspelled word to change. Specifies the changed text.

Removes the specified misspelled word from a Text Control document. The method removes the word's reference in the list of misspelled words, but not the word's text in the document.

Specifies the misspelled word to remove.

Removes the specified misspelled word from a Text Control document. The method removes the word's reference in the list of misspelled words and replaces the word's text with the specified text.

Specifies the misspelled word to remove. Specifies the corrected text.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets a misspelled word from the collection.

The NumberFormatException class informs about an invalid syntax of a numberformat used to display a formula result.

Gets the one-based character index of the first invalid character in the numberformat string.

The ObjectMiniToolbar class is a mini toolbar that appears when the ShowMiniToolbar property is set to MiniToolbarButton.RightButton or MiniToolbarButton.LeftButton | MiniToolbarButton.RightButton, the right mouse button is released and the current context is a selected text frame, drawing frame or barcode frame (ContextMenuLocation.SelectedFrame).

Each RibbonItem represents an item in a ObjectMiniToolbar.

Identifies the BordersandBackground group for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Back Color button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Transparency button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Line Width button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Border Color button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the BordersandBackground group for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Back Color button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Transparency button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Line Color button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Line Width button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the ColorsAndAlignment group for the selected barcode frame.

Identifies the Back Color button for the selected barcode frame.

Identifies the Fore Color button for the selected barcode frame.

Identifies the Transparency button for the selected barcode frame.

Finds a control that has the provided ObjectMiniToolbar.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

An object of the Page class represents a formatted page of a document.

Gets an image of the page's contents as an enhanced metafile.

Specifies the image's contents.

Gets an image of the page's contents as a bitmap in screen resolution.

Specifies a zooming factor in percent. Specifies the image's contents.

Gets an image of the page's contents as a string in Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) format. All characters are contained with outline curve data that are cubic Bézier splines. Curve and line data coordinates are in twentieth of a point (twips). Images of all pixel-formats are embedded in Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format.

Specifies the image's contents. Specifies a maximum resolution value, in dots per inch, for images in pixel-formats.

Selects the text of the page. The page break characters bounding the page and the header and/or footer belonging to the page are not selected.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the page, in twips, relative to the top of the document.

Gets the footer of the page.

Gets the header of the page.

Gets the number of characters of the page, including the page break character at the end of the page.

Gets the page's number.

Gets the page number relative to the beginning of the section the page belongs to.

Gets the number, one-based, of the section the page belongs to.

Gets the number (one-based) of the page's first character.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the page's text, in twips, relative to the top of the document.

An instance of the PageBorder class represents the attributes of a border, which is drawn in the margin area of a page.

Creates an empty PageBorder object. Further properties must be set.

Creates a PageBorder object with equal line widths, colors and distances from the edge of the page.

Specifies the width for all border lines. Specifies the distance of the border lines from the edge of the page. Specifies the color for all border lines.

Determines a certain page border attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FirstPageOnly property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the MeasureFromText property.

Specifies the attribute set through the OmitFirstPage property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the SurroundFooter property.

Specifies the attribute set through the SurroundHeader property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopLineWidth property.

Represents the default distance of a page border from the edge of the page.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, of the bottom border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText property.

Gets or sets the color of the bottom border line.

Gets or sets the width of the bottom border line.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page border is drawn only on the first page of the section.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, of the left border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText property.

Gets or sets the color of the left border line.

Gets or sets the width of the left border line.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page border's distances are measured from the text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page border is not drawn on the first page of the section.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, of the right border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText property.

Gets or sets the color of the right border line.

Gets or sets the width of the right border line.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page border surrounds the section's footer.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page border surrounds the section's header.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, of the top border line either from the edge of the page or from the text, depending on the MeasureFromText property.

Gets or sets the color of the top border line.

Gets or sets the width of the top border line.

An instance of the PageCollection class contains all pages of a document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the Page containing the current text input position from the collection.

Gets the Page at a certain text input position.

Specifies a zero-based text input position.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets a page from the collection.

An instance of the PageMargins class represents the page margins of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Creates a new instance of the PageMargins class with a left, top, right and bottom margin of 1 inch.

Creates a new instance of the PageMargins class with the specified margins.

Specifies the left page margin. Specifies the top page margin. Specifies the right page margin. Specifies the bottom page margin.

Determines a certain attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Bottom property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Left property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Right property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Top property.

Specifies the left margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Specifies the top margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Specifies the right margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Specifies the bottom margin of a TX Text Control document or document section.

The PageNumberField class represents a field in a header or footer of a Text Control document that automatically displays the current page number.

Creates a new PageNumberField which displays Arabic numbers starting with 1.

Creates a new PageNumberField which displays page numbers with the specified number format starting with the specified start number.

Specifies the page number for the first page. Specifies the number format.

Opens a dialog box to alter the formatting and numbering attributes of the page number field.

Gets or sets the number format.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the field shows the page number or the total number of pages.

Gets or sets the page number for the first page.

An instance of the PageNumberFieldCollection class contains the page number fields in a header or footer of a Text Control document.

Inserts a new page number field at the current input position of a header or footer.

Specifies the page number field to add.

Removes all page number fields contained in the collection from the document.

If this parameter is set to true, all page number fields are removed without deleting their texts.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the page number field at the current input position or null if there is no page number field at the current input position.

Gets the page number field with the specified id. An id can be set with the PageNumberField.ID property.

Specifies the page number field's identifier.

Removes a page number from a header or footer of a Text control document.

Specifies the page number field to remove.

Gets the field with the specified number from the collection.

An instance of the PageSize class represents the page size of a TX Text Control document or document section.

Creates a new PageSize object representing an US Letter page size (8.5 x 11 inch).

Creates a new PageSize object representing a page size with the specified width and height. The measure for the width and height parameters depends on the TextControl.PageUnit, WPF.TextControl.PageUnit or ServerTextControl.PageUnit property.

Specifies the width of the page. Specifies the height of the page.

Determines a certain attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Height property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Width property.

Specifies the page height of a document or document section.

Specifies the page width of a document or document section.

The PaperSize class is used with the TextControl.GetSupportedPaperSizes and WPF.TextControl.GetSupportedPaperSizes methods, which return the names and the sizes of all currently supported paper sizes.

Gets the height of the paper size, in twips.

Gets the name of the paper size.

Gets the width of the paper size, in twips.

An instance of the Paragraph class represents a single paragraph in a Text Control document.

Saves the paragraph's text in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the paragraph's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the paragraph's text as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the paragraph's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the paragraph's text in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the paragraph's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the paragraph's text as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the paragraph's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Selects the paragraph. The paragraph break characters bounding the paragraph are not selected.

Gets or sets the paragraph's formatting style.

Gets or sets the paragraph's formatting attributes.

Gets the number of characters in the paragraph including the paragraph end character.

Gets or sets the paragraph's bulleted or numbered list and/or its formatting attributes.

Gets the number of lines the paragraph consists of.

Gets the paragraph's list number.

Gets the paragraph's list number text.

Gets the paragraph's number.

Gets the number (one-based) of the paragraph's first character.

Gets the number (one-based) of the paragraph's first line.

Gets the paragraph's text.

An instance of the ParagraphCollection class contains all paragraphs in a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of the type Paragraph.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the paragraph at a certain geometrical position.

Specifies the paragraph's location.

Gets the paragraph at a certain text input position.

Specifies a zero-based text position.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets a paragraph from the collection.

An instance of the ParagraphFormat class represents the formatting attributes of a paragraph.

Creates an empty ParagraphFormat object with all properties set to their default values.

Creates a new ParagraphFormat object with the specified horizontal alignment. All other properties are set to their default values.

Specifies one of the HorizontalAlignment values.

Determines a certain paragraph format attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the AbsoluteLineSpacing property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Alignment property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BackColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the BottomDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Direction property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Frame property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FrameStyle property.

Specifies the attribute set through the HangingIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Direction property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Justification property.

Specifies the attribute set through the KeepWithNext property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LeftIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the LineSpacing property.

Specifies the attribute set through the PageBreakBefore property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RightIndent property.

Specifies the attribute set through the StructureLevel property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TabPositions property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TabTypes property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TopDistance property.

Specifies the attribute set through the WidowOrphanLines property.

Represents the maximum number of tabs in a line.

Gets or sets the line spacing of a paragraph in twips.

Gets or sets the horizontal text alignment.

Gets or sets the background color of a paragraph.

Gets or sets the color used for the frame lines of a paragraph.

Gets or sets the bottom distance, in twips, between this and the next paragraph.

Gets or sets the writing direction.

Gets or sets a frame around the paragraph.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, between the text and the paragraph's frame.

Gets or sets the line width, in twips, of the paragraph's frame.

Gets or sets the style of the paragraph's frame.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, for the hanging indent.

Gets or sets the kind of justification in documents containing Arabic or Hebrew characters.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether a page break is allowed within the paragraph.

If this property is set to true, the paragraph is displayed on the same page as its following paragraph.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, between the left edge of the Text Control and the left edge of the text.

Specifies the line spacing of a paragraph as a percentage of the font size.

If this property is set to true, the paragraph is always displayed on top of a page.

Gets or sets the distance, in twips, between the right edge of a Text Control document and the right edge of the text.

Gets or sets the structure level of a paragraph in the document.

Gets or sets an array containing the tab leaders in a paragraph.

Gets or sets an array containing the absolute tab stop positions, in twips, in a paragraph.

Gets or sets an array containing the tab types in a paragraph.

Gets or sets a top distance, in twips, between this and the previous paragraph.

Gets or sets the number of lines for widow/orphan control.

The ParagraphStyle class defines a formatting style for paragraphs.

Creates a new instance of the ParagraphStyle class based on the TextControl root style named [Normal].

Specifies the new style's name.

Creates a new instance of the ParagraphStyle class based on the specified base style.

Specifies the new style's name. Specifies the name of the style the new style is based on.

Creates a new root style that has all attributes of the specified style.

Is a style the attributes of which are used to initialize the new style.

Gets or sets the name of the style that TextControl automatically selects for the following paragraph after the user has pressed the ENTER key.

Gets or sets the style's bulleted or numbered list and/or its formatting attributes.

Gets or sets the style's paragraph attributes.

An instance of the ParagraphStyleCollection class contains all paragraph formatting styles in the current document represented through objects of the type ParagraphStyle.

Adds to new formatting style to the current document.

Specifies the style to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets a particular style from the collection.

Specifies the name of the style.

The RulerBar class represents a Windows Forms tool bar which can be used to show or to set indents, margins and tabs of a Windows Forms TextControl.

Resets all display colors of a ruler bar to their system dependent default values.

Gets or sets a value specifying the alignment of the ruler bar in the document.

Gets or sets the border style of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the colors of the ruler bar.

Enables or disables the setting of page margins.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the ruler bar shows cell references when the current input position is in a table cell.

Gets or sets a value determining the ruler bar's read only mode.

Gets or sets the unit of the ruler bar's scale.

The RulerBar.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a Windows Forms RulerBar control.

Initializes a new instance of the RulerBar.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the RulerBar.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Resets the ruler bar's BackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's ForeColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's GradientBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's RulerColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's SeparatorColorDark to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's SeparatorColorLight to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the background color at the left or top edge of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the color used for the numbers of the ruler.

Gets or sets the background color at the right or bottom edge of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the color of the ruler.

Gets or sets the color of dark separators.

Gets or sets the color of light separators.

The SaveSettings class provides properties for advanced settings and information during save operations.

Determines additional options in a file Save As... dialogbox.

The dialogbox does not show additional options.

PDF only: The dialogbox offers a button which opens a dialogbox to specify an encryption password. This button is shown only, if the user selects Adobe PDF as the file format to save the document. The Adobe PDF/A file format does not support encryption passwords.

HTML only: The dialogbox offers buttons to specify how to save formatting styles: Inline or in a separate file. These buttons are shown only, if the user selects Hypertext Markup Language as the file format to save the document.

The dialogbox offers a checkbox indicating that only the currently selected text is saved. This checkbox is shown only, if a text selection exists when the dialogbox is opened.

Sets the document's author which will be saved in the document.

Gets the number of bytes written during a save operation.

Sets the document's creation date which will be saved in the document.

Sets the application, which has created the document.

HTML only. Sets the path and filename of a CSS file belonging to a HTML document.

HTML only. Specifies how to save stylesheet data with a HTML document.

Specifies a DigitalSignature object, which defines an X.509 certificate.

Specifies how a document can be accessed after it has been opened.

Sets the document's keywords which will be saved in the document.

Specifies an array of strings containing Javascript.

Sets the document's subject string which will be saved in the document.

Sets the document's title that will be saved in the document.

Sets a value between 1 and 100, which is the quality of a lossy image compression used when a document is saved.

Sets the format used for saving all images contained in the document.

Sets the maximum resolution for all images in the document in dots per inch when the document is saved.

Determines whether the document's images are stored through its data or through its file reference.

Sets a file path that is used to save resources like images when images are saved as file link.

Sets the date the document is last modified.

Specifies data to be omitted when the document is saved.

Sets the margins saved for the document's pages.

Sets the width and height saved for the document's pages.

Read only. Gets the name and path of the file that has been saved.

Specifies whether or not the document background color is saved.

Read only. Gets the StreamType of the file that has been saved.

Specifies an array of DigitalSignature objects, each of which defines an X.509 certificate and is associated with a SignatureField in the document.

Sets a dictionary with all user-defined document properties which will be saved in the document.

An object of the Section class represents a section of a document.

Selects the section. The section break characters bounding the section are not selected.

Gets or sets the section's formatting attributes.

Gets a collection of all headers and footers of the section.

Gets the number of characters in the section.

Gets the section's number.

Gets the number (one-based) of the first character in the section.

An instance of the SectionCollection class contains all sections of a document.

Adds a new section at the current text input position. The new section ends at the end position of the section containing the input position. If a new section is inserted in a paragraph or table, the paragraph or table is split into two paragraphs or tables.

Specifies the kind of the section break.

Adds a new section at the specified text input position. The new section ends at the end position of the section containing the input position. If a new section is inserted in a paragraph or table, the paragraph or table is split into two paragraphs or tables.

Specifies the kind of the section break. Specifies the text position at which the section is to be inserted.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the Section with the current text input position from the collection.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets a section from the collection.

An instance of the SectionFormat class represents the formatting attributes of a section.

Creates an empty SectionFormat object. Further properties must be set.

Creates a SectionFormat object for a section with equal column widths. The SectionFormat.EqualColumnWidth property is automatically set to true.

Specifies the number of columns for the section. Specifies the distance between equal columns.

Creates a SectionFormat object for a section with individual column widths and distances. The SectionFormat.EqualColumnWidth property is automatically set to false.

Specifies the number of columns for the section. Specifies the widths of the columns. Specifies the distances between the columns.

Determines a certain section format attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the BreakKind property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnDistances property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnLineColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnLineWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Columns property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ColumnWidths property.

Specifies the attribute set through the EqualColumnWidth property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Landscape property.

Specifies the attribute set through the PageSize property.

Specifies the attribute set through the RestartPageNumbering property.

Gets or sets the kind of the section break the section starts with.

Gets the distances, in twips, between the columns on a page.

Gets or sets the color of a dividing line between two columns.

Gets or sets the width of a dividing line between two columns.

Gets or sets the number of columns on a page.

Gets the widths, in twips, of the columns on a page.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the columns on a page have all the same width and the same distance between them.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the section's page size is in landscape orientation.

Gets or sets the attributes of a section's page border.

Gets or sets the section's page margins.

Gets or sets the section's page size.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether page numbering is restarted at the section's beginning.

The Selection class describes and handles the attributes of a text selection.

Creates an empty Selection object with all properties set to their default values.

Creates an instance of the Selection class with the specified start value and length. All other properties are set to their default values.

Specifies the selection's start position. Specifies the number of selected characters.

Determines a certain attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the AutoBaseline property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Baseline property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Bold property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Capitals property.

Specifies the attribute set through the CharacterScaling property.

Specifies the attribute set through the CharacterSpacing property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FontName property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FontSize property.

Specifies the attribute set through the ForeColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the FormattingStyle property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Italic property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Strikeout property.

Specifies the attribute set through the TextBackColor property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Underline property.

Specifies identifiers to indicate the return value of a dialog box.

Specifies that the dialog box has been canceled.

Specifies that the dialog box has been left with the Escape key.

Specifies that the dialog box has been left with OK.

Changes the capitalization of all selected characters depending on the settings parameter.

Specifies how the capitalization is changed.

Changes the writing direction of all selected paragraphs. When the direction of a paragraph is changed, this paragraph's alignment is toggled from left to right or from right to left. The alignment of centered and justified paragraphs is not changed. Left and right tabulators are also toggled.

Specifies the writing direction.

Decreases the left indent of all paragraphs contained in the current text selection. If no text is selected, this method decreases the left indent at the text input position. Left indent positions are defined through the paragraphs' tab positions and the indents of the paragraphs in front and behind the paragraph with the text input position.

Increases the font size of each font contained in the current text selection. If no text is selected, this method increases the font size at the text input position. The font sizes used with this method are the same as shown through the ButtonBar or the built-in font dialog.

Increases the left indent of all paragraphs contained in the current text selection. If no text is selected, this method increases the left indent at the text input position. left indent positions are defined through the paragraphs' tab positions and the indents of the paragraphs in front and behind the paragraph with the text input position.

Informs about whether an attribute from the Selection.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Specifies a possible value from the enumeration.

Informs about whether an attribute from the ParagraphFormat.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Specifies a possible value from the enumeration.

Informs about whether an attribute from the ListFormat.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Specifies a possible value from the enumeration.

Informs about whether an attribute from the SectionFormat.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Specifies a possible value from the enumeration.

Informs about whether an attribute from the PageMargins.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Specifies a possible value from the enumeration.

Informs about whether an attribute from the PageSize.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Specifies a possible value from the enumeration.

Informs about whether an attribute from the PageBorder.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete selection.

Specifies a possible value from the enumeration.

Opens a dialog box to select a file and exchanges the currently selected text with the text from that file.

Opens a dialog box to select a file in the specified format and exchanges the currently selected text with the text from that file.

Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Opens a dialog box to select a file in the specified format and exchanges the currently selected text with the text from that file using the specified special settings.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Resets all character based formatting attributes of the selected text to its default values. If nothing or more than one paragraph is selected, all paragraph based formatting attributes are also reset.

Removes all character based styles of the selected text so that all attributes are reset to the attributes of the paragraph style.

Opens a file save dialogbox and saves the selected text of a document in a file.

Opens a file save dialogbox and saves the selected text of a document in a file with the specified format.

Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified file with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified file stream with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Opens a file save dialogbox and saves the selected text of a document in a file with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified file using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified file stream using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified byte array using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the selected text of a document as a string using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Decreases the font size of each font contained in the current text selection. If no text is selected, this method decreases the font size at the text input position. The font sizes used with this method are the same as shown through the ButtonBar or the built-in font dialog.

Gets or sets values specifying wheather the selected text is automatically sub- or superscripted.

Gets or sets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the selected text.

Gets or sets the bold attribute of the selected text.

Gets or sets values specifying wheather the lowercase letters of the selected text are displayed with capital letters.

Gets or sets a character scaling, in percent of the average character width, of the selected text.

Gets or sets a character spacing value, in twips, of the selected text.

Gets or sets the culture of the selected text.

Gets or sets the font of the selected text.

Gets or sets the font's size, in twips, of the selected text.

Returns or sets the color used to display the selected text.

Gets or sets the formatting style of the selected text.

Gets or sets the italic attribute of the selected text.

Returns or sets the number of characters selected.

Gets or sets a bulleted or numbered list and/or its formatting attributes for the selected text.

Gets or sets the formatting attributes of the selected paragraphs.

Gets or sets page settings such as margins, size and orientation for the selected text.

Gets or sets the starting point of selected text.

Gets or sets the strikeout attribute of the selected text.

Gets or sets a string containing the currently selected text.

Gets or sets the background color for selected text.

Gets or sets underlining styles for the selected text.

An object of the SelectionFormField class represents a combobox or a drop-down list on a form.

Initializes a new instance of an empty SelectionFormField. It has no items and no text.

Specifies the horizontal extension, in twips, of the SelectionFormField, when there is no selected item.

Initializes a new instance of a SelectionFormField with the specified items and the index of the selected item.

Specifies a list of items for the SelectionFormField. Specifies the zero-based index of the selected item.

Gets or sets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the SelectionFormField, when there is no selected item.

Gets or sets a value indicating wheather a dropdown arrow is shown so that the user can select an item.

Gets or sets a list of items for the SelectionFormField.

Gets or sets the index of the selected item of the SelectionFormField.

The SelectionFormFieldEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.FormFieldSelectionChanged event.

Gets an object representing the SelectionFormField that causes the event.

The ServerTextControl class implements a component that provide high-level text processing features for server-based applications.

Initializes a new instance of the ServerTextControl class. After initialization the Create method must be called to enable further resources.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified file and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified file stream and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified byte array and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies settings how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified string and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies settings how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified file and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified file stream and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified byte array and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified string and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings how the document is appended.

Clears the selected text or the character right from the current input position.

Initializes the resources of a newly instantiated object. This method must be called before using the object.

Finds the specified text string in the main text of the document. The search starts at the beginning of the document.

Specifies the text to search for.

Finds the specified text string in the main text of the document using the specified find options. The search starts at the specified position.

Specifies the text to search for. Specifies the text position where the search starts, beginning with 0. Specifies search options.

Gets an array of strings specifying the names of all currently supported fonts. These fonts depend on the formatting device set with the ServerTextControl.FormattingPrinter property. The method returns null if the ServerTextControl has not been completely initialized.

Gets an array of PaperSize structures specifying the names and the size of all currently supported paper sizes. These paper sizes depend on the formatting device set with the ServerTextControl.FormattingPrinter property. The method returns null, if the ServerTextControl has not been completely initialized.

Returns a collection containing text fields of the specified types.

Specifies types of text fields.

Returns a collection of XML elements. It is an object of the type XmlElementCollection.

Specifies the XML element's name.

Returns an object of the type VersionInfo, which provides information about the installed TX Text Control version.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Raises the AdaptFont event.

Specifies an AdaptFontEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeCreated event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeDeleted event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentCreated event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentDeleted event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ContentsReset event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentLoaded event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentTargetCreated event.

Specifies an DocumentTargetEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentTargetDeleted event.

Specifies an DocumentTargetEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingCreated event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeleted event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionCreated event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionDeleted event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteCreated event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteDeleted event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HyphenateWord event.

Specifies an HyphenateWordEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageCreated event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDeleted event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldCreated event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldDeleted event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SpellCheckText event.

Specifies an SpellCheckTextEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartCreated event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartDeleted event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableCreated event.

Specifies an TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableDeleted event.

Specifies an TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsCreated event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsDeleted event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldCreated event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldDeleted event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameCreated event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeleted event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeCreated event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeDeleted event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the XmlInvalid event.

Specifies an XmlErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the XmlNotWellFormed event.

Specifies an XmlErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Prints the document using the printer settings of the specified PrintDocument.

Specifies an instance of the PrintDocument class.

Prints a single page. This method can be called from the PrintPage event handler.

Specifies a page number to print. Specifies the event arguments of the print document's PrintPage event.

Resets the BackColor property to its default value. The default value is the system color for the window background.

Deletes the entire contents of the control.

Resets the Font property to its default value. The default value is 10 pt Arial.

Resets the ForeColor property to its default value. The default value is the system color for the window text.

Resets the PageMargins property to its default value. The default page margins are 1 inch.

Resets the PageSize property to its default value. The default page size is US letter (8,5 x 11 inch).

Resets the TextBackColor property to its default value. The default value is the setting of the BackColor property.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file stream with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file stream using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified byte array using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document as a string using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Selects text within the control.

Specifies the selection's start position. Specifies the number of selected characters.

Selects all text in the control.

Selects the word at the current text input position.

Gets a collection of all Microsoft Word or Heiler HighEdit fields that have been created or imported from a Microsoft Word or RTF document.

Gets or sets the background color of the control.

Gets a collection of all barcodes in a document.

Gets or sets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the control.

Gets a collection of all charts in a document.

Gets a collection of all comments.

Gets a collection of all links that point to targets in the same document.

Gets a DocumentSettings object providing properties which inform about general document settings, such as author and title, contained in the document the user is currently working on.

Gets a collection of all targets in the document.

Gets a collection of all drawings in a document.

Gets a collection of all editable regions contained in the document.

Gets or sets the control's font.

Gets a FontSettings object which provides properties determining which fonts can be used in a document.

Gets or sets underlining style for the text displayed by the control.

Gets a collection of all footnotes contained in the main text of the document.

Gets or sets the foreground color of the control.

Gets or sets the name of a printer the text dimensions and capabilities of which are used to format the document.

Gets a collection of all form fields contained in the document.

Gets or sets a value determining how references to table cells in formulas are specified.

Gets a collection of all images, textframes, charts and barcodes in a document.

Gets a collection of all pages in the document.

Gets a collection of all headers and footers the current document contains.

Gets a collection of all hypertext links contained in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all images contained in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all inline styles the current document contains.

Gets or sets the current text input position.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether formulas in tables are automatically calculated when the text of an input cell is changed.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether hyphenation is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether language detection is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether spell checking is active or not.

Gets a value indicating whether the control is completely created.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page orientation is landscape or portrait.

Gets a collection of all lines contained in the main text of the document.

Gets or sets the type and the formatting attributes of a bulleted or numbered list.

Gets a collection of all misspelled words in the main text of the document.

Gets or sets the margins for the pages of the current document.

Gets the number of pages contained in the current document.

Specifies the width and height of the pages for the current document.

Gets or sets the measure used for page sizes and page margins.

Gets or sets the paragraph formatting attributes of the text displayed by the control.

Gets a collection of all paragraphs contained in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all paragraph styles the current document contains.

Gets a collection of all sections in the document.

Gets or sets the current selection in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all signature fields contained in the main text of the document.

Specifies the spell checking component to be used with a ServerTextControl.

Gets a collection of all subtextparts contained in the document.

Gets a collection of all tables contained in the document.

Gets a collection of all tables of contents in the document.

Gets or sets the control's text.

Gets or sets the background color for the text.

Gets a collection of all characters contained in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all standard text fields contained in the main text of the document.

Gets a collection of all text frames the current document contains.

Gets a collection of all text parts the current document contains.

Gets a collection of all changes made in the active part of the document.

Occurs for each font that must be adapted, because it is not supported.

Occurs when a new barcode has been created.

Occurs when a barcode has been deleted.

Occurs when a new chart has been created.

Occurs when a chart has been deleted.

Occurs when a piece of text has been commented.

Occurs when a comment has been removed from the document.

Occurs when all text contents have been deleted and all attributes have been reset to the state after initialization.

Occurs when a new document has been loaded.

Occurs when a document target has been created.

Occurs when a document target has been deleted.

Occurs when a new drawing has been created.

Occurs when a drawing has been deleted.

Occurs when an editable region has been created.

Occurs when an editable region has been deleted.

Occurs when a footnote has been created.

Occurs when a footnote has been deleted.

Occurs, if a word does not fit on the line and must be hyphenated.

Occurs when a new image has been created.

Occurs when an image has been deleted.

Occurs when a new signature field has been created.

Occurs when a signature field has been deleted.

Occurs, if the document's text has been altered and the spelling of the new text must be checked.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been created.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been deleted.

Occurs after a new table has been created when loading a document which contains a table without an identifier.

Occurs after a table has been deleted.

Occurs when a table of contents has been created.

Occurs when a table of contents has been deleted.

Occurs when a text field has been created.

Occurs when a text field has been deleted.

Occurs when a new text frame has been created.

Occurs when a text frame has been deleted.

Occurs when a tracked change has been created.

Occurs when a tracked change has been deleted.

Occurs when a loaded or changed XML document cannot be validated with the document type definition (DTD) referenced in the document.

Occurs when a loaded XML document is not well-formed.

An instance of the SignatureField class represents a signature field in a Text Control document.

Initializes a new instance of the SignatureField class. A name is necessary when the signature field is associated with a digital certificate.

Specifies the signature field's size in twips. Specifies the signature field's name. Specifies the signature field's user-defined id.

Gets or sets a SignatureImage.

Gets or sets a suggested signer's name, title and address and a reason why to sign the document.

An instance of the SignatureFieldCollection class contains all signature fields in a Text Control document represented through objects of the type SignatureField.

Inserts a signature field inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The field is inserted at the specified text position.

Specifies the signature field to add. Specifies the text position at which the signature field is to be inserted.

Inserts a signature field which is anchored to the paragraph containing the specified text position. The field has the specified horizontal alignment. FrameInsertionMode.FixedOnPage and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the signature field to add. Specifies the signature field's horizontal alignment. Specifies the text position at which the signature field is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a signature field which is anchored to the paragraph containing the specified text position. The field has the specified position relative to the paragraph containing its anchor position. FrameInsertionMode.FixedOnPage and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the signature field to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the signature field is to be inserted. Specifies the text position at which the signature field is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a signature field that has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page. FrameInsertionMode.MoveWithText and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the signature field to add. Specifies the number of a page beginning with 1 where the signature field is located. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the signature field is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a signature field that has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This location is specified through a document position relative to the top left corner of the complete document. FrameInsertionMode.MoveWithText and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the signature field to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the signature field is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a signature field with the built-in mouse interface. The signature field's size is determined through the end-user. A cross cursor indicates where the signature field can be inserted. Changing the document or pressing the ESC key aborts the insertion process.

Specifies the signature field to add. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the signature field selected by the user or null if no signature field is selected.

Gets the signature field with the specified identifier.

Specifies the signature field's identifier set with the signature field's constructor or the ID property.

Gets the signature field with the specified name.

Specifies the signature field's name set with set with the signature field's constructor or the Name property.

Removes a signature field from a Text Control document.

Specifies the signature field to remove.

The SignatureFieldEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with signature fields.

Gets an object that represents the image which causes the event.

An instance of the SignatureImage class represents an image for a SignatureField.

Initializes a new image from the specified image file and filter.

Specifies the name and the path of the file from which the image is loaded. Specifies the index of the filter used to load the image.

Initializes a new image from the specified System.Drawing.Image.

Specifies a System.Drawing.Image object which is used to initialize the signature image.

Initializes a new image from the specified memory stream.

Specifies a memory stream from which the data for the signature image is read.

Sets a value between 1 and 100, which is the quality of a lossy data compression used if this image is saved.

Gets or sets the file name used, if a Text Control document is saved.

Gets or sets the format used if the image is saved.

Gets or sets the maximum resolution in dots per inch used if this image is saved.

Gets or sets the corresponding file name and path from which the image has been loaded.

Gets or sets the format of the image.

Determines whether the image is stored through its data or through its file reference.

An instance of the SignerData class represents the data of a suggested signer connected with a SignatureField.

Initializes a new instance of the SignerData class. Each of the specified parts of information can be set to null or an empty string, if not needed.

Specifies the name of a suggested signer. Specifies the title of a suggested signer. Specifies the address of a suggested signer. Specifies contact information of a suggested signer. Specifies a reason why the document is signed.

Gets the name of a suggested signer.

Gets the title of a suggested signer.

Gets the address of a suggested signer.

Gets contact information of a suggested signer, such as a phone number.

Gets a reason why the document is signed.

The SpellCheckTextEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.SpellCheckText and WPF.TextControl.SpellCheckText events.

Gets the culture of the text to check.

Gets or sets an array of MisspelledWord objects.

Gets the text to check.

The StatusBar class represents a Windows Forms tool bar which can be used to show the position of the curent text input position and other status information of a Windows Forms TextControl.

Resets all display colors of a status bar to their system dependent default values.

Gets or sets the border style of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Column' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the colors of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Line' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Page counter' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Page' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Section counter' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Section' area of the status bar.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the column number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the key state of the CAPSLOCK and the NUMLOCK key and the current insertion mode, insert or overwrite.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the language of the text selection or the text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the line number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the page number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of pages the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the section number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of sections the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the current zoom factor.

Specifies whether the status bar displays a track bar instead of a simple number to show and to set the zooming factor.

The StatusBar.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a Windows Forms StatusBar control.

Initializes a new instance of the StatusBar.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the StatusBar.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Resets the status bar's BackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's BackColorBottom to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's BackColorMiddle to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's BackColorTop to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's ForeColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's FrameColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's GradientBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's SeparatorColorDark to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's SeparatorColorLight to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the background color at the left edge of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color at the bottom of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color in the middle of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color at the top of the status bar.

Gets or sets the color used for text and numbers.

Gets or sets the color of the status bar's frames.

Gets or sets the background color at the right edge of the status bar.

Gets or sets the color of the dark part of a separator.

Gets or sets the color of the light part of a separator.

A SubTextPart object represents a user-defined part of a TX Text Control document.

Creates a subtextpart with the specified name and/or id. The start and length of the subtextpart are initialized to zero. When a zero-length subtextpart is inserted, the current text selection defines it position and length.

Specifies the name of the subtextpart. Specifies an identifier for the subtextpart.

Creates a subtextpart with the specified name, id, start position and length.

Specifies the name of the subtextpart. Specifies an identifier for the subtextpart. Specifies the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the subtextpart. Specifies the number of characters which belong to the subtextpart.

Returns an array of SubTextPart objects which are the children of this SubTextPart. The array contains all direct children and all further descendants in the order as they appear in the text.

Returns an array of TextField objects which are completely contained in this SubTextPart. The objects' type depend on the fieldType parameter.

Specifies types of text fields.

Saves the subtextpart's text in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the subtextpart's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the subtextpart's text as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the subtextpart's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the subtextpart's text in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the subtextpart's text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the subtextpart's text as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the subtextpart's text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of a subtextpart and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Gets or sets additional data of the subtextpart.

Gets or sets the highlight color for the subtextpart.

Gets or sets a value indicating when the subtextpart is highlighted.

Gets or sets the subtextpart's identifier.

Gets the number of characters which belong to the subtextpart.

Gets or sets the name of the subtextpart.

Gets the subtextpart's nested level.

Gets the subtextpart's number.

Gets a subtextpart's outer subtextpart.

Gets a subtextpart's outermost subtextpart.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the subtextpart.

Gets the subtextpart's text.

Contains all subtextparts in the main text or another main part of a document.

Specifies the result when a subtextpart has been added to the document.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because it already exists.

The subtextpart was inserted and combined with an existing one. A subtextpart is combined with an existing one, when it immediately follows it and has the same name and id.

An unexpected error has occurred.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because there is no selection.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because it overlaps with an existing textpart.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because the specified position values are invalid. Invalid start and/or length values have been specified.

The subtextpart wasn't inserted because the selection is too complex. It is not a continuous sequence of characters.

The subtextpart has successfully been inserted.

Adds a new subtextpart to the document. Its position is defined through the SubTextPart.Start and SubTextPart.Length properties. If the subtextpart's length is zero, the current text selection is used to define the position.

Specifies the subtextpart to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the subtextpart at the current text input position. If there is more than one textpart at the current input position the textpart with the highest level is returned.

Gets the subtextpart with the specified name. The method returns null, if such a textpart does not exist. If more than one textpart with this name exists, the first found textpart is returned.

Specifies the textpart's name set with the Name property.

Gets the subtextpart with the specified id. The method returns null, if such a textpart does not exist. If more than one textpart with this id exists, the first found textpart is returned.

Specifies the textpart's identifier.

Removes a subtextpart from the collection including all its nested subtextparts.

Specifies the subtextpart to remove. If this parameter is set to true, the subtextpart is removed without deleting its visible text. If this parameter is set to true, nested subtextparts are preserved.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets the subtextpart with the specified number from the collection.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The SubTextPartEventArgs class provides data for the SubTextPartClicked, SubTextPartCreated, SubTextPartDeleted, SubTextPartDoubleClicked, SubTextPartEntered and SubTextPartLeft events.

Gets an object that represents the subtextpart which causes the event.

An instance of the Table class represents a table in a Text Control document.

Merges all selected table cells in this table. The Table.CanMergeCells property can be used to determine, if table cells can be merged or not.

Selects the complete table.

Selects the part of the table defined through two table cells.

Specifies the row number where the selection begins. Specifies the column number where the selection begins. Specifies the row number where the selection ends. Specifies the column number where the selection ends.

Splits a table below or above the current input position. If the table does not contain the current input position it cannot be split. The Table.CanSplit property can be used to determine if a table can be split or not. If a table is split above the first row a new line is inserted above the table and if a table is split below the last row a new line is inserted below the table. This is useful to insert text above or below a nested table that immediately starts and/or ends at the beginning or the end of the cell in which it is nested.

Specifies the position where to split the table.

Splits all selected table cells in this table. Only previously merged cells can be split. The Table.CanSplitCells property can be used to determine, if table cells can be split or not.

Checks whether table cells can be merged.

Checks whether this table can be split.

Returns true, if the currently selected table cells are merged.

Gets a collection of all table cells the table consists of.

Gets a collection of all columns the table consists of.

Gets or sets the table's identifier.

Gets the nested level for the specified table.

Gets a collection of all tables nested in this table.

Gets a table's outer table.

Gets a table's outermost table.

Gets a collection of all rows the table consists of.

The TableBaseCollection class is the base class for the table collection classes.

Removes all tables contained in the collection from a Text Control document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets a particular table from the collection.

Specifies the table's identifier.

Removes a particular table from the collection.

Specifies the table's identifier.

Gets the number of tables contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

An instance of the TableCell class represents a single cell of a table in a Text Control document.

Selects the table cell.

Gets or sets the formatting attributes of a table cell.

Gets the table cell's column number.

Gets or sets the table cell's formula.

Gets the number of characters in the table cell.

Gets or sets the cell's name.

Gets or sets, in twips, the horizontal position of the cell.

Gets the table cell's row number.

Gets or sets the cell's text.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character in the table cell.

Gets or sets, in twips, the width of the cell.

An instance of the TableCellCollection class contains all cells of a table in a Text Control document represented through TableCell objects.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the table cell at the current input position.

Gets the cell with the specified row and column number.

Specifies the row number. Specifies the column number.

Removes the table cell at the current text input position or all selected table cells when a text selection exists.

Gets a value indicating whether table cells can be removed.

An instance of the TableCellFormat class represents the formatting attributes of a table cell.

Gets or sets the table cell's background color.

Gets or sets the color of the table cell's bottom border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the width of the table cell's bottom border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the distance between the table cell's bottom border and its text.

Gets or sets the color of the table cell's left border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the width of the table cell's left border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the distance between the table cell's left border and its text.

Gets or sets a number format for the table cell.

Gets or sets the color of the table cell's right border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the width of the table cell's right border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the distance between the table cell's right border and its text.

Gets or sets the text type of the table cell which determines whether the cell's text is interpreted as a number or as text When the type is Standard, the cell's text is interpreted as text and it is displayed as it is.

Gets or sets the color of the table cell's top border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the width of the table cell's top border.

Gets or sets, in twips, the distance between the table cell's top border and its text.

Gets or sets the vertical alignment of the text in the table cell.

An instance of the TableCollection class contains all tables of a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of the type Table.

Opens a dialog box and, when left with Ok, adds a new table with the specified attributes.

Adds a new table at the current text input position. The new table has the specified number of rows and columns.

Specifies the number of rows the table consists of. Specifies the number of columns the table consists of.

Adds a new table at the current text input position. The new table has the specified number of rows and columns. The specified identifier can be used to get the table from the collection.

Specifies the number of rows the table consists of. Specifies the number of columns the table consists of. Specifies the table's id.

Gets the table at the current input position. To get a particular table with a certain identifier use the base class's implementation TableBaseCollection.GetItem.

Removes the table at the current text input position. To remove a particular table with a certain identifier use the base class's implementation TableBaseCollection.Remove.

Gets a value indicating whether a new table can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets or sets a value indicating wether table grid lines are shown or not.

Gets a list of all formula functions currently supported.

Gets a list of often used number formats for formula results.

An instance of the TableColumn class represents a single column of a table in a Text Control document.

Selects the table column.

Gets or sets the formatting attributes of a table column.

Gets the number of the table column represented through this table column object.

Gets or sets, in twips, the horizontal position of the column.

Gets or sets, in twips, the width of the column.

An instance of the TableColumnCollection class contains all columns of a table in a Text Control document represented through objects of the type TableColumn.

Adds a new table column at the current text input position.

Specifies the position where to add the column.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the table column at the current input position.

Gets the table column with the specified number.

Specifies the column number.

Removes the table column at the current text input position or all selected table columns when a text selection exists.

Gets a value indicating whether a new column can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets a value indicating whether table columns can be removed.

The TableEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.TableCreated, TextControl.TableDeleted and TextControl.TableFormatChanged events.

Gets an object that represents the table which causes the event.

A TableOfContents object defines the position and the properties of a table of contents.

Defines a table of contents with the specified minimum and maximum structure level. All paragraphs that have a level between these borders will be contained in the table of contents. The ParagraphFormat.StructureLevel property dedines the level of a paragraph.

Specifies the minimum structure level of the paragraphs that will be contained in the table of contents. Specifies the maximum structure level of the paragraphs that will be contained in the table of contents.

Saves the text of the table of contents in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the text of the table of contents as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the text of the table of contents in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the text of the table of contents as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of the table of contents and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Updates the content and the page numbers of the table of contents.

Represents the default highlight color.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether each entry in the table of contents is a DocumentLink with a corresponding DocumentTarget.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the table of contents contains page numbers.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the page numbers in the table of contents are right-aligned.

Gets or sets the highlight color for the table of contents.

Gets or sets a value indicating how the text of the table of contents is highlighted.

Gets or sets an identifier.

Gets the number of characters which belong to the table of contents.

Gets or sets the maximum structure level for this table of contents.

Gets or sets the minimum structure level for this table of contents.

Gets or sets a name for the table of contents.

Gets the number of the table of contents in the text.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first character which belongs to the table of contents.

Gets the text of the table of contents.

Gets or sets a title for the table of contents.

Contains all tables of contents in a certain part of the document.

Specifies the result when an existing table of contents has been updated or a new table of contents has been added to the document.

The table of contents could not be inserted or updated because it has no content. A paragraph with a structure level as specified through the TableOfContents.MinimumStructureLevel and TableOfContents.MaximumStructureLevel properties could not be found.

An unexpected error has occurred or the current text input position is a position where a table of contents cannot be inserted. Tables of content cannot be inserted in a TextField or a HypertextLink. Furthermore, tables of contents cannot be nested.

The table of contents has successfully been inserted or updated.

Adds a new table of contents to the document at the current text input position.

Specifies the table of contents to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the table of contents at the current text input position. If there is no table of contents, null is returned.

Gets the table of contents with the specified name. The method returns null, if such a table of contents does not exist. If more than one table of contents with this name exists, the first found table of contents is returned.

Specifies the name set with the Name property.

Gets the table of contents with the specified id. The method returns null, if such a table of contents does not exist. If more than one table of contents with this id exists, the first found table of contents is returned.

Specifies the identifier of the table of contents.

Removes a table of contents from the collection including all its text and including all DocumentTargets to where the table's links point.

Specifies the table of contents to remove.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets the table of contents with the specified number from the collection.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The TableOfContentsEventArgs class provides data for the TableOfContentsCreated, TableOfContentsDeleted, TableOfContentsEntered and TableOfContentsLeft events.

Gets an object that represents the table of contents which causes the event.

The TablePartCollection class is the base class of the TableRowCollection, TableColumnCollection and TableCellCollection classes.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

An instance of the TableRow class represents a single row of a table in a Text Control document.

Selects the table row.

Gets or sets a value specifying how the table row is formatted at page breaks.

Gets or sets the formatting attributes of a table row.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the table row is part of the table's header.

Gets or sets the minimum height, in twips, of the table row.

Gets the number of the table row represented through this table row object.

An instance of the TableRowCollection class contains all rows of a table in a Text Control document represented through objects of the type TableRow.

Adds new table rows at the current text input position.

Specifies the position where to add the rows. Specifies the number of rows to add.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the table row at the current input position.

Gets the table row with the specified number.

Specifies the row number.

Removes the selected table rows or the row at the current text input position.

Gets a value indicating whether a new row can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets a value indicating whether selected rows can be removed.

An instance of the TextChar class represents a single character in a Text Control document.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the character.

Gets the value of the character.

Gets the character's number.

An instance of the TextCharCollection class contains all characters in a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of the type TextChar.

Inserts a character at the current text input position.

Specifies the character to insert.

Inserts a character at the current text input position using the specified font.

Specifies the character to insert. Specifies the name of the font which is used for the specified character.

Inserts a character at the specified position using the specified font.

Specifies the character to insert. Specifies the name of the font which is used for the specified character. Specifies a text input position.

Inserts a control character at the current text input position.

Specifies a control character to insert.

Inserts a control character at the specified text input position.

Specifies a control character to insert. Specifies a text input position.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets a particular character from the collection specified through a certain geometrical position.

Specifies the character's location. Specifies whether the nearest character is returned.

Removes a character from a Text Control document. The method can also be used to remove control characters. Single control characters which are important for other formatting attributes, i.e. a table cell end character, cannot be removed through this method.

Specifies the character to remove.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets the character from the collection.

The TextContextMenuEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.TextContextMenuOpening event of a Windows Forms TextControl.

Gets the location in the document for which the context menu will be opened.

Gets the location, in pixels, where the context menu is displayed.

Gets or sets the context menu, which will be shown.

The TextControl class implements a Windows Forms control with high-level text editing features.

Initializes a new instance of the TextControl class.

Invokes a built-in dialog box for inserting symbol characters.

Opens a file open dialogbox and appends the selected file to the existing document.

Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Opens a file open dialogbox and appends the selected file with the specified format to the existing document.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified file and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified file stream and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified byte array and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified string and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Opens a file open dialogbox and appends the selected file with the specified format and special settings to the existing document.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified file and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified file stream and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified byte array and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified string and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Begins a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between BeginUndoAction and EndUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step. The specified user-defined name is available with the UndoActionName property.

Specifies the undo action's name.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Clears the selected text or the character right from the current input position from the Text Control. This method works only if the Text Control has the focus.

Clears the undo buffer of the Text Control.

Computes the specified client point into document coordinates.

Specifies a client point which document coordinates are computed.

Computes the specified client rectangle into document coordinates.

Specifies a client rectangle which document coordinates are computed.

Opens a dialog box to create a new Conditional Instruction.

Opens a dialog box to edit a specific Conditional Instruction. If the document does not contain a Conditional Instruction with the specified name, the dialog is opened to create such a Conditional Instruction.

Specifies the name of the Conditional Instruction to edit or create.

Copies the current selection in the Text Control to the Clipboard.

Moves the current selection in the Text Control to the Clipboard.

Computes the specified point in twips into client coordinates.

Specifies a document point which client coordinates are computed.

Computes the specified rectangle in twips into client coordinates.

Specifies a document rectangle which client coordinates are computed.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Ends a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between BeginUndoAction and EndUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step.

Opens the built-in Find dialog box to search for a text string in the text part with the input focus. This can be the main text, a text frame or a header or footer.

Searches for the specified text string in the text part with the input focus. This can be the main text, a text frame or a header or footer. The search starts at the beginning of the text.

Specifies the text to search for.

Searches for the specified text string in the text part with the input focus. This can be the main text, a text frame or a header or footer. The search is done with the specified find options and starts at the specified position.

Specifies the text to search for. Specifies the text position where the search starts, beginning with 0. Specifies search options.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the text color.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for creating, deleting and modifying formatting styles.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for choosing a color for the background of a paragraph or a table cell.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for choosing a color for the frame of a paragraph or a table.

Returns an array of ClipboardFormat values. These values specify all the data formats which are currently available in the clipboard and which can be pasted into a TextControl document. If there is no data format available, this method returns null.

Gets an array of strings specifying the names of all currently supported fonts. These fonts depend on the formatting device set with the TextControl.FormattingPrinter property. The method returns null, if the TextControl has not been completely initialized.

Gets an array of PaperSize structures specifying the names and the size of all currently supported paper sizes. These paper sizes depend on the formatting device set with the TextControl.FormattingPrinter property. The method returns null, if the TextControl has not been completely initialized.

Returns a collection containing text fields of the specified types.

Specifies types of text fields.

Returns a collection of XML elements. It is an object of the type XmlElementCollection.

Specifies the XML element's name.

Returns an object of the type VersionInfo, which provides information about the installed TX Text Control version.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the language of the selected text.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting formatting attributes of bulleted and numbered lists.

Opens a file Open... dialogbox to select a file and loads the text from that file.

Opens a file Open... dialogbox to select a file and loads the text from that file. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Opens a file Open... dialogbox to select a file and loads the text from that file using the specified special settings. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Opens a dialog box to add, edit or delete Conditional Instructions inside the document.

Raises the AcceptsTabChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the AdaptFont event.

Specifies an AdaptFontEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeClicked event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeCreated event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeDeleted event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeDeselected event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeDoubleClicked event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeMoved event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeRightClicked event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeSelected event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeSized event.

Specifies a BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BorderStyleChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CannotTrackChange event.

Specifies a CannotTrackChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the Changed event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CharFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartClicked event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartCreated event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartDeleted event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartDeselected event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartDoubleClicked event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartMoved event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartRightClicked event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartSelected event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartSized event.

Specifies a ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentChanged event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentCreated event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentDeleted event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentedTextEntered event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentedTextLeft event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentStateChanged event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ContentsReset event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentLinkClicked event.

Specifies a DocumentLinkEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentLoaded event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentTargetCreated event.

Specifies an DocumentTargetEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentTargetDeleted event.

Specifies an DocumentTargetEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingActivated event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingClicked event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingCreated event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeactivated event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeleted event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeselected event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDoubleClicked event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingMoved event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingRightClicked event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingSelected event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingSized event.

Specifies a DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionCreated event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionDeleted event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionEntered event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionLeft event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Overridden. See Control.OnFontChanged.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteCreated event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteDeleted event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteReferenceMarkEntered event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteReferenceMarkLeft event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteSectionActivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteSectionDeactivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormattingStyleChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormattingStyleListChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldCheckChanged event.

Specifies a CheckFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldDateChanged event.

Specifies a DateFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldSelectionChanged event.

Specifies a SelectionFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldSettingsChanged event.

Specifies a FormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldTextChanged event.

Specifies a TextFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameClicked event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameDeselected event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameDoubleClicked event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameLayoutChanged event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameMoved event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameRightClicked event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameSelected event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameSized event.

Specifies a FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Overridden. See Control.OnHandleCreated.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HeaderFooterActivated event.

Specifies a HeaderFooterEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HeaderFooterDeactivated event.

Specifies a HeaderFooterEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HExpanded event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HScroll event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HShrunk event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HypertextLinkClicked event.

Specifies a HypertextLinkEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HyphenateWord event.

Specifies a HyphenateWordEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageClicked event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageCreated event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDeleted event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDeselected event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageMoved event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageRightClicked event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageSelected event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageSized event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputFormattingStyleChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputParagraphChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputPositionChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the MainTextActivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the MiniToolbarOpening event.

Specifies a MiniToolbarOpeningEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ObjectMiniToolbarInitialized event.

Specifies a MiniToolbarInitializedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the PageChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the PageFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ParagraphFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SectionChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldClicked event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldCreated event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldDeleted event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldDeselected event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldSelected event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SpellCheckText event.

Specifies a SpellCheckTextEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartClicked event.

Specifies a SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartCreated event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartDeleted event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartDoubleClicked event.

Specifies a SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartEntered event.

Specifies a SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartLeft event.

Specifies a SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableCreated event.

Specifies a TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableDeleted event.

Specifies a TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableFormatChanged event.

Specifies a TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsCreated event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsDeleted event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsEntered event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsLeft event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextContextMenuOpening event.

Specifies a TextContextMenuEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldChanged event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldClicked event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldCreated event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldDoubleClicked event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldDeleted event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldEntered event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldLeft event.

Specifies a TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameActivated event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameAppearanceChanged event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameClicked event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameCreated event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeactivated event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeleted event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeselected event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDoubleClicked event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameMoved event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameRightClicked event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameSelected event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameSized event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextMiniToolbarInitialized event.

Specifies a MiniToolbarInitializedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeChanged event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeCreated event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeDeleted event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeStateChanged event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the VExpanded event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the VScroll event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the VShrunk event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the XmlInvalid event.

Specifies an XmlErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the XmlNotWellFormed event.

Specifies an XmlErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the Zoomed event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the page color.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Replaces the current selection in the Text Control with the contents of the Clipboard. If the data in the clipboard are provided in several formats, the format with the maximum of information is used.

Replaces the current selection in the Text Control with the contents of the Clipboard. Only data provided in the specified format is inserted.

Specifies the format to paste.

Opens the standard print dialog to get printer settings and prints the document.

Specifies the document's name.

Prints the document using the printer settings of the specified PrintDocument.

Specifies an instance of the PrintDocument class.

Prints a single page. This method can be called from the PrintPage event handler.

Specifies a page number to print. Specifies the event arguments of the print document's PrintPage event.

Shows a print preview of the current document.

Specifies the document's name.

Shows a print preview of the current document using settings from the specified PrintDocument object.

Specifies an instance of the PrintDocument class.

Redoes the last Text Control operation.

Opens the built-in Replace dialog box.

Resets the AutoControlSize property to its default values. The default of the AutoControlSize property is a TextControl object that does not automatically expand or shrink its width or height.

Overridden. Resets the BackColor property to its default value. The default value is the system color for the window background.

Deletes the entire contents of a Text Control.

Overridden. Resets the Cursor property to its default value. The default value is the IBeam cursor.

Resets all display colors of a text control to their system dependent default values.

Resets the FieldCursor property to its default value. The default value is the Hand cursor.

Overridden. Resets the ForeColor property to its default value. The default value is the system color for the window text.

Resets the PageMargins property to its default value. The default page margins are 1 inch.

Resets the PageSize property to its default value. The default page size is US letter (8,5 x 11 inch).

Resets the TextBackColor property to its default value. The default value is the setting of the BackColor property.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one or more of the StreamType values.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file with special settings. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one or more of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file with special settings. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters and additional options.

Specifies one or more of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation. Specifies one or more of the SaveSettings.DialogSettings values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one or more of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file stream with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one or more of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one or more of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file stream using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one or more of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified byte array using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document as a string using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Selects text within the Text Control.

Specifies the selection's start position. Specifies the number of selected characters.

Selects all text in the Text Control.

Selects the word at the current text input position.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for correcting misspelled words.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for correcting misspelled words using the specified dictionary for making suggestions.

Specifies the dictionary used for making suggestions.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting tabs.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for inserting or changing a table of contents. If the current text input position is in an existing table of contents, the dialog box shows its attributes and the user can change it. Otherwise, a new table of contents is inserted with the specified attributes.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the background color of the text.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Undoes the last edit operation in the Text Control.

Zooms the contents of the TextControl using the specified zoom factor.

Specifies the zoom factor, in percent.

Zooms the contents of the TextControl using the specified option.

Specifies one of the ZoomOption values.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether pressing the TAB key types a TAB character in the control instead of moving the focus to the next control in the tab order.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control can be a source of a Drag&Drop operation.

Overridden. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control can accept data that the user drags onto it.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the undo buffer is active or not.

Gets a collection of all application fields contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets values that enable automatic expansion or shrinking of a Text Control's width or height depending on the currently contained text.

Overridden. Gets or sets the background color of the control.

Defines the kind of view to display the page background.

Gets a collection of all barcodes contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the Text Control.

Gets or sets the border type of the Text Control.

Specifies the button bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Informs whether a part of a Text Control document has been selected and can be copied to the clipboard.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with character formatting attributes.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with page and section formatting attributes.

Informs whether the document's text and/or formatting attributes can be changed.

Informs whether form fields can be edited.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with paragraph formatting attributes.

Informs whether the clipboard contains a format that can be pasted into a Text Control document.

Informs whether the document can be printed.

Informs whether an operation can be re-done using the Redo method.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with formatting styles.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with table formatting attributes.

Gets a value indicating whether the user can undo the previous operation in a Text Control.

Gets or sets the width of the caret in pixels.

Gets a collection of all charts contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether all the commented texts in the document are highlighted.

Gets a collection of all comments contained in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies if control characters are visible or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating the measuring unit used for sizes and distances in dialogboxes.

Gets or sets the colors of the text control.

Gets a collection of all document links contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a DocumentPermissions object which provides properties determining how a document can be edited and formatted when the EditMode property is set to EditMode.ReadAndSelect.

Gets a DocumentSettings object providing properties which inform about general document settings, such as author and title, contained in the document the user is currently working on.

Gets or sets a value indicating that markers for hypertext targets are shown or not.

Gets a collection of all targets contained in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies whether a marker frame is shown around a drawing to indicate its position and size.

Gets a collection of all drawings contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the formats of data the control can accept when the user drags it onto the control.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether all the editable regions in the document are highlighted.

Gets a collection of all editable regions contained in the document.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the document's text is protected, or can be freely edited and formatted.

Gets or sets the cursor that is displayed when the mouse pointer is over a marked text field.

Gets a FontSettings object which provides properties determining which fonts can be used in a document.

Gets or sets underlining style for the text displayed by the control.

Gets a collection of all footnotes contained in the main text of the document.

Overridden. Gets or sets the foreground color of the control which is the color of the document's text.

Gets or sets the name of a printer the text dimensions and capabilities of which are used to format the document.

Gets a collection of all form fields contained in the document.

Gets or sets a value determining how references to table cells in formulas are specified.

Gets a collection of all images, textframes, charts, barcodes and drawings contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all pages in the document.

Gets or sets a value specifying the activation style for headers and footers.

Gets or sets a value specifying the frame for activated headers and footers.

Gets a collection of all headers and footers the current document contains.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the selected text in the Text Control remains highlighted when the control loses focus.

Gets a collection of all hypertext links contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all images contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all inline styles the current document contains.

Gets an object of the type InputFormat which represents all formatting attributes at the current text input position.

Gets or sets the current text input position.

Specifies whether text is inserted or overwrites existing text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether Conditional Instructions are applied to form fields when the EditMode property is set to EditMode.ReadAndSelect and TextControl.DocumentPermissions.ReadOnly to true.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether formulas in tables are automatically calculated when the text of an input cell is changed.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether hyphenation is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether language detection is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether spell checking is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether track changes is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page orientation is landscape or portrait.

Gets a collection of all lines contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the type and the formatting attributes of a bulleted or numbered list.

Gets a collection of all misspelled words contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the margins for the pages of the current document.

Gets the number of pages contained in the current document.

Specifies the width and height of the pages for the current document.

Gets or sets the measure used for page sizes and page margins.

Gets or sets the paragraph formatting attributes of the text displayed by the control.

Gets a collection of all paragraphs contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all paragraph styles the current document contains.

Gets or sets a value indicating which control characters are shown permanently on the screen.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the Redo method is made.

Specifies the ribbon control to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the horizontal ruler bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether a Text Control has horizontal or vertical scroll bars.

Gets or sets the coordinates, in twips, of the upper-left corner of the document's visible part relative to the upper-left corner of the complete document.

Gets a collection of all sections in the document.

Gets or sets the current selection in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies whether text selections are displayed with a transparent bitmap or through inverting the text.

Gets or sets a value controlling the selection of objects which are inserted behind the text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether a mini toolbar is shown.

Gets a collection of all signature fields contained in the main text of the document.

Specifies the context menu which is used when the end-user right-clicks a misspelled word.

Specifies the spell checking component to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the status bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Gets a collection of all subtextparts contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all tables contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all tables of contents in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the background color for the text.

Gets a collection of all characters contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all standard text fields contained in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies whether text frames that have no border line are shown with marker lines.

Gets a collection of all text frames contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all main text parts the current document contains.

Gets a collection of all changes made in the active part of the document.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the Undo method is made.

Gets or sets a list of names specifying users who have access to editable regions.

Specifies the vertical ruler bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Gets or sets the mode how Text Control displays a document.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether Text Control operates in an edit mode that validates the XML document according to the document's DTD.

Gets or sets the zoom factor, in percent, for a Text Control.

Occurs when the value of the AcceptsTab property has changed.

Occurs for each font that must be adapted, because it is not supported.

Occurs when a barcode has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new barcode has been created.

Occurs when a barcode has been deleted.

Occurs when a barcode has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when a barcode has been moved.

Occurs when a barcode has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a barcode has been selected.

Occurs when a barcode has been deselected.

Occurs when a barcode has been sized.

Occurs when the value of the BorderStyle property has changed.

Determines how to handle a change of the document that cannot be added to the list of tracked changes.

Indicates that the contents of a document have been changed.

Occurs when the character formatting attributes either of the selected characters or the current text input position have been changed.

Occurs when a chart has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new chart has been created.

Occurs when a chart has been deleted.

Occurs when a chart has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when a chart has been moved.

Occurs when a chart has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a chart has been selected.

Occurs when a chart has been deselected.

Occurs when a chart has been sized.

Occurs when the text of a comment has been altered.

Occurs when a piece of text has been commented.

Occurs when a comment has been removed from the document.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a commented piece of text.

Occurs when the current input position has left a commented piece of text.

Occurs when the state of a comment alters from active to inactive or vice versa.

Occurs when all text contents have been deleted and all attributes have been reset to the state after initialization.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on that represents a link to a target in the document.

Occurs when a new document has been loaded.

Occurs when a document target has been created.

Occurs when a document target has been deleted.

Occurs when a drawing has been activated.

Occurs when a drawing has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new drawing has been created.

Occurs when a drawing has been deleted.

Occurs when a drawing has been deactivated.

Occurs when a drawing has been deselected.

Occurs when a drawing has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when a drawing has been moved.

Occurs when a drawing has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a drawing has been selected.

Occurs when a drawing has been sized.

Occurs when an editable region has been created.

Occurs when an editable region has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to an editable region.

Occurs when the current input position has left an editable region.

Occurs when a footnote has been created.

Occurs when a footnote has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to the position of a footnote reference mark.

Occurs when the current input position has left the position of a footnote reference mark.

Occurs when the footnote section of a document's page gets the current text input position from another part of the document.

Occurs when the footnote section of a document's page has lost the current text input position.

Occurs after formatting attributes of one or more formatting styles have been changed.

Occurs after one or more formatting styles have been added or removed or if the name of an existing style has been changed.

Occurs when the checkmark of a CheckFormField has been changed from checked to unchecked or vice versa.

Occurs when the date of a DateFormField has been changed.

Occurs when the selected item of a SelectionFormField has been changed.

Occurs when the name, the id and/or formatting attributes of a CheckFormField, TextFormField, SelectionFormField or DateFormField have been changed.

Occurs when the text of a TextFormField has been changed.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been clicked on.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been deselected.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when the layout of a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been changed.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been moved.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been selected.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been sized.

Occurs when a header or footer gets the current text input position from another part of the document such as a textframe or the main text.

Occurs when a header or footer loses the current text input position and another part of the document such as a textframe or the main text gets it.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically expanded its size horizontally.

Occurs when the horizontal scroll position has been changed.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically shrunk its size horizontally.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on that represents the source of a hypertext link.

Occurs, if a word does not fit in the line and must be hyphenated.

Occurs when an image has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new image has been created.

Occurs when an image has been deleted.

Occurs when an image has been deselected.

Occurs when an image has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when an inserted image has been moved.

Occurs when an image has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when an image has been selected.

Occurs when an inserted image has been sized.

Occurs after the text input position has been moved to a text part formatted with another style.

Occurs when the text input position has been moved to another paragraph.

Occurs when the text input position has been changed.

Occurs when the main text of the document gets the current text input position from another part of the document, such as a header, a footer or a textframe.

Occurs to handle displaying context sensitive mini toolbars.

Occurs immediately after the built-in ObjectMiniToolbar was initialized.

Occurs when the text input position has been moved to another page.

Occurs when the page format settings have been changed.

Occurs when the formatting attributes of the selected paragraphs have been changed.

Occurs when the text input position has been moved to another section.

Occurs when a signature field has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new signature field has been created.

Occurs when a signature field has been deleted.

Occurs when a signature field has been deselected.

Occurs when a signature field has been selected.

Occurs, if the document's text has been altered and the spelling of the new text must be checked.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been clicked on.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been created.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been deleted.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been double-clicked on.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a subtextpart.

Occurs when the current input position has left a subtextpart.

Occurs after a new table has been created as a result of a text insertion via the clipboard or when loading a document which contains a table without an identifier.

Occurs after a table has been deleted.

Occurs when the design attributes of a selected table have been changed.

Occurs when a table of contents has been created.

Occurs when a table of contents has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a table of contents.

Occurs when the current input position has left a table of contents.

Occurs immediately before a built-in context menu will be opened.

Occurs when the text of a text field has been changed.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on.

Occurs when a text field has been created.

Occurs when a text field has been double-clicked on.

Occurs when a text field has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a text field.

Occurs when the current input position has left a text field.

Occurs when a text frame gets the current text input position from another part of the document such as a header, a footer or the main text.

Occurs when the appearance of a text frame (background color, transparency, border, inner margins) has been changed.

Occurs when a text frame has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new text frame has been created.

Occurs when a text frame loses the current text input position and another part of the document such as a header, a footer or the main text gets it.

Occurs when a text frame has been deleted.

Occurs when a text frame has been deselected.

Occurs when a text frame has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when a text frame has been moved.

Occurs when a text frame has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a text frame has been selected.

Occurs when a text frame has been sized.

Occurs immediately after the built-in TextMiniToolbar was initialized.

Occurs when the text of a tracked change has been altered.

Occurs when a tracked change has been created.

Occurs when a tracked change has been deleted.

Occurs when the state of a tracked change alters from active to inactive or vice versa.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically expanded its size vertically.

Occurs when the vertical scroll position has been changed.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically shrunk its size vertically.

Occurs when the Text Control has been zoomed.

Occurs when a loaded or changed XML document cannot be validated with the document type definition (DTD) referenced in the document.

Occurs when a loaded XML document is not well-formed.

The TextControl.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a Windows Forms TextControl control.

Initializes a new instance of the TextControl.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the TextControl.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their default values.

Resets the text control's ActiveFormFieldColor to its default value.

Resets the text control's DarkShadowColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's DesktopColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's FormFieldColor to its default value.

Resets the text control's HeaderFooterLabelColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's HeaderFooterLineColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's LightShadowColor to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a form field containing the current text input position.

Gets or sets the display color for the shadow at the right and the bottom edge of the pages.

Gets or sets the display color for the area around the pages.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a form field.

Gets or sets the display color for the label showing which header or footer is activated.

Gets or sets the display color for the dividing line between headers and footers and the main text.

Gets or sets the display color for the shadow at the left and the top edge of the pages.

The TextEditorException class informs about errors which can occur during editing text.

Initializes a new instance of the TextEditorException class.

Initializes a new instance of the TextEditorException class with a specified error message.

The error message that explains the reason for the exception.

Initializes a new instance of the TextEditorException class with a specified error message and a reference to the inner exception that is the cause of this exception.

The error message that explains the reason for the exception. The exception that is the cause of the current exception.

An instance of the TextField class represents a text field in a Text Control document.

Creates an empty TextField object.

Creates a TextField object with the specified visible text.

Specifies the visible text of the text field.

Sets the current input position to the beginning of a text field and scrolls it into the visible part of the document.

Gets the bounding rectangle of a text field.

Returns true, if the Textfield contains the current text input position.

Specifies whether a text field can be deleted by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Specifies whether a TextControl.TextFieldDoubleClicked event is raised, if the end-user doubleclicks the text field.

Specifies whether a text field has a doubled input position in front of its first character and behind its last character.

Specifies whether the text of a text field can be changed by the end-user while a TX Text Control document is being edited.

Gets the formatting rectangle of a text field.

Gets or sets the highlight color for the text field.

Gets or sets a value indicating when the text field is highlighted.

Gets or sets an identifier for a text field.

Specifies whether a text field's text is checked on misspelled words.

Gets the number of characters in a text field.

Relates a user-defined name to a text field.

Obsolete. Specifies whether a text field toggles its background to gray, if the current input position is in the field.

Gets the first character position (one-based) of a text field.

Returns or sets the text which is contained within a text field.

An instance of the TextFieldCollection class contains all standard text fields in a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of the type TextField.

Inserts a new standard text field at the current input position.

Specifies the text field to add.

Removes all text fields from a Text Control document.

If this parameter is set to true, all text fields are removed without deleting their texts.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the text field at the current text input position or null, if there is no text field at the current text input position.

Gets the text field with the specified id, previously set with the ID property.

Specifies the text field's identifier set with the ID property.

Removes the specified text field from the Text Control document.

Specifies the text field to remove.

Removes the specified text field from the Text Control document. The field's visible text remains in the document, when the keepText parameter is set to true.

Specifies the text field to remove. If this parameter is set to true, the field is removed without deleting its text.

Gets the field with the specified number from the collection.

The TextFieldCollectionBase class is the base class of the TextFieldCollection, HypertextLinkCollection, DocumentLinkCollection, PageNumberFieldCollection, ApplicationFieldCollection and FormFieldCollection classes.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets a value indicating whether a new text field can be inserted at the current input position.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The TextFieldEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.TextFieldClicked, TextControl.TextFieldCreated, TextControl.TextFieldDoubleClicked, TextControl.TextFieldDeleted, TextControl.TextFieldChanged, TextControl.TextFieldEntered and TextControl.TextFieldLeft events.

Gets an object that represents the text field which causes the event.

An object of the TextFormField class represents a text input field on a form.

Initializes a new instance of the TextFormField class.

Specifies the horizontal extension, in twips, of the form field, when it is empty.

Gets or sets the horizontal extension, in twips, of the form field, when it is empty.

The TextFormFieldEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.FormFieldTextChanged event.

Gets an object representing the TextFormField that causes the event.

An instance of the TextFrame class represents a text frame in a Text Control document.

Initializes a new instance of the TextFrame class.

Specifies the text frame's size in twips.

Activates the text frame. The text frame receives the input focus. A text frame can only be activated, if the text part that contains the text frame has the input focus.

Finds a text string in a text frame.

Specifies the text to search for. Specifies the text position where the search starts, beginning with 0. Specifies search options.

Returns a collection containing text fields of the specified types.

Specifies types of text fields.

Gets a collection of all Microsoft Word or Heiler HighEdit fields that have been created or imported from a Microsoft Word or RTF document.

Gets or sets the background color of a text frame.

Gets a collection of all barcodes contained in a text frame.

Gets or sets the color of a text frame's border line.

Gets or sets the style of a text frame's border line.

Gets or sets the width, in twips, of a text frame's border line.

Gets a collection of all charts contained in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all comments in the text frame.

Gets a collection of all links in a text frame which point to targets in the same document.

Gets a collection of all targets in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all drawings contained in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all editable regions in the text frame.

Gets a collection of all form fields contained in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all images, textframes, charts, barcodes and drawings in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all hypertext links in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all images contained in a text frame.

(Only for compatibility) Gets or sets a value determining whether a text frame is treated as a single character or the document's text either flows around or overwrites the text frame.

Gets or sets the distances, in twips, between the text frame's border line and the text.

Gets a collection of all text lines contained in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all misspelled words the text frame contains.

Gets a collection of all paragraphs contained in a text frame.

Gets or sets the current selection in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all subtextparts in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all tables in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all tables of contents in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all characters contained in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all standard text fields in a text frame.

Gets a collection of all changes made in a text frame.

Gets or sets the text frame's transparency.

An instance of the TextFrameCollection class contains all text frames in a Text Control document or part of the document represented through objects of the type TextFrame.

Inserts a text frame inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character. The frame is inserted at the specified text position.

Specifies the text frame to add. Specifies the text position at which the text frame is to be inserted.

Inserts a text frame which is anchored to the paragraph containing the specified text position. The frame has the specified horizontal alignment. TextFrameInsertionMode.FixedOnPage and TextFrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the text frame to add. Specifies the text frame's horizontal alignment. Specifies the text position at which the text frame is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a text frame which is anchored to the paragraph containing the specified text position. The frame has the specified position relative to the paragraph containing its anchor position. TextFrameInsertionMode.FixedOnPage and TextFrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the text frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the text frame is to be inserted. Specifies the text position at which the text frame is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a text frame that has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page. TextFrameInsertionMode.MoveWithText and TextFrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the text frame to add. Specifies the number of a page beginning with 1 where the text frame is located. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the text frame is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a text frame that has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This location is specified through a document position relative to the top left corner of the complete document. TextFrameInsertionMode.MoveWithText and TextFrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the text frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the text frame is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a text frame with the built-in mouse interface. The text frame's size is determined through the end-user. A cross cursor indicates where the text frame can be inserted. Changing the document or pressing the ESC key aborts the insertion process.

Specifies the text frame to add. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Deactivates the activated text frame and sets the input focus back to the text part that contains the text frame.

Returns the currently activated text frame. An activated text frame has the input focus and can be edited. The method returns null, if no text frame is activated.

Gets the text frame selected by the user or null if no text frame is selected.

Gets the text frame with the specified identifier.

Specifies the text frame's identifier set with the ID property.

Gets the text frame with the specified name.

Specifies the text frame's name set with the Name property.

Removes a text frame from a Text Control document.

Specifies the text frame to remove.

The TextFrameEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with text frames.

Gets an object that represents the text frame which causes the event.

The TextMiniToolbar class is a mini toolbar that appears when ShowMiniToolbar property is set to MiniToolbarButton.LeftButton, MiniToolbarButton.RightButton or MiniToolbarButton.LeftButton | MiniToolbarButton.RightButton, the left or right mouse button is released and the current context is selected text (ContextMenuLocation.TextSelection), text at the input position (ContextMenuLocation.TextInputPosition) or an input position inside a table (ContextMenuLocation.Table).

Each RibbonItem represents an item in a TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Font group of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the FontFamily combobox of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the FontSize combobox of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the IncreaseFont button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the DecreaseFont button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the BulletedList button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the NumberedList button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the StructuredList button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Bold button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Italic button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Underline button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TextBackColor button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TextColor button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the LeftAligned button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Centered button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the RightAligned button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Justified button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the ClearFormatting button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Styles group of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the StyleName gallery of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableLayout group of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableSelect button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableMergeCells button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableDelete button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableInsert button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableSplitCells button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Finds a control that has the provided TextMiniToolbar.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

An instance of the TextPartCollection class contains all text parts in a TX Text Control document.

Sets the input focus to the specified text part. If the activated text part is not in the visible part of the document, the document is scrolled.

Specifies the object to activate.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the text part with the input focus.

Gets the text part with the input focus informing about the offset of the text part in the TextControl's client area.

Retrieves the text part's offset, in pixels, in the TextControl's client area.

Gets the text part at the specified geometric location.

Specifies a location where to search for a text part. Retrieves the text part's offset, in pixels, in the TextControl's client area.

Gets the main text part of the document.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

The ThesaurusDialog class implements a Windows Forms dialog box that shows synonyms for selected text or a word at the current input position which will be selected on opening the dialog.Each item of the dialog box has a name, available through its Name property, which corresponds with a member of the ThesaurusDialog.DialogItem enumeration.To use this dialog the TextControl must be connected with an object of type TXSpellChecker (version 7.0 or higher).

Creates a ThesaurusDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a ThesaurusDialog dialog box.

Identifies the Find Synonyms label.

Identifies the Language label.

Identifies the Back button.

Identifies the Find Synonyms text box.

Identifies the Language combo box.

Identifies the Synonyms label.

Identifies the Synonyms tree view.

Identifies the Replace button.

Identifies the Cancel button.

Finds a control that has the provided identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by an enum of type ThesaurusDialog.DialogItem.

A TrackedChange object represents a change made to the document after anyone has revised the document.

Saves the changed text in a byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the changed text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the changed text as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the changed text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the changed text in a byte array with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the changed text is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the changed text as a string with the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the changed text is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Scrolls the beginning of the tracked change into the visible part of the document using a default position depending on the previous position.

Scrolls the beginning of the tracked change into the visible part of the document using the specified position.

Specifies an InputPosition.ScrollPosition value.

Selects the changed part of the document.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the TrackedChange is currently active or not.

Gets the kind of change.

Gets the date and time when the change has been made.

Gets the default highlight color of a tracked change.

Gets or sets the highlight color for the tracked change.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the tracked change is highlighted.

Gets the number of changed characters.

Gets the change's number.

Gets the index (one-based) of the first changed character.

Gets the changed text.

Gets the name of the user who has changed the document.

Contains all tracked changes in the main text or another part of a document.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the change at the current text input position. If there is more than one change at the current input position the innermost change is returned.

Gets the next or the previous change in the textflow. The search begins at the current text input position.

If this parameter is true, the next change in the textflow is returned.

Removes a tracked change from the collection. Depending on the accept parameter the change is either accepted or rejected. When a change is rejected, inserted text is removed and deleted text is reinserted.

Specifies the tracked change to remove. When this parameter is true, the change is accepted, otherwise, it is rejected.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Returns true if the collection is designed to be thread safe, otherwise, it returns false.

Gets the change with the specified number from the collection.

Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection.

The TrackedChangeEventArgs class provides data for the TrackedChangeChanged, TrackedChangeCreated, TrackedChangeStateChanged, and TrackedChangeDeleted events.

Gets an object that represents the tracked change which causes the event.

The TrackedChangesDialog class implements a dialog box that shows all tracked changes of the document.

Creates a TrackedChangesDialog object for the specified Windows Forms TextControl.

Specifies the TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a TrackedChangesDialog dialog box.

Identifies the tracked changes count label.

Identifies the refresh tracked changes button.

Identifies the tracked changes viewer.

Identifies the accept tracked change button.

Identifies the accept all tracked changes button.

Identifies the reject tracked change button.

Identifies the reject all tracked changes button.

Identifies the close button.

Finds a control that has the provided identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by an enum of type TrackedChangesDialog.DialogItem.

An instance of the UserDefinedPropertyDictionary class contains all user-defined document properties contained in a loaded document or which will be saved in a document.

Initializes a new instance of the UserDefinedPropertyDictionary class.

Adds a new property to the dictionary.

Specifies the document property's name. Specifies the document property's value.

Determines whether the dictionary contains a property with the specified name.

Specifies a document property's name.

Removes a document property from the dictionary.

Specifies the name of the document property to remove.

Gets a document property from the dictionary.

Gets a collection of all property names the dictionary contains.

Gets a collection of all property values the dictionary contains.

The VersionInfo class provides information about the running TX Text Control version, such as the version number, the installed service pack number and the product level.

Gets the major version number.

Gets the minor version number.

Gets the number of the installed service pack.

Gets the installed product level.

The WPF.MiniToolbar class is the base class of the built-in mini-toolbars of a WPF.TextControl.

The WPF.MiniToolbarOpeningEventArgs class provides data for the WPF.TextControl.MiniToolbarOpening event of a WPF.TextControl.

Gets the context in the document for which the mini-toolbar will be opened.

Gets the horizontal distance between the top-left corner of the screen and the location where the mini-toolbar is displayed.

Gets or sets the mini toolbar, which will be shown.

Gets the vertical distance between the top-left corner of the screen and the location where the mini-toolbar is displayed.

An instance of this class represents an element in a XML document.

Creates an XmlElement object with the specified name.

Specifies the element's name.

Creates an XmlElement object with the specified name and text.

Specifies the element's name. Specifies the element's text.

Adds the specified XML element as a sub-element of this element. The new element is placed at the position specified through the document's DTD.

Specifies the XML element to add.

Adds the specified XML element as a sub-element of this element. The new element is placed at the position specified through the document's DTD. If this element can have more than one child of the specified type, the before or after parameters can be used to specify a position.

Specifies the XML element to add. Specifies a relative position in the list of child elements of the specified type beginning with 1. Specifies a relative position in the list of child elements of the specified type beginning with 1.

Returns the first XML child element with the specified name.

Specifies the name of the sub-element.

Returns the XML child element with the specified name and index.

Specifies the name of the sub-element. Specifies the number of the sub-element beginning with 1.

Removes the first XML child element with the specified name.

Specifies the name of the sub-element to remove.

Removes the XML child element with the specified name and index.

Specifies the name of the sub-element to remove. Specifies the number of the sub-element beginning with 1.

Selects the text of the XML element. The text can only be selected, if the element belongs to the document.

Determines whether the text of a newly added XML element is automatically selected.

Determines whether text is automatically created for a newly added XML element that has no text contents.

Gets the name of an XML element.

Specifies the text of the XML element.

An instance of this class contains all elements of an XML document that have the same element name.

Adds the specified XML element to the collection.

Specified an instance of the XmlElement object. Specifies a relative position in the collection. Specifies a relative position in the collection.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Returns the item with the current input position.

Returns the item with the specified index.

The one based index of the XmlElement.

Removes an XML element from an XML document.

Specifies the one-based index of the XML element in the collection.

Gets the number of XML elements in the collection.

The XmlErrorEventArgs class provides data for the TextControl.XmlNotWellFormed and TextControl.XmlInvalid events.

Gets the absolute file position in the XML document where the error occurred.

Gets the line number in the XML document that contains the error.

Gets the character position within the line where the error occurred.

Gets the reason for the error.

Gets the URL of the XML document containing the error.

Determines the alignment of the barcode image inside the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the bottom center of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the bottom left of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the bottom right of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the middle center of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the middle left of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the middle right of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the top center of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the top left of the control.

Sets the alignment of the image to the top right of the control.

Determines the type of barcode that is created by TX Barcode.

Code128 is an alphanumeric barcode with high information density.

2 of 5 is a barcode that encrypts digits only.

3 of 9 is a barcode that encrypts alphanumeric values.

AztecCode is a two-dimensional barcode that encrypts up to 1300 ASCII values.

Intelligent Mail barcode is a barcode type that encrypts postal zip codes and it the successor of Postnet.

EAN 13 is a barcode that encrypts 13 digits and is used for marking retail goods.

EAN 8 is derived from barcode type EAN13 and encrypts 8 digits.

UPC-A barcode encrypts 12 digits and is very similar to EAN 13.

Postnet is a barcode type that encrypts postal zip codes.

QR Code is a two-dimensional barcode that encrypts up to 1270 ASCII values or 1850 alphanumeric values. By design TX Barcode switches encryption mode when necessary.

Datamatrix is a two-dimensional barcode that encrypts up to 1301 ASCII values.

PDF 417 is a two-dimensional barcode that encrypts up to 1500 ASCII values.

MicroPDF is a two-dimensional barcode that encrypts up to 250 ASCII values.

Codabar is a barcode that encrypts digits and the characters '-', '$', ':', '/', '.' and '+'.

4State is a barcode that encrypts 8 digits.

Code 11 is a barcode that encrypts up to 50 digits.

Code 93 is a barcode that encrypts alphanumeric values and the characters '.', '$', '/', '+', and '%'.

PLANET is a barcode that encrypts digits.

Royal Mail is a barcode that encrypts alphanumeric characters and characters ')' and '(' .

Maxicode is a two-dimensional barcode that encrypts strings with the following regular expression: "[0-9]{3}~[0-9]{3}~[0-9A-Z ]{6}|[0-9 ]{9}~[0-9A-Z*-.!""#$+%&'\\(), -:;<=>?[]{}@^_|~\a\b\t\n\f\r]*" or "[)>~[0-9]{2}~[0-9]{2}[0-9 ]{9}|[0-9A-Z ]{6}~[0-9]{3}~[0-9]{3}~[0-9A-Z*-.!""#$+%&'\\(), -:;<=>?[]{}@^_|~\a\b\t\n\f\r]*"

Specifies the format of the image in WPF.

Specifies the bitmap (BMP) image format.

Specifies the Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) image format.

Specifies the W3C Portable Network Graphics (PNG) image format.

Specifies the Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) image format.

Specifies the Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) image format.

Specifies the Microsoft Windows Media Photo (WMP) image format.

Determines the formatting type for the barcode serialization.

Barcode data is serialized using well-formed XML.

Barcode data is serialized in a binary format.

Determines the alignment of the barcode text and additional text that is displayed inside the control.

The text is displayed below the barcode image.

The text is displayed above the barcode image.

The BarcodeTypeSettings class provides properties to apply barcode type specific settings.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the current used barcode type includes a check value.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the check value of the current used barcode type is shown with the encrypted barcode text value.

The TXBarcodeControl class provides properties to specify type and format of barcodes rendered in Windows Forms.

Initializes a new instance of the TXBarcodeControl class.

Returns the default text for the specified barcode type.

Specifies the barcode type whose default text is returned.

Returns the maximum text length of the specified barcode type.

Specifies the barcode type whose maximum text length is returned.

Returns the minimum text length of the specified barcode type.

Specifies the barcode type whose minimum text length is returned.

Returns a value indicating whether the specified text is valid for a specific barcode type. In case of an invalid text, an exception message is saved into the specified string.

Specifies the barcode type whose text is checked. Specifies the text to check. Specifies the string, an appropriate exception message is saved to, if the checked text is not valid for a specific barcode type.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified file. The data format must be XML.

Specifies a file the data is loaded from.

Loads barcode data into the control with the specified format. The new barcode is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file the data is loaded from. Specifies the format used to deserialize the barcode.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified object of type System.IO.Stream. The data format must be XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is loaded from.

Loads barcode data into the control with the specified format. The new barcode is read from the specified object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is loaded from. Specifies the format used to deserialize the barcode.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified object of type System.IO.TextReader. The data format must be XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.TextReader the data is loaded from.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified object of type System.Xml.XmlReader. The data format must be XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.XmlReader the data is loaded from.

Draws the barcode on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object.

Specifies the object of type System.Drawing.Graphics the barcode is printed to. Specifies the position to draw on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object.

Saves the barcode data to the given file. The data format of the file is XML.

Specifies a file the is saved to.

Saves the barcode data to the specified file using the specified format.

Specifies a file the is saved to. Specifies the format used to serialize the barcode.

Saves the barcode data to the given object of type System.IO.Stream. The data format of the stream is XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is saved to.

Saves the barcode data to the specified object of type System.IO.Stream using the specified format.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is saved to. Specifies the format used to serialize the barcode.

Saves the barcode data to the given object of type System.IO.TextWriter. The data format of the stream is XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.TextWriter the data is saved to.

Saves the barcode data to the given object of type System.IO.XmlWriter. The data format of the stream is XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.XmlWriter the data is saved to.

Saves the barcode image to the specified object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the image is saved to. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Saves the barcode image to the specified file using the specified format.

Specifies a file the image is saved to. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Gets or sets an additional text that is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Gets or sets the alignment of the barcode image inside the control.

Gets or sets the angle of the barcode image inside the control.

Gets or sets the background color for the barcode control.

Gets or sets the type of barcode that is rendered.

Gets an object of type BarcodeTypeSettings to determine type specific settings for the current used barcode.

Gets or sets the foreground color for the barcode.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the encrypted barcode text value is displayed below or above the barcode image or not.

Gets or sets the text the barcode should encrypt.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the barcode text and additional text is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Gets or sets the maximum number of characters the Text property can get.

An instance of the BarcodeCollection class contains all barcodes in a document represented through objects of the type DataVisualization.BarcodeFrame.

Inserts a barcode inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character.

Specifies the barcode and its frame to add. Specifies the text position at which the barcode is to be inserted.

Inserts a barcode, which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment relative to the paragraph into which it is inserted and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. An anchored barcode is moved with the text.

Specifies the barcode and its frame to add. Specifies the barcode's horizontal alignment. Specifies the text position at which the barcode is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a barcode, which is anchored to the specified text position. The specified location is relative to the paragraph into which it is inserted and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. An anchored barcode is moved with the text.

Specifies the barcode and its frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the barcode is to be inserted. Specifies the text position at which the barcode is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a barcode, which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter.

Specifies the barcode and its frame to add. Specifies the number of a page beginning with 1 where the barcode is located. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the barcode is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a barcode, which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified relative to the complete document and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter.

Specifies the barcode and its frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the barcode is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a barcode with the built-in mouse interface. The barcode's size is determined through the end-user. A cross cursor indicates where the barcode can be inserted. Changing the document or pressing the ESC key aborts the insertion process.

Specifies the barcode and its frame to add. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to which to copy. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the barcode selected by the user.

Gets the barcode with the specified identifier. An id can be set with the ID property.

Specifies the barcode's identifier.

Gets the barcode with the specified name. A name can be set with the Name property.

Specifies the barcode's name.

Removes a barcode from a Text Control document.

Specifies the barcode to remove.

The BarcodeEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with barcodes.

Gets an object that represents the barcode which causes the event.

An instance of the BarcodeFrame class represents a barcode and its layout in a Text Control document.

Initializes a new instance of the BarcodeFrame class.

Specifies the barcode control associated with the barcode frame.

Adds the current state of the barcode which is connected with this BarcodeFrame to the undo stack. Programmatic changes performed with the barcode's properties and methods are not automatically added to a TextControl's undo stack. Calling this method is not necessary, when the barcode frame's layout in the text is changed.

Refreshes the barcode. Programmatic changes performed with the barcode's properties and methods are not automatically refreshed. Calling this method is not necessary, when the barcode frame's layout in the text is changed.

Gets the barcode control associated with the barcode frame.

Sets a value between 1 and 100, which is the quality of a lossy data compression used, if the barcode's image is exported.

Gets or sets the file name, when the barcode's image is exported.

Gets or sets the format used, if a barcode's image is exported.

Gets or sets the maximum resolution in dots per inch in which the barcode's image is saved.

Determines whether the barcode's image is stored through its binary data or through a file reference.

An instance of the ChartCollection class contains all charts in a document represented through objects of the type DataVisualization.ChartFrame.

Inserts a chart inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character.

Specifies the chart and its frame to add. Specifies the text position at which the chart is to be inserted.

Inserts a chart which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment relative to the paragraph into which it is inserted and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. An anchored chart is moved with the text.

Specifies the chart and its frame to add. Specifies the chart's horizontal alignment. Specifies the text position at which the chart is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a chart which is anchored to the specified text position. The specified location is relative to the paragraph into which it is inserted and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. An anchored chart is moved with the text.

Specifies the chart and its frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the chart is to be inserted. Specifies the text position at which the chart is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a chart which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter.

Specifies the chart and its frame to add. Specifies the number of a page beginning with 1 where the chart is located. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the chart is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a chart which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified relative to the complete document and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter.

Specifies the chart and its frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the chart is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to which to copy. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Gets the chart selected by the user.

Gets the chart with the specified identifier. An id can be set with the ID property.

Specifies the chart's identifier.

Gets the chart with the specified name. A name can be set with the Name property.

Specifies the chart's name.

Removes a chart from a Text Control document.

Specifies the chart to remove.

The ChartEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with charts.

Gets an object that represents the chart which causes the event.

An instance of the ChartFrame class represents a chart and its layout in a Text Control document.

Initializes a new instance of the ChartFrame class.

Specifies the chart control associated with the chart frame.

Add the current state of the chart which is connected with this ChartFrame to the undo stack. Programmatic changes performed with the chart's properties and methods are not automatically added to a TextControl's undo stack. Calling this method is not necessary, when the chart frame's layout in the text is changed.

Refreshes the chart. Programmatic changes performed with the chart's properties and methods are not automatically refreshed. Calling this method is not necessary, when the chart frame's layout in the text is changed.

Gets the chart control associated with the chart frame.

Sets a value between 1 and 100, which is the quality of a lossy data compression used, if the chart's image is exported.

Gets or sets the file name, when the chart's image is exported.

Gets or sets the format used, if a chart's image is exported.

Gets or sets the maximum resolution in dots per inch in which the chart's image is saved.

Determines whether the chart's image is stored through its binary data or through a file reference.

An instance of the DrawingCollection class contains all drawings in a document represented through objects of the type DataVisualization.DrawingFrame.

Inserts a drawing inline, which means that it is treated in the text like a single character.

Specifies the drawing and its frame to add. Specifies the text position at which the drawing is to be inserted.

Inserts a drawing, which is anchored to the specified text position. It has the specified horizontal alignment relative to the paragraph into which it is inserted and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. An anchored drawing is moved with the text. FrameInsertionMode.FixedOnPage and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the drawing and its frame to add. Specifies the drawing's horizontal alignment. Specifies the text position at which the drawing is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a drawing, which is anchored to the specified text position. The specified location is relative to the paragraph into which it is inserted and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. An anchored drawing is moved with the text. FrameInsertionMode.FixedOnPage and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the drawing and its frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the drawing is to be inserted. Specifies the text position at which the drawing is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a drawing, which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified through a page number and a location on this page and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. FrameInsertionMode.MoveWithText and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the drawing and its frame to add. Specifies the number of a page beginning with 1 where the drawing is located. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the drawing is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a drawing, which has a fixed geometrical position in the document. This position is specified relative to the complete document and the textflow is given through the insertionMode parameter. FrameInsertionMode.MoveWithText and FrameInsertionMode.AsCharacter cannot be specified with this overload.

Specifies the drawing and its frame to add. Specifies the location, in twips, at which the drawing is to be inserted. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Inserts a drawing with the built-in mouse interface. The drawing's size is determined through the end-user. A cross cursor indicates where the drawing can be inserted. Changing the document or pressing the ESC key aborts the insertion process.

Specifies the drawing and its frame to add. Specifies how the text flow is handled.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to which to copy. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Deactivates the activated drawing and sets the input focus back to the text part that contains the drawing.

Returns the currently activated drawing. An activated drawing has the input focus and can be edited. The method returns null, if no drawing is activated.

Gets the drawing selected by the user.

Gets the drawing with the specified identifier. An id can be set with the ID property.

Specifies the drawing's identifier.

Gets the drawing with the specified name. A name can be set with the Name property.

Specifies the drawing's name.

Removes a drawing from a Text Control document.

Specifies the drawing to remove.

The DrawingEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with drawings.

Gets an object that represents the drawing which causes the event.

An instance of the DrawingFrame class represents a drawing and its layout in a Text Control document.

Initializes a new instance of the DrawingFrame class.

Specifies the drawing control associated with the drawing frame.

Activates the drawing so that its contents can be edited. A drawing can only be activated, if the text part that contains the drawing has the input focus.

Add the current state of the drawing which is connected with this DrawingFrame to the undo stack. Programmatic changes performed with the drawing's properties and methods are not automatically added to a TextControl's undo stack. Calling this method is not necessary, when the drawing frame's layout in the text is changed.

Refreshes the complete drawing. Programmatic changes performed with the drawing's properties and methods are not automatically refreshed. Calling this method is not necessary, when the drawing frame's layout in the text is changed.

Refreshes the specified part of drawing. Programmatic changes performed with the drawing's properties and methods are not automatically refreshed. Calling this method is not necessary, when the drawing frame's layout in the text is changed.

Specifies the rectangular part of the drawing to refresh, in pixels, relative to the top-left corner of the drawing.

Gets the drawing control associated with the drawing frame.

Sets a value between 1 and 100, which is the quality of a lossy data compression used, if the drawing's bitmap image is exported.

Gets or sets the file name, when the drawing's bitmap image is exported.

Gets or sets the format used, if a drawing's bitmap image is exported.

Gets or sets the maximum resolution in dots per inch in which the drawing's bitmap image is saved.

Determines whether the drawing's bitmap image is stored through its binary data or through a file reference.

Determines a certain text format.

Specifies Microsoft Word format.

Specifies RTF format (Rich Text Format).

Specifies Microsoft Office Open XML format.

Specifies the internal TX Text Control format. Text is stored in Unicode format.

Implements the PDF from field type enumeration.

Specifies an AcroForms button.

Specifies an AcroForms text field.

Specifies an AcroForms signature field.

Specifies an AcroForms choice field.

The DocumentController class is a .NET component that can be used to perform the necessary document handling on the server, when using a control such as the DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer.

Initializes a new instance of the DocumentController class.

Frees all resources used by the DocumentController instance.

Sets the value of the form field specified through the given adapter to the submitted value.

The adapter for the form field whose value is to be set. Specifies the value the form field is to be set to.

Gets a list of the names of all the application fields which are contained inside the specified merge block.

Specifies the name of the merge block whose field names are to be returned.

Gets a list of the names of all the merge blocks contained in the document.

Gets all adapters for all application fields.

Gets a collection of adapters for all application fields in the specified scope. Returns a collection of adapters for the fields located on the given page.

Specifies the page for whose fields a collection of adapters is to be returned.

Get field names.

Loads a document from a file that is used for further processing.

Specifies the document file to be loaded. Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Loads a document from memory that is used for further processing.

Specifies a document memory variable from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Saves the document that is currently loaded in the DocumentController to a file.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the document that is currently loaded in the DocumentController to a byte array.

Specifies a byte array or a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType or the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the document that is currently loaded in the DocumentController to a string.

Specifies a byte array or a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType or the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Converts a value in twips to a value in pixels according to a specified resolution. This is a helper method that is useful when implementing pixel-based document viewers.

The value in twips to be converted. The resolution the conversion is based on.

Gets or sets the character's code that is used to render checked check boxes.

Gets or sets the character's code that is used to render unchecked check boxes.

Gets or sets the font used for rendering check boxes.

Gets or sets the horizontal DPI value used for display-related calculations.

Gets or sets the vertical DPI value used for display-related calculations.

Gets a collection of all pages contained in the currently loaded document.

Gets or sets the object of type ServerTextControl that is associated with the DocumentController component.

An instance of the FieldAdapterCollection class contains adapters for all application fields of the page it belongs to.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at the specified index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate over the collection's items.

Gets the index of the specified field adapter in the collection.

Specifies the field adapter whose index should be looked up.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets the DocumentServer.Fields.FieldAdapter instance at the specified index from the collection.

The MailMerge class is a .NET component that can be used to effortlessly merge template documents with database content in .NET projects, such as ASP.NET web applications, web services or Windows services.

Initializes a new instance of the MailMerge class.

Returns the names of all merge fields inside the merge block with the specified name.

Specifies the name of the block for which the field names are returned.

Lists the names of all merge blocks contained in the currently loaded template.

Loads a template from a file that is used for the merge process.

Specifies a template file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Loads a template from memory that is used for the merge process.

Specifies a template memory variable from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Merges the loaded template with the data of a specific System.Data.DataTable. The second parameter specifies whether the single documents should be merged into one document or splitted into separate documents.

Specifies a System.Data.DataTable that contains the merge data. Specifies whether the single documents should be merged into one document or split into separate documents.

Does the same as Merge(System.Data.DataTable mergeData, bool append) with parameter “append” set to true.

Specifies a System.Data.DataTable that contains the merge data.

Merges data into the template using a data base connection given through a data source configuration file or data source configuration XML data. (See also ReportDataSourceConfigFile property and ReportDataSourceConfig property)

Specifies whether the single documents should be merged into one document or split into separate documents.

Does the same as method Merge(bool append) with parameter “append” set to true.

Merges all repeating blocks that are contained in the loaded template with the System.Data.DataTable instances contained in the given System.Data.DataSet. The name of the System.Data.DataTable must match the name of the block in the template. The supported format of the repeating blocks can be found in the ASP.NET User's Guide.

Specifies a System.Data.DataSet that contains the merge data.

Merges data given as a JSON string into a document template. The JSON string has to contain either a single object or an array of equally structured objects.

The JSON string containing the merge data. Specifies whether the merge result should be merged into one document or split into separate documents.

Does the same as MergeJsonData with the parameter “append” set to true.

The JSON string containing the merge data.

Merges a single instance of an arbitrary type into the loaded document template. For more information about .NET reflection based object merging read the documentation of the MergeObjects method.

Specifies the object to merge into the template.

Interprets all public properties of the objects or the key names of the dictionaries in the collection as possible table columns and / or child tables. The type of the first object (or the key names and types of the first dictionary) in the collection is analyzed via .NET reflection and used as the basis of the assumed table structure. (In case of the collection containing objects of different types, the merge process is successful nevertheless, but some fields will be empty.) Properties of simple data types (e. g. string, int, enum) are converted to text using the ToString method. The textual representation of enum values can be specified using the System.ComponentModel.DescriptionAttribute. (For example: enum FoodCategory { [Description("Grains / Cereals")] Grains_Cereals, ... }.) The name by which Properties are mapped to field names can be adjusted using the System.ComponentModel.DisplayNameAttribute. (For example: [DisplayName("Name")] public string ProductName { get; set; }.) Complex properties which are themselves of type System.Collections.IEnumerable are interpreted as child Tables and used for merging merge blocks and nested merge blocks. This way data relations can be represented. Properties of a type itself having public properties are either interpreted as a simple table column (the merged text then is determined using the ToString() method) or they are treated as if they were a child table containing only one data row with the properties being the table columns. The second parameter specifies whether the single documents should be merged into one document or split into separate documents. The supported format of the merge fields can be found in the ASP.NET User's Guide.

Specifies a System.Collections.IEnumerable that contains the merge data. Specifies whether the single documents should be merged into one document or split into separate documents.

Does the same as MergeObjects with the parameter “append” set to true.

Specifies a System.Collections.IEnumerable that contains the merge data.

Prints the merged document. It uses the settings of the specified PrintDocument.

Specifies an instance of the PrintDocument class.

Prints the merged document with specific settings for the document name, the printer name, the number of copies and whether it should be collated or not.

Specifies the document's name. Specifies the name of the printer to which the output is sent. Specifies the number of copies to print. Collates output by printing every page of the first copy, then every page of the second copy, and so on.

Saves the merged document to a file.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the merged document to a byte array.

Specifies a byte array or a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType or the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the merged document to a string.

Specifies a byte array or a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType or the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values coming from the data source are parsed.

Specifies the UTC offset in minutes to apply to date fields.

Specifies in which manner form fields are treated during the merge process.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values are formatted when merged into the target document.

Specifies whether the content of empty merge blocks should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether empty fields should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether images which don't have merge data should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether text lines which are empty after merging should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether trailing whitespace should be removed before saving a document.

Specifies the Report Data Source Configuration as an XML string.

Gets or sets the file path of a Report Data Source Configuration file (*.rdsc) which has been created with TX Text Control Words.

Specifies a directory name where sub-templates and images (for image merging) should be searched.

Specifies the template file path.

A static property returning the internal merge block name prefix “txmb_”.

Gets or sets the TextComponent object which is associated with the MailMerge component.

Specifies whether the template page size and margins should be used or not.

Occurs when a barcode has been merged successfully.

Occurs when a merge block is about to be merged.

Occurs when a merge block row has been merged successfully.

Occurs when a chart has been merged successfully.

Occurs when a data row has been merged successfully.

Occurs when a field has been merged.

Occurs when a form field has been merged.

Occurs when an image field, i.e., a merge field whose name is prefixed with "image:" has been merged.

Occurs when an image has been merged successfully.

Occurs when an IncludeText field has been merged.

The BarcodeMergedEventArgs class provides data for the BarcodeMerged event.

Gets a BarcodeFrame object representing the merged barcode in the document.

The BlockMergingEventArgs class provides data for the BlockMerging event.

Gets the column names of the table supplying the data for the block.

Gets the name of the merge block the event was fired for.

Gets the block data as an array of data rows.

The BlockRowMergedEventArgs class provides data for the BlockRowMerged event.

Gets an int value that indicates the currently merged data row in the merge block.

Gets an int value that indicates the total number of data rows.

Gets a string value that indicates current merge block name.

Gets or sets a byte[] array that contains the complete data of the merged block row.

The ChartMergedEventArgs class provides data for the ChartMerged event.

Gets a ChartFrame object representing the merged chart in the document.

The DataRowMergedEventArgs class provides data for the DataRowMerged event.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the current merge process should be canceled.

Gets the current data row's content.

Gets an int value that indicates the currently merged data row.

Gets or sets a byte array that contains the complete data of the merged data row.

The FieldMergedEventArgs class provides data for the FieldMerged event.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the current merge process should be canceled.

Gets the data row which is used to supply the current field with merge content.

Gets or sets a MailMergeFieldAdapter that contains the already merged field.

If the merge field is part of a merge block, this property returns the name of the block.

Gets a bool value that indicates whether the current field has been merged successfully or not.

Gets or sets a byte array that contains the complete data of the merged field.

If the merge field is part of a merge block, this property returns the one-based nesting depth of the block.

If the merge field is inside of a table, this property returns the containing table cell as a TXTextControl.TableCell instance or null otherwise.

The FormFieldMergedEventArgs class provides data for the FormFieldMerged event.

Gets the data row which is used to supply the current field with merge content.

Gets the already merged FormField.

If the form field is part of a merge block, this property returns the name of the block.

Gets a boolean value that indicates whether the current field has been merged successfully or not.

If the form field is part of a merge block, this property returns the one-based nesting depth of the block.

If the form field is inside of a table, this property returns the containing table cell as a TXTextControl.TableCell instance or null otherwise.

The ImageFieldMergedEventArgs class provides data for the ImageFieldMerged event.

Gets the name of the merged field.

Gets the filename of the merged image.

Gets or sets the image that has been merged into the field.

If the image field is part of a merge block, this property returns the name of the block.

Gets a bool value that indicates whether the current field has been merged successfully or not.

If the image field is part of a merge block, this property returns the one-based nesting depth of the block.

If the image field is inside of a table, this property returns the containing table cell as a TXTextControl.TableCell instance or null otherwise.

The ImageMergedEventArgs class provides data for the ImageMerged event.

Gets the data row which is used to supply the current image with merge content.

Gets the ID of the merged image.

Gets or sets the merged image.

If the image is part of a merge block, this property returns the name of the block.

Gets a boolean value that indicates whether the current image has been merged successfully or not.

Gets the name of the merged image.

If the image is part of a merge block, this property returns the one-based nesting depth of the block.

The IncludeTextMergingEventArgs class provides data for the IncludeTextMerging event.

Gets a string that indicates the file name of the IncludeText field to be merged.

Sets a byte[] array that contains the complete data of the IncludeText document.

Represents the currently merged INCLUDETEXT field.

A MergeCanceledException is thrown through the Merge method when the current merge process was canceled through the DataRowMergedEventArgs.Cancel property.

The FilterInstruction class is used to filter merge block data by certain conditions before merging.

Sets the table column name to filter the data rows by, the comparison operator, the value to compare the table column content to and the logical operator.

The name of the table column to filter the data rows by. The comparison operator. The value to compare the table column content to. The logical operator which connects a filter instruction to the previous filter instruction in a collection.

Sets the table column name to filter the data rows by, the comparison operator and the value to compare the table column content to. The logical operator is set to LogicalOperator.And.

The name of the table column to filter the data rows by. The comparison operator. The value to compare the table column content to.

Sets the table column name to filter the data rows by and the comparison operator. The value to compare the table column content to is set to the empty string and the logical operator is set to LogicalOperator.And. This constructor is useful in cases of "is blank" or "is not blank" filter instructions because no compare value is needed in those cases.

The name of the table column to filter the data rows by. The comparison operator.

Gets or sets the name of the table column whose content this merge condition is compared to.

Gets or sets the value the table column content is compared to using the specified comparison operator.

Gets or sets the relational operator used as the comparison operator.

Gets or sets the format provider for numerical value comparison.

Gets or sets the logical operator by which to logically connect a filter instruction to the previous one if a filter consists of a collection of multiple filter instructions.

The SortingInstruction class contains merge block data sorting information such as the sort order and the column name to sort the data rows after.

Sets the column name to order the data by and sets the sort order (ascending / descending).

The name of the column to order the block data by. The sort order.

Sets the column name to order the data by and sets the sort order to SortOrder.Ascending.

The name of the column to order the block data by.

Gets or sets the format provider for numerical value comparison.

Gets or sets the table column name to order the data by.

Gets or sets the sort order (ascending / descending).

Determines the type of repeating merge block which is inserted when using the DataSourceManager.InsertMergeBlock method.

Insert a table row based repeating merge block.

Insert a paragraph based repeating merge block.

Specifies identifiers to indicate the return value of a dialog box.

Nothing is returned from the dialog box. This means that the modal dialog continues running.

The dialog box return value is OK (usually sent from a button labeled OK).

The dialog box return value is Cancel (usually sent from a button labeled Cancel).

Specifies identifiers to indicate the field display mode.

The field text is displayed.

The field codes are displayed.

The DataColumnInfo class provides basic information about a table column in a data source.

Gets a descriptive or friendly column name.

Gets the column name.

Gets an object of type DataTableInfo which represents the table this column belongs to.

Gets the data type of this table column.

An instance of the DataColumnInfoCollection class contains all data columns of a data table in a data source represented through objects of the type DataColumnInfo.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets the DataColumnInfo instance with the specified 0-based index from the collection.

Gets a value indicating whether the collection is read only.

The DataRelationInfo class provides all necessary information about parent-child-relations between data tables.

Gets the name of the child column which is part of this data relation.

Gets the name of the child table which is part of this data relation.

Gets the name of the parent column which is part of this data relation.

Gets the name of the parent table which is part of this data relation.

Gets the data relation name if one was defined.

An instance of the DataRelationInfoCollection class contains all data relations in a data source represented through objects of the type DataRelationInfo.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets the DataRelationInfo instance with the specified 0-based index from the collection.

Gets a value indicating whether the collection is read only.

The DataSourceManager class is designed for handling all existing kinds of data sources which can be used together with the MailMerge class.

Initializes a new instance of the DataSourceManager class.

Inserts a repeating merge block into a TextControl instance, a WPF.TextControl instance or a ServerTextControl instance at the current input position.

A TextControl instance, a WPF.TextControl instance or a ServerTextControl instance. A MergeBlockInfo object which describes the merge block to insert into the TextControl instance. A MergeBlockSettings object which describes the settings of the merge block to insert into the TextControl instance.

Checks if a given SubTextPart is a merge block.

The SubTextPart object to be checked.

Loads an assembly file as a data source. Automatically deduces table and column names as well as data relations from the public properties of all public classes found in the assembly.

The assembly file name.

Loads a System.Data.DataSet object as a data source.

The System.Data.DataSet object to use as a data source.

Shows the system's default open file dialog where a configuration file can be selected.

Shows the system's default open file dialog where a configuration file can be selected.

An object that represents the top-level window that will own the modal dialog box.

Loads XML configuration data given as a string.

A string containing XML configuration data.

Loads a System.Data.DataTable object as a data source.

The DataTable object to use as a data source.

Loads a JSON string containing an array of objects or a single object as a data source. Automatically deduces table and column names as well as data relations from property names and nested objects in the given single object or, in case of an array, the first object.

A JSON string containing a single object or an array of objects.

Loads a collection implementing the interface IEnumerable as a data source and deduces the data tables, column names and data relations from the public properties and used classes of the first contained object using .NET reflection or, in case of the first contained object being a Dictionary with string keys, from the key names and value types.

A collection implementing interface System.Collections.IEnumerable containing objects of any type.

Loads a single object which is either a Dictionary with string keys or an object of an arbitrary type as a data source. The data tables, column names are deduced either from the key names or the public property names and types using .NET reflection.

A single object which is either a Dictionary with string keys or an object of an arbitrary type as a data source.

Loads the contents of an XML file as a data source.

The file name.

Loads XML data, given as a string, as a data source.

A string containing XML data.

Merges a maximum number of data rows.

A binary TX internal unicode format document into which the data is merged. Specifies the maximum number of merged documents. A TextControl instance needed for licensing purposes. A MergeSettings instance for providing additional merge settings.

Merges a maximum number of data rows.

A binary TX internal unicode format document into which the data is merged. Specifies the maximum number of merged documents. A TextControl instance needed for licensing purposes.

Merges all data rows.

A binary TX internal unicode format document into which the data is merged. A TextControl instance needed for licensing purposes. A MergeSettings instance for providing additional merge settings.

Merges all data rows.

A binary TX internal unicode format document into which the data is merged. A TextControl instance needed for licensing purposes.

Shows the system's default save file dialog where a file name and location can be selected.

Shows the system's default save file dialog where a file name and location can be selected.

An object that represents the top-level window that will own the modal dialog box.

Saves the configuration data into a given string.

A string into which the config file content will be written when the method is called.

Gets the connection string of the connection selected with the DatabaseConnectionDialog.

Gets the name of the data provider selected with the DatabaseConnectionDialog.

Gets a DataRelationInfoCollection of DataRelationInfo objects which represent the data relations in the data source.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values coming from the data source are parsed.

Gets a DataTableInfoCollection of DataTableInfo objects which represent the data tables in the data source.

Gets a value indicating whether all requirements are met and the method Merge can be called.

Gets or sets a DataTableInfo object representing the table which is used as a master table when merging data into the document.

Specifies the Upper merge result count.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values are formatted when merged into the target document.

Gets a DataTableInfoCollection of DataTableInfo objects representing the tables which can be used as merge blocks using the currently selected master table.

Gets a DataColumnInfoCollection of DataColumnInfo objects representing the table columns which can be used as merge fields using the currently selected master table.

Is fired when the contents of the ConnectionString property change.

Is fired when the contents of the DataProviderName property change.

Is fired when the contents of the DataRelations property change.

Occurs when a data row has been merged successfully.

Is fired when the contents of the DataTables property change.

Occurs when a field has been merged.

Is fired when the value of the IsMergingPossible property changes.

Is fired when the contents of the MasterDataTableInfo property change.

Is fired when the contents of the PossibleMergeBlockTables property change.

Is fired when the contents of the PossibleMergeFieldColumns property change.

The DataTableInfo class provides basic information about a data table in a data source.

Gets a DataRelationInfoCollection representing the parent-child-relationships this table has with other data tables.

Gets a DataTableInfoCollection representing the child-tables this table has.

Gets a DataColumnInfoCollection representing the columns of this data table.

Gets the table name.

An instance of the DataTableInfoCollection class contains all data tables in a data source represented through objects of the type DataTableInfo.

Copies the elements of the collection to an array, starting at a particular index.

Specifies the array to copy to. Specifies the index of the destination array at which to begin copying.

Returns an enumerator that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the DataTableInfo instance with the specified 0-based index from the collection.

Gets the DataTableInfo instance with the specified name from the collection. Returns null if the given name does not exist.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets a value indicating whether the collection is read only.

The IDataRowAdapter interface contains properties and methods implemented by data row instances used in the BlockMerging event.

Returns the data of a child relation with a given name as an array of IDataRowAdapter instances.

The name of the child table / the child relation.

The indexer of the IDataRowAdapter interface returns the content of the row's column with the given name.

Gets the table the data row belongs to as an instance of a class implementing the IDataTableAdapter interface.

The IDataTableAdapter interface contains properties and methods implemented by data table instances used in the BlockMerging event.

Returns the name of the table.

Returns the table's column names as a string array.

Returns the table's data as an array of objects implementing the IDataRowAdapter interface.

Returns the names of the child relations in this table as a string array.

The MergeBlockInfo class is used to insert a table or paragraph based repeating merge block into a TextControl instance using the DataSourceManager.InsertMergeBlock method.

Initializes a new instance of the MergeBlockInfo class and sets the table name.

The name of the table which is the data source for this merge block.

Initializes a new instance of the MergeBlockInfo class from an existing SubTextPart already containing merge block meta data (i. e. filter and sorting instructions and a possible block merging condition).

A SubTextPart instance containing merge block meta data (i.

Stores the meta data (filters, sorting instructions and the block merging condition) in the SubTextPart which represents the block. Manipulating any of the aforementioned collections does not update the block automatically, so this method must be called to actually store changes. If a MergeBlockInfo instance is not based on an existing SubTextPart, this method throws an exception.

Gets or sets a condition the parent data row of this merge block has to satisfy so that this merge block is merged at all.

Gets or sets the list of merge blocks nested inside this merge block.

Gets or sets the list of data column names which represent the merge fields this merge block consists of.

Gets or sets a list of filter instructions which are used to filter the data rows before merging.

Returns the merge fields inside this merge block excluding fields in possible nested merge blocks.

Gets or sets a list of sorting instructions which are used to sort the data rows before merging.

Gets the table name of this merge block.

The MergeBlockSettings class is used to insert a table or paragraph based repeating merge block into a TextControl instance using the DataSourceManager.InsertMergeBlock method.

Initializes a new instance of the MergeBlockSettings class.

Initializes a new instance of the MergeBlockSettings class.

A value of type BlockTemplateType specifying the block type.

Initializes a new instance of the MergeBlockSettings class.

A value of type BlockTemplateType specifying the block type. If parameter blockTemplateType is set to BlockTemplateType.TableRow and this parameter is set to true, a table header row is automatically generated.

Initializes a new instance of the MergeBlockSettings class.

A value of type BlockTemplateType specifying the block type. If parameter blockTemplateType is set to BlockTemplateType.TableRow and this parameter is set to true, a table header row is automatically generated. The color the merge block is highlighted with if the input position is inside the block boundaries. A value of type FieldDisplayMode which specifies if field text or field codes are shown.

Returns whether the new block has successfully been inserted by DataSourceManager.InsertMergeBlock.

Gets or sets a value of type BlockTemplateType which specifies the type of the inserted repeating block.

Returns the table created by DataSourceManager.InsertMergeBlock if property BlockTemplateType was set to BlockTemplateType.TableRow.

If this property is true and property BlockTemplateType is set to BlockTemplateType.TableRow, a table header row is automatically generated.

Gets or sets a value of type FieldDisplayMode which specifies the content display mode of the inserted fields.

Specifies the color the inserted merge block is highlighted with if the input position is inside the block.

Gets or sets the ID of the table created by DataSourceManager.InsertMergeBlock.

The MergeSettings class is intended for passing additional settings to the DataSourceManager.Merge method.

Initializes a new instance of the MergeSettings class.

Specifies whether to combine the merge result to a single document.

Specifies whether the content of empty merge blocks should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether empty fields should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether images which don't have merge data should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether text lines which are empty after merging should be removed from the template or not.

Specifies whether trailing whitespace should be removed before saving a document.

The CheckBoxContentControl implements the MS Word specific check box content control field.

Initializes complete new instance of the CheckBoxContentControl class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the CheckBoxContentControl class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Specifies whether the field is checked or not.

The ComboBoxContentControl implements the MS Word specific combo box content control field.

Initializes complete new instance of the ComboBoxContentControl class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the ComboBoxContentControl class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets or sets the list items of the combo box content control field.

The abstract ContentControlFieldAdapter class is the base class of all Microsoft Word content control field adapter classes.

Initializes a complete new instance of the ContentControlFieldAdapter class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the ContentControlFieldAdapter class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets or sets the content control's title.

Gets or sets the content control's tag.

Gets or sets the content control's id.

Specifies whether the content of the content control field should be deletable or not.

Specifies whether the content of the content control field should be editable or not.

Gets or sets the type of the content control field.

Gets or sets the placeholder field part of the content control field.

The DateContentControl implements the MS Word specific date content control field.

Initializes complete new instance of the DateContentControl class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the DateContentControl class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets or sets the date of the content control field.

Gets or sets the date format of the content control field.

Gets or sets the language ID of the content control field.

Gets or sets the translation that shall be performed on the displayed date in a date picker structured document tag.

Gets or sets the calendar type of the content control field.

The DateField implements the MS Word specific DATEFIELD field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the DateField class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes new instance of the DateField class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Specifies a CultureInfo instance that supplies culture-specific formatting information which is used when applying the formatting string to the field content.

Gets and sets the displayed text of the field.

Sets the date of the field.

Gets and sets the format of the field.

The DropDownListContentControl implements the MS Word specific drop down list content control field.

Initializes complete new instance of the DropDownListContentControl class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the DropDownListContentControl class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets or sets the list items of the content control field.

The abstract FieldAdapter class is the base class of all special DocumentServer field adapters.

Initializes a complete new instance of the FieldAdapter class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the FieldAdapter class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Represents the name of the respective field type.

Opens the specific field options dialog box with LTR flow direction.

Opens the specific field options dialog box with the flow direction (RTL or LTR) set according to the boolean parameter value.

Sets the dialog layout flow direction.

Opens the specific field options dialog box with a specified owner window.

Sets the dialog's owner window.

Opens the specific field options dialog box with an owner window and a flow direction.

Sets the dialog's owner window. Sets the dialog layout flow direction.

Gets the adapted ApplicationField of the field.

Gets the ID of the specific field through its adapter.

Gets the field's type name of the specific field through its adapter.

Gets the first character position (one-based) of the field through its adapter.

Gets the number of characters in a text field through its adapter.

The FormText implements the MS Word specific FORMCHECKBOX field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the FormText class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the FormText class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Specifies the maximum length of the field.

Specifies whether the field is automatically resized or not.

Specifies whether the field is checked or not.

The FormDropDown class implements the MS Word specific FORMDROPDOWN field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the FormDropDown class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the FormDropDown class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets and sets the list entries of the drop down field.

The abstract FormFieldAdapter class is the base class of all special DocumentServer form field adapters.

Initializes a complete new instance of the FormFieldAdapter class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the FormFieldAdapter class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the to-be-adapted ApplicationField.

Gets and sets the help text of the field.

Gets and sets the status text of the field.

Specifies whether the field is enabled or not.

Gets or sets the CalcOnExit property of the field.

Gets and sets the name of the form field.

Gets and sets the text of the form field.

Gets and sets the font of the form field.

Gets and sets the bounds of the form field.

The FormText class implements the MS Word specific FORMTEXT field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the FormText class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the FormText class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets and sets the maximum length of the field.

Gets or sets the TextFormatOptions of the field.

Gets or sets the type of the field.

The IfField class implements the MS Word specific IF field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the IfField class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the IfField class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Specifies the culture which is used for the relational comparison of numerical values.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values are formatted when merged into the target document.

Gets and sets the displayed text of the field.

Gets and sets the operator of the field.

Gets and sets the first expression text that should be compared.

Gets and sets the second expression text that should be compared to Expression1.

Gets and sets the text that should be displayed when the comparison is true.

Gets and sets the text that should be displayed when the comparison is false.

Gets or sets the field's value of the field that has been specified in Expression1.

The IncludeText class implements the MS Word specific INCLUDETEXT field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the IncludeText class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the IncludeText class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets and sets the file name of the document that should be inserted.

Gets and sets the bookmark switch of the field.

Gets and sets the text format of the field.

The abstract MailMergeFieldAdapter class is the base class of all special DocumentServer mail merge field adapters.

Initializes a complete new instance of the MailMergeFieldAdapter class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the MailMergeFieldAdapter class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the to-be-adapted ApplicationField.

Specifies whether the field's formatting should be preserved.

The MergeField class implements the MS Word specific MERGEFIELD field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the MergeField class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

nitializes a new instance of the MergeField class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values coming from the data source are parsed.

Specifies a string format which is applied to date / time values.

Specifies whether the field is a mapped field.

Gets and sets the name of the field.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values are formatted when merged into the target document.

Specifies a string format which is applied to numeric values.

Gets and sets the text of the field.

Gets and sets the text of the field that is displayed after the field's text.

Gets and sets the text of the field that is displayed before the field's text.

Gets and sets the text format of the field.

Specifies whether the field's formatting is vertical.

The NextField class implements the MS Word specific NEXT field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the NextField class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the NextField class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

The NextIfField class implements the MS Word specific NEXTIF field.

Initializes a complete new instance of the NextIfField class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the NextIfField class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Specifies the culture which is used for the relational comparison of numerical values.

Specifies the culture with which numerical and date / time values are formatted when merged into the target document.

Gets the evaluation result of the two field expressions and the specified comparison operator.

Gets and sets the comparison operator the field.

Gets and sets the first expression text that should be compared.

Gets and sets the second expression text that should be compared to Expression1.

Gets or sets the field's value of the field that has been specified in Expression1.

The PlainTextContentControl implements the MS Word specific plain text content control field.

Initializes complete new instance of the PlainTextContentControl class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the PlainTextContentControl class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets or sets the text of the content control field.

The RichTextContentControl implements the MS Word specific plain text content control field.

Initializes complete new instance of the RichTextContentControl class without a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Initializes a new instance of the RichTextContentControl class with a connection to an existing ApplicationField.

Specifies the ApplicationField to be adapted.

Gets or sets the text of the content control field.

Is thrown when calling the method MailMerge.MergeJsonData with a JSON string containing an invalid hexadecimal unicode code point.

Is thrown when calling the method MailMerge.MergeJsonData with a JSON string containing a number with an invalid number format.

Base class of all JSON parser related exceptions which can be thrown when calling method MailMerge.MergeJsonData with an incorrect JSON string.

Is thrown when calling the method MailMerge.MergeJsonData with an incomplete JSON string.

Is thrown when calling the method MailMerge.MergeJsonData with a JSON string containing an unexpected character.

Is thrown when calling the method MailMerge.MergeJsonData with a JSON string containing an unknown character sequence at a position where one of the strings "true", "false" or "null" are expected.

Is thrown when calling the method MailMerge.MergeJsonData and the internal JSON parser encounters an unknown error.

The FormButton class implements the Adobe PDF AcroForms button field.

Initializes a new instance of the FormButton class based on a given FormField.

Specifies the parent FormField.

The FormCheckBox class implements the Adobe PDF AcroForms check box field.

Initializes a new instance of the FormCheckBox class based on a given FormField.

Specifies the parent FormField.

Specifies whether the check box is checked or not.

The FormChoiceField class implements the base class for Adobe PDF AcroForms form choice fields.

Initializes a new instance of the FormChoiceField class based on a given FormField.

Specifies the parent FormField.

Gets or sets the option elements of a choice field.

Specifies whether a field can be edited.

Specifies whether the list can be sorted.

Specifies whether multiple options can be selected.

Specifies whether spell checking is enabled or not.

Specifies whether the form is submitted when the selected is changed.

Gets or sets the selected value of a choice list.

The FormComboBox class implements the Adobe PDF AcroForms combo box field.

Initializes a new instance of the FormComboBox class based on a given FormChoiceField.

Specifies the parent FormChoiceField.

The FormField class implements the base class for the Adobe PDF AcroForms form fields.

Initializes a complete new instance of the FormField class.

Initializes a new instance of the FormField class based on a given FormField.

Specifies the parent FormField.

Gets or sets the name of the field.

Gets or sets the alternate field name of the field.

Gets or sets the type of the field.

Gets or sets the rectangle bounds of the form field in the document.

The FormListBox class implements the Adobe PDF AcroForms list box field.

Initializes a new instance of the FormListBox class based on a given FormChoiceField.

Specifies the parent FormChoiceField.

The FormRadioButton class implements the Adobe PDF AcroForms radio button field.

Initializes a new instance of the FormRadioButton class based on a given FormField.

Specifies the parent FormField.

The FormTextField class implements the Adobe PDF AcroForms form text field.

Initializes a new instance of the FormTextField class based on a given FormField.

Specifies the parent FormField.

Gets or sets the value of the form text field.

The ContentLine class implements the text coordinates in a PDF document.

Initializes a complete new instance of the ContentLine class.

Returns the page number that contains the line.

Returns the horizontal coordinate of the line in Points.

Returns the vertical coordinate of the line in Points.

Returns the width of the line in Points.

Returns the height of the line in Points.

Returns the text of the line.

Returns the rectangle bounds of the line.

The Lines class implements functionality to find DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.ContentLine objects in a PDF document.

Initializes a new DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.Lines class from a given file.

Specifies the PDF filename that is used to import the text lines.

Initializes a new DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.Lines class from a given byte array.

Specifies data of a PDF document that is used to import the text lines.

Returns a list of DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.ContentLine found based on a string.

The string to search for in the document.

Returns a list of DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.ContentLine objects found through a regular expression.

The regular expression that is used in the find process. The regular expression options.

Returns a list of DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.ContentLine objects at a geometric location with a given radius.

The geometric location in the document to search for. The radius to define the search area. Specifies whether the lines have to be completely inside the given rectangle or just intersect with it.

Returns a list of DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.ContentLine objects in a given rectangle.

The rectangle that is used for the find process. Specifies whether the lines have to be completely inside the given rectangle or just intersect with it.

Returns a list of DocumentServer.PDF.Contents.ContentLine objects in the PDF document.

The Forms class implements PDF specific methods.

Initializes a complete new instance of the Forms class.

Return the imported AcroFormField objects from a file.

Specifies the complete file path of the PDF document.

Return the imported AcroFormField objects from a byte array.

Specifies the byte array of the PDF document.

The EditDataRelationsDialog class allows the user to add or remove data relations to or from the current data source.

Creates a EditDataRelationsDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager, which manages the current data source.

The EditMergeBlocksDialog class allows the user to remove or rename merge blocks contained in the current document.

Creates a EditMergeBlocksDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager, which manages the current data source. A TextControl or a ServerTextControl instance containing the merge blocks which are shown in the dialog box.

The FilterAndSortDialog class allows the user to specify filters and sorting instructions for merge blocks.

Creates a FilterAndSortDialog object using the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataTableInfo object as a source for possible table column names.

Specifies the DataTableInfo object which is used as a source for possible table column names.

Creates a FilterAndSortDialog object using a list of strings as a source for possible table column names.

Specifies the possible column names.

Stores filters and sorting instructions created with the dialog in a SubTextPart object if the SubTextPart is a merge block. Throws an exception if the SubTextPart object is not a merge block.

The SubTextPart object to add the filters and sorting instructions to.

Gets the filter instructions which were created using the dialog or sets the filter instructions which are shown when the dialog is opened.

Gets the sorting instructions which were created using the dialog or sets the sorting instructions which are shown when the dialog is opened.

The InsertMergeBlockDialog class allows the user to design and insert a merge block based on the currently selected master table.

Creates a InsertMergeBlockDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager which manages the current data source. A TextControl or a ServerTextControl instance containing the document into which the merge block is inserted. Specifies the DataTableInfo which represents the table the new merge block is based on.

Returns whether the new block has successfully been inserted.

Indicates whether a separate header row has to be added to the table containing the repeating merge block.

Indicates the type of the merge block to be created.

Returns the newly created TXTextControl.Table if the merge block was inserted as a table row.

Returns the selected highlight color to be used for the sub text part representing the merge block.

Returns a MergeBlockInfo object describing the merge block to be inserted.

The DocumentViewer class is a .NET component that can be used to display documents in the web browser in ASP.NET projects.

Initializes a new instance of the DocumentViewer class.

Frees all resources used by the DocumentViewer instance.

Loads a document from a specific path.

Specifies the document file to be loaded.

Loads a document from a specific path and a specific document format.

Specifies the document file to be loaded. Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Loads a document from a file that is used for further processing.

Specifies a memory variable from which the document is loaded. Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Saves the document in a specific document format.

Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Saves the document to a specific path.

Specifies where the document should be saved.

Saves the document to a specific path in a specific document format.

Specifies where the document should be saved. Specifies one of the DocumentServer.FileFormat values.

Initiates saving the currently loaded form's user input. The actual saving is performed by a method which has to be bound to the DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer.SaveFormData event.

Gets or sets the DocumentServer.DocumentController object that is associated with the DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer component.

Gets or sets the path to the document, which will be displayed in the DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer.

Gets or sets whether the document viewer renders forms editable, i.e.

Gets or sets whether and if so how the field borders are rendered, when EditMode is set to Edit.

Specifies whether CSS transition animations should be used or not when navigating through pages.

Gets or sets the duration of the page animations in seconds.

Specifies whether the edit button is shown or not.

Specifies whether rounded document page corners should be used or not.

Gets or sets the color of the field borders, that is used when FieldBorderStyle is not None.

Gets or sets whether the rendered document is interpolated during the process.

Gets or sets the interpolation mode which is used for rendering the document.

Gets or sets the page number that the DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer is displaying or should display respectively.

Specifies whether the document viewer's tool bar is displayed or not.

Gets the total number of pages the loaded document contains.

Gets or sets the zoom factor in percent.

Gets or sets the zoom behavior of the DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer.

Occurs when DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer.Save has been called, while specifying the format parameter only.

Occurs when DocumentServer.Web.DocumentViewer.SaveUserInput has been called.

The SaveDocumentEventArgs class provides data for the DocumentViewer.SaveDocument event.

Gets a snapshot of the currently loaded document for further processing.

Specifies the format of DocumentViewer.SaveDocumentEventArgs.Document.

The SaveDocumentEventArgs class provides data for the DocumentViewer.SaveFormData event.

Gets a snapshot of the currently loaded form's user input.

The ChartDataRelationDialog class allows the user to prepare a ChartFrame object to display data from a data relation defined in a mail merge data source.

Creates a ChartDataRelationDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies a ChartFrame object which contains the Chart which should be manipulated by the dialog. Specifies the DataSourceManager, which manages the current data source.

The DataSourceExtractionDialog class allows the user to save an excerpt from the currently loaded data source.

Creates a DataSourceExtractionDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager, which manages the current data source.

Returns the file name of the file into which the data source excerpt has been saved.

Returns the maximum number of data rows from the selected table which were saved into the excerpt file.

Returns a description of the table which was selected by the user to be exported.

The DatabaseConnectionDialog class allows the user to build connection strings and to connect to specific data sources.

Creates a DatabaseConnectionDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager, which handles the selected connection to a data source.

The EditDataRelationsDialog class allows the user to add or remove data relations to or from the current data source.

Creates a EditDataRelationsDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager, which manages the current data source.

The EditMergeBlocksDialog class allows the user to remove or rename merge blocks contained in the current document.

Creates a EditMergeBlocksDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager, which manages the current data source. A TextControl or a ServerTextControl instance containing the merge blocks which are shown in the dialog box.

The FilterAndSortDialog class allows the user to specify filters and sorting instructions for merge blocks.

Creates a FilterAndSortDialog object using the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataTableInfo object as a source for possible table column names.

Specifies the DataTableInfo object which is used as a source for possible table column names.

Creates a FilterAndSortDialog object using a list of strings as a source for possible table column names.

Specifies the possible column names.

Stores filters and sorting instructions created with the dialog in a SubTextPart object if the SubTextPart is a merge block. Throws an exception if the SubTextPart object is not a merge block.

The SubTextPart object to add the filters and sorting instructions to.

Gets the filter instructions which were created using the dialog or sets the filter instructions which are shown when the dialog is opened.

Gets the sorting instructions which were created using the dialog or sets the sorting instructions which are shown when the dialog is opened.

The InsertMergeBlockDialog class allows the user to design and insert a merge block based on the currently selected master table.

Creates a InsertMergeBlockDialog object for the specified DocumentServer.DataSources.DataSourceManager.

Specifies the DataSourceManager which manages the current data source. A TextControl or a ServerTextControl instance containing the document into which the merge block is inserted. Specifies the DataTableInfo which represents the table the new merge block is based on.

Returns whether the new block has successfully been inserted.

Indicates whether a separate header row has to be added to the table containing the repeating merge block.

Indicates the type of the merge block to be created.

Returns the newly created TXTextControl.Table if the merge block was inserted as a table row.

Returns the selected highlight color to be used for the sub text part representing the merge block.

Returns a MergeBlockInfo object describing the merge block to be inserted.

Determines whether and in which form the shape is flip.

Flips the shape horizontally.

Flips the shape vertically.

The shape is not flipped.

Determines a certain shape class attribute.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.Angle property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.AutoSize property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.CanFitToCanvas property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.ShapeFill.Color property.

Specifies the horizontal attribute set through the Shape.Flip property.

Specifies the vertical attribute set through the Shape.Flip property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.Movable property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.ShapeOutline.Color property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.ShapeOutline.Width property.

Specifies the x attribute set through the Shape.Location.X property.

Specifies the y attribute set through the Shape.Location.Y property.

Specifies the attribute set through the Shape.Sizable property.

Specifies the height attribute set through the Shape.Size.Height property.

Specifies the width attribute set through the Shape.Size.Width property.

Determines the location and size in which a shape is added to the TX Drawing Control.

The shape fills the complete control, no matter which location and size was defined before.

The shape is added on the next mouse up handling and gets the bounds which are defined by the previous mouse down click and the following mouse movement. If a considering side value is less than 150 twips, the side gets a length of 1134 twips.

No specific style is set. The shape is located at its defined location with its defined size.

Determines the type a shape can have.

Line Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "line".

Line Inverse Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "lineInv".

Triangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "triangle".

Right Triangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "rtTriangle".

Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "rect".

Diamond Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "diamond".

Parallelogram Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "parallelogram".

Trapezoid Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "trapezoid".

Non-Isosceles Trapezoid Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "nonIsoscelesTrapezoid".

Pentagon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "pentagon".

Hexagon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "hexagon".

Heptagon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "heptagon".

Octagon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "octagon".

Decagon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "decagon".

Dodecagon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "dodecagon".

Four Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star4".

Five Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star5".

Six Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star6".

Seven Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star7".

Eight Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star8".

Ten Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star10".

Twelve Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star12".

Sixteen Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star16".

Twenty Four Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star24".

Thirty Two Pointed Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "star32".

Round Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "roundRect".

One Round Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "round1Rect".

Two Same-side Round Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "round2SameRect".

Two Diagonal Round Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "round2DiagRect".

One Snip One Round Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "snipRoundRect".

One Snip Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "snip1Rect".

Two Same-side Snip Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "snip2SameRect".

Two Diagonal Snip Corner Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "snip2DiagRect".

Plaque Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "plaque".

Ellipse Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "ellipse".

Teardrop Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "teardrop".

Home Plate Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "homePlate".

Chevron Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "chevron".

Pie Wedge Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "pieWedge".

Pie Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "pie".

Block Arc Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "blockArc".

Donut Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "donut".

No Smoking Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "noSmoking".

Right Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "rightArrow".

Left Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftArrow".

Up Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "upArrow".

Down Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "downArrow".

Striped Right Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "stripedRightArrow".

Notched Right Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "notchedRightArrow".

Bent Up Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bentUpArrow".

Left Right Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftRightArrow".

Up Down Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "upDownArrow".

Left Up Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftUpArrow".

Left Right Up Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftRightUpArrow".

Quad-Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "quadArrow".

Callout Left Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftArrowCallout".

Callout Right Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "rightArrowCallout".

Callout Up Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "upArrowCallout".

Callout Down Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "downArrowCallout".

Callout Left Right Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftRightArrowCallout".

Callout Up Down Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "upDownArrowCallout".

Callout Quad-Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "quadArrowCallout".

Bent Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bentArrow".

U-Turn Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "uturnArrow".

Circular Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "circularArrow".

Left Circular Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftCircularArrow".

Left Right Circular Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftRightCircularArrow".

Curved Right Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedRightArrow".

Curved Left Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedLeftArrow".

Curved Up Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedUpArrow".

Curved Down Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedDownArrow".

Swoosh Arrow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "swooshArrow".

Cube Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "cube".

Can Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "can".

Lightning Bolt Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "lightningBolt".

Heart Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "heart".

Sun Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "sun".

Moon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "moon".

Smiley Face Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "smileyFace".

Irregular Seal 1 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "irregularSeal1".

Irregular Seal 2 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "irregularSeal2".

Folded Corner Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "foldedCorner".

Bevel Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bevel".

Frame Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "frame".

Half Frame Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "halfFrame".

Corner Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "corner".

Diagonal Stripe Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "diagStripe".

Chord Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "chord".

Curved Arc Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "arc".

Left Bracket Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftBracket".

Right Bracket Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "rightBracket".

Left Brace Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftBrace".

Right Brace Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "rightBrace".

Bracket Pair Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bracketPair".

Brace Pair Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bracePair".

Straight Connector 1 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "straightConnector1".

Bent Connector 2 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bentConnector2".

Bent Connector 3 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bentConnector3".

Bent Connector 4 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bentConnector4".

Bent Connector 5 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "bentConnector5".

Curved Connector 2 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedConnector2".

Curved Connector 3 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedConnector3".

Curved Connector 4 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedConnector4".

Curved Connector 5 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "curvedConnector5".

Callout 1 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "callout1".

Callout 2 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "callout2".

Callout 3 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "callout3".

Callout 1 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "accentCallout1".

Callout 2 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "accentCallout2".

Callout 3 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "accentCallout3".

Callout 1 with Border Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "borderCallout1".

Callout 2 with Border Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "borderCallout2".

Callout 3 with Border Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "borderCallout3".

Callout 1 with Border and Accent Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "accentBorderCallout1".

Callout 2 with Border and Accent Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "accentBorderCallout2".

Callout 3 with Border and Accent Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "accentBorderCallout3".

Callout Wedge Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "wedgeRectCallout".

Callout Wedge Round Rectangle Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "wedgeRoundRectCallout".

Callout Wedge Ellipse Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "wedgeEllipseCallout".

Callout Cloud Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "cloudCallout".

Cloud Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "cloud".

Ribbon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "ribbon".

Ribbon 2 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "ribbon2".

Ellipse Ribbon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "ellipseRibbon".

Ellipse Ribbon 2 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "ellipseRibbon2".

Left Right Ribbon Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "leftRightRibbon".

Vertical Scroll Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "verticalScroll".

Horizontal Scroll Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "horizontalScroll".

Wave Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "wave".

Double Wave Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "doubleWave".

Plus Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "plus".

Process Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartProcess".

Decision Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartDecision".

Input Output Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartInputOutput".

Predefined Process Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartPredefinedProcess".

Internal Storage Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartInternalStorage".

Document Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartDocument".

Multi-Document Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartMultidocument".

Terminator Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartTerminator".

Preparation Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartPreparation".

Manual Input Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartManualInput".

Manual Operation Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartManualOperation".

Connector Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartConnector".

Punched Card Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartPunchedCard".

Punched Tape Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartPunchedTape".

Summing Junction Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartSummingJunction".

Or Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartOr".

Collate Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartCollate".

Sort Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartSort".

Extract Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartExtract".

Merge Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartMerge".

Offline Storage Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartOfflineStorage".

Online Storage Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartOnlineStorage".

Magnetic Tape Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartMagneticTape".

Magnetic Disk Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartMagneticDisk".

Magnetic Drum Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartMagneticDrum".

Display Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartDisplay".

Delay Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartDelay".

Alternate Process Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartAlternateProcess".

Off-Page Connector Flow Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "flowChartOffpageConnector".

Blank Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonBlank".

Home Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonHome".

Help Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonHelp".

Information Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonInformation".

Forward or Next Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonForwardNext".

Back or Previous Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonBackPrevious".

End Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonEnd".

Beginning Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonBeginning".

Return Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonReturn".

Document Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonDocument".

Sound Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonSound".

Movie Button Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "actionButtonMovie".

Gear 6 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "gear6".

Gear 9 Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "gear9".

Funnel Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "funnel".

Plus Math Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "mathPlus".

Minus Math Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "mathMinus".

Multiply Math Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "mathMultiply".

Divide Math Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "mathDivide".

Equal Math Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "mathEqual".

Not Equal Math Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "mathNotEqual".

Corner Tabs Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "cornerTabs".

Square Tabs Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "squareTabs".

Plaque Tabs Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "plaqueTabs".

Chart X Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "chartX".

Chart Star Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "chartStar".

Chart Plus Shape. When the item is serialized out as xml, its value is "chartPlus".

The Drawing.MenuItem class represents a bindable Windows Forms ToolStripMenuItem.

The Drawing.Selection class represents all selected shapes.

Increases the selected shapes' levels by one. The method has no effect if the CanBringForward property returns false.

Displays the selected shape as the uppermost shape of all shapes. The method has no effect if the CanBringToFront property returns false.

Decreases the selected shapes' levels by one. The method has no effect if the CanSendBackward property returns false.

Displays the selected shape as the lowest shape of all shapes. The method has no effect if the CanSendToBack property returns false.

Informs about whether an attribute from the Drawing.Selection.Attribute enumeration has the same value for the complete shapes selection.

Specifies a possible value from the Drawing.Selection.Attribute enumeration.

Gets value that indicates whether the selected shapes' levels can be increased by one.

Gets value that indicates whether the selected shape can be displayed as the uppermost shape of all shapes.

Gets value that indicates whether the selected shapes' levels can be decreased by one.

Gets value that indicates whether the selected shape can be displayed as the lowest shape of all shapes.

Gets or set the selected shapes .

The Drawing.Shape class represents a shape which can be displayed inside the TX Drawing Control.

Creates a new instance of the Shape class by the ShapeType type ShapeType.Custom.

Initializes a new instance of the Shape class by a specific ShapeType type.

Specifies the shape's type.

Expands the shape to the control's canvas size. The method has no effect if the CanFitToCanvas property returns false.

Gets or sets the angle of the shape inside the TX Drawing Control.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the shape is automatically resized with the TX Drawing Control.

Gets or sets the bounding rectangle of the shape.

Gets a value which indicates whether the FitToCanvas method can be used or not.

Gets or sets whether and in what form the shape is flipped.

Represents the index of the shape inside control's shape collection.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether the shape is movable or not.

Gets a value which indicates whether the shape is selected or not.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether the shape is sizable or not.

Gets or sets shape's current location.

Gets the shape's fill properties.

Gets the shape's outline properties.

Gets or sets the shape's current size.

Gets or sets the shape's type.

The Drawing.Shape.Fill class determines the fill properties of a shape.

Gets or sets the shape's fill color.

The Drawing.Shape.Outline class determines the line properties of a shape.

Gets or sets the shape's line color.

Gets or sets the shape's line width.

An instance of the ShapeCollection class contains all displayed shapes represented through objects of type Shape.

Adds an object of the type Shape to the collection. The shape is drawn at its defined location with its defined size.

Specifies the shape.

Adds an object of the type Shape to the collection. The addStyle parameter determines the location and size in which the shape is added.

Specifies the shape. Specifies style how to add the shape to the collection.

Inserts an object of the type Shape to the collection at a specified index.

Specifies the index where to insert the speicified shape. Specifies the shape to insert at the specified index.

Removes an object of the type Shape from the collection.

Specifies the shape to remove.

Gets an object of type Shape from the collection.

The ShapeEventArgs class provides data for all events that occur with shapes.

Gets an object of type Shape that represents the shape which causes the event.

The Drawing.ShapesContextMenuStrip class represents the default context menu of the Windows Forms TXDrawingControl.

Returns an array of System.Windows.Forms.ToolStripItem objects that represents those items which are displayed in the context menu strip when the control is right clicked inside a shape.

Returns an array of System.Windows.Forms.ToolStripItem objects that represents those items which are displayed in the context menu strip when the control is right clicked outside a shape.

The TXDrawingControl class implements a Windows Forms control with features to draw custom or predefined shapes.

Initializes a new instance of the TXDrawingControl class.

Clears the undo buffer of the TX Drawing Control.

Copies the current selected shapes of the TX Drawing Control to the Clipboard.

Moves the current selected shapes of the TX Drawing Control to the Clipboard.

Opens a dialog to format selected shapes.

Loads shapes data into the TX Drawing Control from a specified object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is loaded from.

Pastes the content of the clipboard into the TX Drawing Control

Renders only the displayed shapes on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object. No activated UI elements are rendered.

Specifies the object of type System.Drawing.Graphics the displayed shapes are rendered to. Specifies the position to draw on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object.

Renders the displayed shapes on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object with or without activated UI elements.

Specifies the object of type System.Drawing.Graphics the displayed shapes are rendered to. Specifies the position to draw on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object. Specifies whether the activated UI elements are rendered on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object or not.

Redoes the last TX Drawing Control operation.

Saves the shapes data to the given object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is saved to.

Saves the displayed shapes as an image to the specified object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the image is saved to. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Saves the displayed shapes as an image to the specified file using the specified format.

Specifies a file the image is saved to. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Selects all shapes in the TX Drawing Control.

If any changes of the the displayed shapes' visible bounds require an adaption of the TX Drawing Control bounds, the size and/or location of the control is expanded respectively decreased by the considering value of the considering shape's side(s). The method returns an array of doubles which represent the effected alteration for each control's side (left, top, right, bottom) in Twips.

Undoes the last edit operation in the TX Drawing Control.

Gets or sets the TX Drawing Control's back color.

Gets or sets the TX Drawing Control's border line color.

Gets or sets the TX Drawing Control's border line width.

Informs whether shapes are selected which can be copied to the internal clipboard.

Informs whether the internal clipboard contains shapes that can be pasted into the TX Drawing Control.

Informs whether an operation can be re-done using the Redo method.

Gets a value indicating whether the user can undo the previous operation in the TX Drawing Control.

Gets a value whether the TX Drawing Control is interpreted as canvas or not.

Gets an object of type Drawing.Selection that represents the current selected shapes inside the TX Drawing Control.

Gets an object of type ShapeCollection that represents those shapes which are displayed inside the TX Drawing Control.

Gets or sets the zoom factor, in percent, for the TX Drawing Control.

Indicates that the visible bounds of the displayed shapes have been changed (by changing the shape's angle, outline width, yellow adjust rectangles or the control's border width) in so far that the control requires an update of its bounds.

Indicates that the number or formatting of the displayed shapes has been changed.

Occurs when a shape has been adjusted by using its yellow adjust rectangle.

Occurs when a shape has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new shape has been created.

Occurs when a shape has been deleted from the TX Drawing Control's shapes collection.

Occurs when a shape has been deselected.

Occurs when a shape has been flipped.

Occurs when shape formatting attributes which cannot be handled with the built-in mouse interface have been changed.

Occurs when a shape has been moved with the built-in mouse interface.

Occurs when a shape has been selected.

Occurs when a shape has been sized with the built-in mouse interface.

Occurs when UI manipulations such as shape moving or selection changing have caused the view to change.

The ViewChangedEventArgs class provides data for the TXDrawingControl.ViewChanged event.

Gets an object of type System.Drawing.Rectangle that represents the region where the control view is changed by UI editing.

The CaretStateEventArgs class provides data about the state of the caret, such as position, size and visibility.

Gets the caret's direction.

Gets the caret's location in pixels.

Gets the caret's visibility.

Gets the caret's visibility.

An instance of the DialogViewGenerator class can be used to visualize a built-in dialog box through an image.

Gets or sets a value indicating the dialog box's activation state.

Gets the dialog box's caption.

Gets the dialog box's UserInput object, which can be used to inform the dialog box about user input.

Gets the dialog box's View object, which informs about view changes and provides an image of the dialog box's current state.

Occurs when the state of the caret (size, position, visibility) has been changed.

Occurs after the dialog box has been closed through clicking the Ok or Cancel button.

Occurs when the dialog box should show a further dialog box.

Occurs when the dialog box should show an error message.

The DocumentSizeChangedEventArgs class informs about a changed document size.

Gets the document's height, in twips.

Gets the document's width, in twips.

The DrawComboboxEventArgs class contains information necessary to draw a combobox so that an end-user can select an item for a SelectionFormField.

Returns true, when the font of the combobox should be bold.

Returns the name of the font that should be used to display the items of the combobox.

Returns the pointsize (EM size), in pixels, of the combobox's font.

Returns true, when the font of the combobox should be italic.

Gets the location of the combobox's text, in pixels.

Gets the SelectionFormField for which the combobox is displayed.

Gets the size of the combobox's text, in pixels.

The DrawDateControlEventArgs class contains information necessary to draw a date control so that an end-user can select a date for a DateFormField.

Gets the location where to place the date control, in pixels.

Gets the DateFormField for which the date control is displayed.

The DrawShapeEventArgs class contains information to draw additional parts necessary when the user interacts with the document.

Determines a shape to be drawn during the DrawShape event.

Determines the rectangle indicating the text input position where text is inserted during a drag and drop operation.

Determines the frame which is drawn when an image or textframe is moved or sized.

Determines the line which is drawn when the width of a table cell is changed. This shape's horizontal size is set to 1 pixel.

Gets the kind of the shape.

Gets the location of the shape, in pixels.

Gets the size of the shape, in pixels.

The MenuItem class provides all data necessary to visualize a menu item, such as the menu's text and the menu's image.

Executes the menu item. When the menu item opens a dialog box, the method creates and returns a DialogViewGenerator object. Otherwise it performs changes in the document.

Gets a value indicating whether the menu item is checked.

Gets a value indicating whether the menu item is enabled.

Gets the menu item's image.

Gets an array of ServerVisualization.MenuItem objects specifying a submenu.

Gets the menu item's text.

An instance of the RulerBarViewGenerator class can be used to visualize a ruler bar through an image.

Initializes a new instance of the RulerBarViewGenerator class. After initialization the Create method must be called to enable further resources.

Initializes the resources of a newly instantiated object. This method must be called before using the object. To release created resources, Dispose should be called after using the object.

Resets all display colors of a ruler bar to their system dependent default values.

Gets or sets a value specifying the alignment of the ruler bar in the document.

Gets or sets the border style of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the colors of the ruler bar.

Enables or disables the setting of page margins.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the ruler bar shows cell references when the current input position is in a table cell.

Gets or sets a location, in pixels.

Gets or sets a value determining the ruler bar's read only mode.

Gets or sets a resolution, in dots per inch (dpi) for all images, provided through the View property.

Gets or sets the unit of the ruler bar's scale.

Gets the UserInput object, which can be used to inform the RulerBarViewGenerator about user input.

Gets the View object, which informs about view changes and provides an image of the RulerBarViewGenerator's current state.

The ServerVisualization.RulerBarViewGenerator.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a ServerVisualization.RulerBarViewGenerator component.

Initializes a new instance of the RulerBarViewGenerator.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Resets the ruler bar's BackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's ForeColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's GradientBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's RulerColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's SeparatorColorDark to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ruler bar's SeparatorColorLight to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the background color at the left or top edge of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the color used for the numbers of the ruler.

Gets or sets the background color at the right or bottom edge of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the color of the ruler.

Gets or sets the color of dark separators.

Gets or sets the color of light separators.

The ShowDialogBoxEventArgs class provides a DialogViewGenerator object which can be used to show a further dialog box from a parent dialog box.

Gets a DialogViewGenerator object which can be used to show the child dialog box.

The ShowErrorMessageEventArgs class provides a string which should be shown as an error message for the end-user.

Gets the error message.

Gets a caption string.

An instance of the StatusBarViewGenerator class can be used to visualize a status bar through an image.

Initializes a new instance of the StatusBarViewGenerator class. After initialization the Create method must be called to enable further resources.

Initializes the resources of a newly instantiated object. This method must be called before using the object. To release created resources, Dispose should be called after using the object.

Resets all display colors of a status bar to their system dependent default values.

Gets or sets the border style of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Column' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the colors of the status bar.

Gets or sets the font which is used to display text.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Line' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Page counter' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Page' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets a resolution, in dots per inch (dpi) for all images, provided through the View property.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Section counter' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Section' area of the status bar.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the column number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the key state of the CAPSLOCK and the NUMLOCK key and the current insertion mode, insert or overwrite.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the language of the text selection or the text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the line number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the page number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of pages the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the section number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of sections the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the current zoom factor.

Specifies whether the status bar displays a track bar instead of a simple number to show and to set the zooming factor.

Gets the UserInput object, which can be used to inform the StatusBarViewGenerator about user input.

Gets the View object, which informs about view changes and provides an image of the StatusBarViewGenerator's current state.

The StatusBarViewGenerator.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a ServerVisualization.StatusBarViewGenerator component.

Initializes a new instance of the StatusBarViewGenerator.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Resets the status bar's BackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's BackColorBottom to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's BackColorMiddle to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's BackColorTop to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's ForeColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's FrameColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's GradientBackColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's SeparatorColorDark to its system dependent default value.

Resets the status bar's SeparatorColorLight to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the background color at the left edge of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color at the bottom of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color in the middle of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color at the top of the status bar.

Gets or sets the color used for text and numbers.

Gets or sets the color of the status bar's frames.

Gets or sets the background color at the right edge of the status bar.

Gets or sets the color of the dark part of a separator.

Gets or sets the color of the light part of a separator.

The TextContextMenuEventArgs class provides data for the ServerVisualization.TextViewGenerator.TextContextMenuOpening event.

Gets the location in the document for which the menu items have been generated.

Gets an array of ServerVisualization.MenuItem objects.

Gets the location, in pixels, where the context menu should be displayed.

Gets a value indicating whether the context menu must be shown from right to left.

The TextViewGenerator class is a special ServerTextControl, which can be used to visualize the control's text contents through a generated image.

Determines a built-in dialog box.

Determines the dialog box for inserting symbol characters.

Determines the dialog box for layouting and setting attributes of barcodes.

Determines the dialog box for layouting charts.

Determines the dialog box for layouting drawings.

Determines the dialog box for setting character attributes like font attributes, text fore- and background color, baseline alignment and underlining.

Determines the dialog box for defining a text foreground color.

Determines the dialog box for defining formatting styles.

Determines the dialog box for defining a color for the background of a paragraph or a table cell.

Determines the dialog box for defining a color for the frame of a paragraph or a table.

Determines the dialog box for setting image attributes like layout options and position, size, scaling, text distances and saving options.

Determines the dialog box for inserting tables.

Determines the dialog box for setting languages.

Determines the dialog box for setting attributes of bulleted and numbered lists.

Determines the dialog box for defining a page color.

Determines the dialog box for setting paragraph attributes like alignment, indents, distances, frames and pagination.

Determines the dialog box for setting section attributes like page size and orientation, page margins, headers and footers, page columns and page frames.

Determines the dialog box for defining tabulators.

Determines the dialog box for setting table attributes like frame width and frame color, text distances, cell height and vertical alignment.

Determines the dialog box for defining a text background color.

Determines the dialog box for setting textframe attributes like layout options and position, size, scaling, text distances and frame options.

Begins a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between BeginUndoAction and EndUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step. The specified user-defined name is available with the UndoActionName property.

Specifies the undo action's name.

Ends a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between BeginUndoAction and EndUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step.

Returns a view generator for the specified built-in dialog box.

Specifies which kind of dialog box is represented through the view generator.

Returns a view generator for the specified built-in dialog box and selects the specified dialog box tab.

Specifies which kind of dialog box is represented through the view generator. Specifies an zero-based index indicating which dialog box tab is selected.

Returns a view generator for a dialog box handling the attributes of the specified pagenumber field.

Specifies the PageNumberField for which the dialog box is opened.

Returns a view generator for a dialog box handling the attributes of the specified form field.

Specifies the FormField for which the dialog box is opened.

Raises the BarcodeDeselected event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeSelected event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CannotTrackChange event.

Specifies a CannotTrackChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartDeselected event.

Specifies an ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ChartSelected event.

Specifies an ChartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CaretStateChanged event.

Specifies a ServerVisualization.CaretStateEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the Changed event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CharFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentChanged event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentedTextEntered event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentedTextLeft event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentStateChanged event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentLinkClicked event.

Specifies an DocumentLinkEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentSizeChanged event.

Specifies a ServerVisualization.DocumentSizeChangedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawCombobox event.

Specifies a ServerVisualization.DrawComboboxEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawDateControl event.

Specifies a ServerVisualization.DrawDateControlEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeselected event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingSelected event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawShape event.

Specifies a ServerVisualization.DrawShapeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionEntered event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionLeft event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteReferenceMarkEntered event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteReferenceMarkLeft event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteSectionActivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteSectionDeactivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormattingStyleChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormattingStyleListChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldCheckChanged event.

Specifies a CheckFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldDateChanged event.

Specifies a DateFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldSelectionChanged event.

Specifies a SelectionFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldSettingsChanged event.

Specifies a FormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldTextChanged event.

Specifies a TextFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameDeselected event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameMoved event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameSelected event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameSized event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HeaderFooterActivated event.

Specifies an HeaderFooterEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HeaderFooterDeactivated event.

Specifies an HeaderFooterEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HypertextLinkClicked event.

Specifies an HypertextLinkEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDeselected event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageSelected event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputFormattingStyleChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputParagraphChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputPositionChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the MainTextActivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the PageFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ParagraphFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the RemoveCombobox event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the RemoveDateControl event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldDeselected event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldSelected event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartClicked event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartEntered event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartLeft event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsEntered event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsLeft event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextContextMenuOpening event.

Specifies an ServerVisualization.TextContextMenuEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldClicked event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldEntered event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldLeft event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameActivated event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeactivated event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeselected event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameSelected event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeChanged event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeStateChanged event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Redoes the last TextViewGenerator operation.

Undoes the last edit operation in the TextViewGenerator.

Zooms the contents of the TextViewGenerator using the specified zoom factor.

Specifies the zoom factor, in percent.

Zooms the contents of the TextViewGenerator using the specified option.

Specifies one of the ZoomOption values.

Gets or sets a value indicating the current activation state of the text view generator.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the view generator can be a source of a Drag&Drop operation.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the view generator can accept data that the user drags onto it.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the undo buffer is active or not.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with character formatting attributes.

Informs whether a part of a document has been selected and can be copied to the clipboard.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with page and section formatting attributes.

Informs whether the document's text and/or formatting attributes can be changed.

Informs whether form fields can be edited.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with paragraph formatting attributes.

Informs whether the clipboard contains a format that can be pasted into a document.

Informs whether the document can be printed.

Informs whether an operation can be re-done.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with formatting styles.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with table formatting attributes.

Gets a value indicating whether the user can undo the previous operation.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether all the commented texts in the document are highlighted.

Specifies if control characters are visible or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating the measuring unit used for sizes and distances in dialogboxes.

Gets or sets display colors.

Gets a DocumentPermissions object which provides properties determining how a document can be edited and formatted when the EditMode property is set to EditMode.ReadAndSelect.

Gets or sets a value indicating that markers for hypertext targets are shown or not.

Specifies whether a marker frame is shown around a drawing to indicate its position and size.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether all the editable regions in the document are highlighted.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the document's text is read-only, can be selected or is editable.

Gets an object of the type InputFormat which represents all formatting attributes at the current text input position.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether Conditional Instructions are applied to form fields when the EditMode property is set to EditMode.ReadAndSelect and TextViewGenerator.DocumentPermissions.ReadOnly to true.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether track changes is active or not.

Gets or sets a location, in pixels.

Gets or sets a value indicating which control characters are shown permanently.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the Redo method is made.

Gets or sets a resolution, in dots per inch (dpi).

Specifies the horizontal ruler bar to be used with the TextViewGenerator.

Gets or sets a value controlling the selection of objects which are inserted behind the text.

Specifies the status bar to be used with the TextViewGenerator.

Specifies whether text frames that have no border line are shown with marker lines.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the Undo method is made.

Gets the UserInput object, which can be used to inform the TextViewGenerator about user input.

Gets or sets a list of names specifying users who have access to editable regions.

Specifies the vertical ruler bar to be used with the TextViewGenerator.

Gets the View object, which informs about view changes and provides an image of the TextViewGenerator's current state.

Gets or sets the mode how a document is displayed.

Occurs when a barcode has been deselected.

Occurs when a barcode has been selected.

Determines how to handle a change of the document that cannot be added to the list of tracked changes.

Indicates that the contents of a document have been changed.

Occurs when a chart has been deselected.

Occurs when a chart has been selected.

Occurs when the state of the caret (size, position, visibility) has been changed.

Occurs when the character formatting attributes either of the selected characters or the current text input position have been changed.

Occurs when the text of a comment has been altered.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a commented piece of text.

Occurs when the current input position has left a commented piece of text.

Occurs when the state of a comment alters from active to inactive or vice versa.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on that represents a link to a target in the document.

Occurs when the size of the document has been changed.

Occurs when a combobox for a SelectionFormField must be drawn.

Occurs when a date control for a DateFormField must be drawn.

Occurs when a drawing has been deselected.

Occurs when a drawing has been selected.

Occurs when additional user-interaction parts must be drawn.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to an editable region.

Occurs when the current input position has left an editable region.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to the position of a footnote reference mark.

Occurs when the current input position has left the position of a footnote reference mark.

Occurs when the footnote section of a document's page gets the current text input position from another part of the document.

Occurs when the footnote section of a document's page has lost the current text input position.

Occurs after formatting attributes of one or more formatting styles have been changed.

Occurs after one or more formatting styles have been added or removed or if the name of an existing style has been changed.

Occurs when the checkmark of a CheckFormField has been changed from checked to unchecked or vice versa.

Occurs when the date of a DateFormField has been changed.

Occurs when the selected item of a SelectionFormField has been changed.

Occurs when the name, the id and/or formatting attributes of a CheckFormField, TextFormField, SelectionFormField or DateFormField have been changed.

Occurs when the text of a TextFormField has been changed.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been deselected.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been moved.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been selected.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been sized.

Occurs when a header or footer gets the current text input position from another part of the document such as a textframe or the main text.

Occurs when a header or footer loses the current text input position and another part of the document such as a textframe or the main text gets it.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on that represents the source of a hypertext link.

Occurs when an image has been deselected.

Occurs when an image has been selected.

Occurs after the text input position has been moved to a text part formatted with another style.

Occurs when the text input position has been moved to another paragraph.

Occurs when the text input position has been changed.

Occurs when the main text of the document gets the current text input position from another part of the document, such as a header, a footer or a textframe.

Occurs when the page format settings have been changed.

Occurs when the formatting attributes of the selected paragraphs have been changed.

Occurs when a combobox for a SelectionFormField must be removed.

Occurs when the date control of a DateFormField must be removed.

Occurs when a dialog box should be shown.

Occurs when an error message should be shown.

Occurs when a signature field has been deselected.

Occurs when a signature field has been selected.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been clicked on.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been double-clicked on.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a subtextpart.

Occurs when the current input position has left a subtextpart.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a table of contents.

Occurs when the current input position has left a table of contents.

Occurs when a right mouse click is sent as user input and a context menu should be opened.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a text field.

Occurs when the current input position has left a text field.

Occurs when a text frame gets the current text input position from another part of the document such as a header, a footer or the main text.

Occurs when a text frame loses the current text input position and another part of the document such as a header, a footer or the main text gets it.

Occurs when a text frame has been deselected.

Occurs when a text frame has been selected.

Occurs when the text of a tracked change has been altered.

Occurs when the state of a tracked change alters from active to inactive or vice versa.

The TextViewGenerator.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a TextViewGenerator component.

Initializes a new instance of the TextViewGenerator.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their default values.

Resets the text control's ActiveFormFieldColor to its default value.

Resets the text control's DarkShadowColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's DesktopColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's FormFieldColor to its default value.

Resets the text control's HeaderFooterLabelColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's HeaderFooterLineColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the text control's LightShadowColor to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a form field containing the current text input position.

Gets or sets the display color for the shadow at the right and the bottom edge of the pages.

Gets or sets the display color for the area around the pages.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a form field.

Gets or sets the display color for the label showing which header or footer is activated.

Gets or sets the display color for the dividing line between headers and footers and the main text.

Gets or sets the display color for the shadow at the left and the top edge of the pages.

An instance of the UserInput class can be used to inform a view generator about user input.

Determines a pressed mouse button.

No mouse button was pressed.

The left mouse button was pressed.

The right mouse button was pressed.

The middle mouse button was pressed.

The first XButton button was pressed.

The second XButton button was pressed.

Determines a pressed modifier key.

No modifier key was pressed.

The SHIFT key was pressed.

The CTRL key was pressed.

The ALT key was pressed.

Informs the view generator about a key down event.

Specifies the virtual key code for the pressed key. Specifies modifier keys.

Informs the view generator about a key press event.

Specifies the translated character code for the pressed key. Specifies modifier keys.

Informs the view generator about a key up event.

Specifies the virtual key code for the pressed key. Specifies modifier keys.

Informs the view generator about a mouse double click event.

Specifies the location, where the mouse double click event occurs. Specifies the pressed mouse button. Specifies modifier keys.

Informs the view generator about a mouse down event.

Specifies the location, where the mouse down event occurs. Specifies the pressed mouse button. Specifies modifier keys.

Informs the view generator about a mouse move event.

Specifies the location, where the mouse move event occurs. Specifies a pressed mouse button. Specifies modifier keys.

Informs the view generator about a mouse up event.

Specifies the location, where the mouse up event occurs. Specifies a pressed mouse button. Specifies modifier keys.

Informs the view generator about a mouse wheel event.

Specifies the location, where the mouse wheel event occurs. Indicates the distance the wheel is rotated, expressed in multiples or divisions of 120. Specifies a pressed mouse button. Specifies modifier keys.

An instance of the View class represents a part of a document for which an image can be generated.

This property gets the minimum amout of the visible page background.

Returns the cursor kind for a certain location in a document.

Specifies the location for which the cursor kind is returned.

Gets an image as a System.Drawing.Imaging.Bitmap.

Gets a clipping of the image as a System.Drawing.Imaging.Bitmap.

Specifies the clipping, in pixels, relative to the top-left corner of the image, determined through the View.Location and View.Size properties.

Gets an image as an array of bytes in Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved.

Gets a clipping of an image as an array of bytes in Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies the clipping, in pixels, relative to the top-left corner of the image, determined through the View.Location and View.Size properties.

Gets a clipping of an image as a string in Scalable Vector Graphics (.SVG) format. The clipping can be specified either through a rectangle or through a range of lines. All characters are contained with outline curve data that are cubic Bézier splines. Curve and line data coordinates are in twentieth of a point (twips). Images of all pixel-formats are embedded in Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format.

Specifies the clipping, in pixels, relative to the top-left corner of the image, determined through the View.Location and View.Size properties. Specifies the first of a range of lines, one-based, determining the returned image. Specifies the last of a range of lines, one-based, determining the returned image. Specifies a maximum resolution value, in dots per inch, for images in pixel-formats.

Returns the coordinates of the smallest rectangle that completely encloses the update region. When the document's visible part changes, a Changed event occurs and the changed part is added to the view's update region. The bValidate parameter can be used to reset the current update region to an empty rectangle. When the document's visible part changes because the document has been scrolled, the Changed event informs about the changed part, but it is not added to the update region.

Validates the current update region and resets it to an empty rectangle.

Raises the AutoHScroll event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the AutoVScroll event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the view's Changed event.

Specifies an ViewChangedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the View's Zoomed event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Gets or sets the view's location, in twips.

Gets or sets the view's size, in twips.

Gets or sets the zoom factor, in percent, with which the View object generates the image.

Occurs when the horizontal location of the view has been changed automatically.

Occurs when the vertical location of the view has been changed automatically.

Occurs after the contents of the View object's image have been changed.

Occurs after the View object's zoom factor has been changed.

The ViewChangedEventArgs class provides data for the View.Changed event.

Gets the rectangular area, in pixels, which is affected through the changes.

Gets the amount the document has been scrolled.

Gets a value which determines whether the change is the result of scrolling, either through setting the view's location in the document or through autoscrolling initiated through the control when the input position leaves the visible part of the document.

Specifies identifiers to indicate the return value of a dialog box.

Specifies that the dialog box has been canceled.

Specifies that the dialog box has been left with the Escape key.

Specifies that the dialog box has been left with OK.

The WPF.BookmarkDialog class implements a dialog box to insert a DocumentTarget at the current input position.

Creates a BookmarkDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl. If there is a target at the current input position, the name of the target is shown and can be edited. Otherwise a new DocumentTarget can be inserted at the current input position.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Creates a BookmarkDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl. If the specified DocumentTarget is not null, the name of the target is shown and can be edited. Otherwise a new DocumentTarget can be inserted at the current input position.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened. Specifies the DocumentTarget to edit.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a WPF.BookmarkDialog dialog box.

Identifies the Bookmark Name label.

Identifies the Bookmark Name text box.

Identifies the Bookmark Names label.

Identifies the Bookmark Names list box.

Identifies the Deletable check box.

Identifies the OK button.

Identifies the Cancel button.

The BooleanConverter class provides a way to convert a value to a boolean value.

Converts a value to a boolean. True is returned, if the specified parameter is the string representation of value.

The value produced by the binding source. The type of the binding target property. The converter parameter to use. The culture to use in the converter.

Converts a boolean to a value of the type specified through the targetType parameter.

The boolean value that is produced by the binding target. The type to convert to. The converter parameter to use. The culture to use in the converter.

The WPF.ButtonBar class represents a tool bar which can be used to show or to set font and paragraph attributes of a WPF.TextControl.

Each ButtonBarItem represents an item in a WPF.ButtonBar.

Identifies the StyleName combobox.

Identifies the FontFamily combobox.

Identifies the FontSize combobox.

Identifies the ZoomFactor combobox.

Identifies the Bold button.

Identifies the Italic button.

Identifies the Underline button.

Identifies the Strikeout button.

Identifies the Subscript button.

Identifies the Superscript button.

Identifies the IncreaseFont button.

Identifies the DecreaseFont button.

Identifies the LeftAligned button.

Identifies the Centered button.

Identifies the RightAligned button.

Identifies the Justified button.

Identifies the DecreaseIndent button.

Identifies the IncreaseIndent button.

Identifies the LeftToRight button.

Identifies the RightToLeft button.

Identifies the BulletedList button.

Identifies the NumberedList button.

Identifies the StructuredList button.

Identifies the ControlChars button.

The WPF.ColorConverter class provides a way to convert a System.Drawing.Color value to System.Windows.Media.Color value.

Converts a System.Drawing.Color value to System.Windows.Media.Color value.

The value produced by the binding source. The type of the binding target property. This parameter is not used and can be set to null. The culture to use in the converter.

Converts a System.Windows.Media.Color to a System.Drawing.Color value.

The System.Windows.Media.Color value that is produced by the binding target. The type to convert to. This parameter is not used and can be set to null. The culture to use in the converter.

The CommentsDialog class implements a dialog box that shows all comments of the document.

Creates a CommentsDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a WPF.CommentsDialog dialog box.

Identifies the comments count label.

Identifies the refresh comments button.

Identifies the comments viewer.

Identifies the delete comment button.

Identifies the delete all comments button.

Identifies the edit comment button.

Identifies the reply comment button.

Identifies the close button.

The DeleteBookmarksDialog class implements a dialog box which shows all targets in the current document.

Creates a DeleteBookmarksDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a WPF.DeleteBookmarksDialog dialog box.

Identifies the bookmark list label.

Identifies the bookmark listbox.

Identifies the Delete button.

Identifies the Goto button.

Identifies the Cancel button.

The GotoDialog class implements a dialog box which can be used to move the current input position to a certain page, section, line, table or bookmark.

Creates a GotoDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a WPF.GotoDialog dialog box.

Identifies the label of the Go to listbox.

Identifies the Go to listbox.

Identifies the label of the Number textbox.

Identifies the Number textbox.

Identifies the Bookmark listbox.

Identifies the Previous button.

Identifies the Next button.

Identifies the Close button.

The WPF.HyperlinkDialog class implements a built-in dialog box for inserting and editing a hyperlink at the current text input position.

Creates a HyperlinkDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a WPF.HyperlinkDialog dialog box.

Identifies the Hyperlink text label.

Identifies the Hyperlink text edit control.

Identifies the Hyperlink label.

Identifies the Hyperlink edit control.

Identifies the Select File button.

Identifies the bookmark list label.

Identifies the bookmark listbox.

Identifies the Show Bookmarks label.

Identifies the Current Document radio button.

Identifies the Selected File radio button.

Identifies the Delete Hyperlink button.

Identifies the OK button.

Identifies the Cancel button.

The class WPF.LogarithmicConverter converts a numeric value from a linear scale to a logarithmic scale.

Converts an integer or a double precision floating point value to an integer or a double precision floating point value.

The value produced by the binding source. The type of the binding target property. The converter parameter. The culture to use in the converter.

Converts an integer or a double precision floating point value to an integer or a double precision floating point value.

The numeric value that is produced by the binding target. The type of the binding source. The converter parameter. The culture to use in the converter.

Sets or gets the lower bound of the source value range.

Sets or gets the numeric value of the source value range which will be mapped to the center of the target value range.

Sets or gets the upper bound of the source value range.

Sets or gets the lower bound of the target value range.

Sets or gets the upper bound of the target value range.

The MeasureConverter class provides a way to convert a measure in twips (twentieth of a point) to a value in another measuring unit.

Converts a value from twips to another meaasuring unit.

The value produced by the binding source. The type of the binding target property. The converter parameter to use. The culture to use in the converter.

Converts a value from another measuring unit to twips.

The value that is produced by the binding target. The type to convert to. The converter parameter to use. The culture to use in the converter.

Gets or sets the number of decimals for the converted value.

Gets or sets the measuring unit for the conversion.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether all decimals set with the Decimals property are shown, when the result is a string.

The WPF.MiniToolbarInitializedEventArgs class provides data for the WPF.TextControl.TextMiniToolbarInitialized or WPF.TextControl.ObjectMiniToolbarInitialized event of a WPF.TextControl just after the pre-defined WPF.TextMiniToolbar or WPF.ObjectMiniToolbar was created.

Considering which event (WPF.TextControl.TextMiniToolbarInitialized or WPF.TextControl.ObjectMiniToolbarInitialized) is raised the property provides an object of type WPF.TextMiniToolbar or WPF.ObjectMiniToolbar that can be altered, extended or completely replaced.

The ObjectMiniToolbar class is a mini toolbar that appears when the ShowMiniToolbar property is set to MiniToolbarButton.RightButton or MiniToolbarButton.LeftButton | MiniToolbarButton.RightButton, the right mouse button is released and the current context is a selected text frame, drawing frame or barcode frame (ContextMenuLocation.SelectedFrame).

Each RibbonItem represents an item in a WPF.ObjectMiniToolbar.

Identifies the BordersandBackground group for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Back Color button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Transparency button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Line Width button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the Border Color button for the selected text frame.

Identifies the BordersandBackground group for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Back Color button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Transparency button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Line Color button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the Line Width button for the selected drawing frame.

Identifies the ColorsAndAlignment group for the selected barcode frame.

Identifies the Back Color button for the selected barcode frame.

Identifies the Fore Color button for the selected barcode frame.

Identifies the Transparency button for the selected barcode frame.

The ResourceProvider class provides static methods to receive bitmaps or strings from sources that can be accessed via an assigned identifier.

Each FileMenuItem represents the identifier for a file menu item.

Represents the TXITEM_New file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Open file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Save file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_SaveAs file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Print file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_PrintQuick file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_PrintPreview file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Options file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_UserAdministration file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_GrantUserAccess file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_About file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Exit file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_DocumentSettings file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each GeneralItem represents the identifier for a general item.

Represents the general TXITEM_Checkmark item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Checked item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Unchecked item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Launcher item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Close item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Pinned item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Unpinned item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Plus item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Minus item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Undo item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_Redo item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToFirst item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToPrevious item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToNext item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToLast item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_AdvancedSettings item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Add item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Remove item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Each ShapeItem represents a gallery item inside the RibbonInsertTab's TXITEM_InsertShape drop-down menu.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Line gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BentConnector3 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedConnector3 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Rectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RoundRectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Snip1Rectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Snip2SameRectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Snip2DiagonalRectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_SnipRoundRectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Round1Rectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Round2SameRectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Round2DiagonalRectangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Ellipse gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Triangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightTriangle gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Parallelogram gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_NonIsoscelesTrapezoid gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Diamond gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Pentagon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Hexagon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Heptagon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Octagon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Decagon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Dodecagon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Pie gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Chord gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Teardrop gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Frame gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_HalfFrame gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Corner gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DiagonalStripe gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Plus gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Plaque gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Can gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Cube gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Bevel gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Donut gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_NoSmoking gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BlockArc gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FoldedCorner gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_SmileyFace gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Heart gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LightningBolt gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Sun gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Moon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Cloud gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Arc gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BracketPair gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BracePair gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftBracket gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightBracket gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftBrace gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightBrace gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UpArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DownArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftRightArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UpDownArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_QuadArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftRightUpArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BentArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UTurnArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftUpArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BentUpArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedRightArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedLeftArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedUpArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedDownArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_StripedRightArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_NotchedRightArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_HomePlate gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Chevron gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightArrowCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DownArrowCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftArrowCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UpArrowCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftRightArrowCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_QuadArrowCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CircularArrow gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathPlus gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathMinus gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathMultiply gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathDivide gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathEqual gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathNotEqual gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartProcess gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartAlternateProcess gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDecision gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartInputOutput gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPredefinedProcess gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartInternalStorage gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDocument gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMultidocument gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartTerminator gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPreparation gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartManualInput gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartManualOperation gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartConnector gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartOffpageConnector gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPunchedCard gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPunchedTape gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartSummingJunction gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartOr gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartCollate gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartSort gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartExtract gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMerge gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartOnlineStorage gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDelay gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMagneticTape gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMagneticDisk gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMagneticDrum gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDisplay gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_IrregularSeal1 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_IrregularSeal2 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star4 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star5 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star6 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star7 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star8 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star10 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star12 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star16 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star24 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star32 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Ribbon2 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Ribbon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_EllipseRibbon2 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_EllipseRibbon gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_VerticalScroll gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_HorizontalScroll gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Wave gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DoubleWave gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_WedgeRectangleCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_WedgeRoundRectangleCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_WedgeEllipseCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CloudCallout gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BorderCallout1 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BorderCallout2 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BorderCallout3 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentCallout1 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentCallout2 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentCallout3 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Callout1 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Callout2 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Callout3 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentBorderCallout1 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentBorderCallout2 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentBorderCallout3 gallery item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Each BarcodeItem represents a drop-down item inside the RibbonInsertTab's TXITEM_Insert_Barcode drop-down menu.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_QRCode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code128 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_EAN13 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_UPCA drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_EAN8 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Interleaved2of5 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Postnet drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code39 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_AztecCode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_IntelligentMail drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Datamatrix drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_PDF417 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_MicroPDF drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Codabar drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_FourState drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code11 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code93 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_PLANET drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_RoyalMail drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Maxicode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Gets the key tip that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested key tip.

Gets the key tip that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested key tip. Specifies the language in which the key tip is returned.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the large image.

Gets a large System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in a specific resolution.

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific framework element.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the framework element from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific framework element and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the framework element from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the large image.

Gets a large System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in the resolution of the specified framework element.

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies the framework element from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the small image.

Gets a small System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in a specific resolution.

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific framework element.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the framework element from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets a System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific framework element and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the framework element from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the small image.

Gets a small System.Windows.Media.Imaging.BitmapSource icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in the resolution of the specified framework element.

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies the framework element from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets the text that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested text.

Gets the text that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested text. Specifies the language in which the text is returned.

Gets the tool tip description that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip description.

Gets the tool tip description that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip description. Specifies the language in which the tool tip description is returned.

Gets the tool tip title that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip title.

Gets the tool tip title that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip title. Specifies the language in which the tool tip title is returned.

The ImageSourceSettings class provides properties for advanced settings to receive an image by using the ResourceProvider.GetSmallIcon and ResourceProvider.GetLargeIcon methods.

Initializes a new instance of the ResourceProvider.ImageSourceSettings class.

Specifies the culture to receive a language related image.

Specifies the fill color of editable scopes inside the related image.

Specifies the stroke color of editable scopes inside the related image.

The RibbonFormFieldsTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for inserting and editing form fields.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonFormFieldsTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFormFieldsTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTextFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertCheckBoxField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertComboBoxField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertDropDownListField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertDateFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemoveFormFieldsContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightFormFields ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableFormValidation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightInvalidValues ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousInvalidValueFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextInvalidValueFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebar ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldName_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldID_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldID ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckedSymbolLabel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbolLabel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckedSymbol ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbol ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFormFieldEmptyWidth_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFormFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFormFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldEmptyWidth_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NewDropDownListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteDropDownListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListItems ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding KeyTip resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListItemMoveUp ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListItemMoveDown ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldEmptyWidth_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NewComboBoxListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComboBoxListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxListItems ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding KeyTip resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxListItemMoveUp ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxListItemMoveDown ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldEmptyWidth_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormat_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SupportedDateFormats ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonFormFieldsTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckedSymbolList_Characters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_CheckedSymbol's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbolList_Characters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbol's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Specifies the name of the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormFieldsTab's TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions button and its horizontal sidebar drop down button.

Specifies the name of the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormFieldsTab's TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions button and its vertical sidebar drop down button.

The WPF.RibbonFormattingTab class represents a ribbon tab for setting font and paragraph attributes, formatting styles and for handling the clipboard.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFormattingTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Paste ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Cut ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Copy ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FontFamily ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FontSize ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_IncreaseFont ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DecreaseFont ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ClearFormatting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Bold ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Italic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Underline ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Strikeout ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Subscript ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Superscript ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CharacterFormatting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BulletedList ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DecreaseIndent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_IncreaseIndent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LeftToRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RightToLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditTabs ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ControlChars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LeftAligned ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Centered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RightAligned ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Justified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LineSpacing ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Borders ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ParagraphFormatting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StylesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StyleName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_StylesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources. Limitations: The FindName method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument. Use the RibbonItem.TXITEM_Find identifier instead.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindName method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument. Use the RibbonItem.TXITEM_Replace identifier instead.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources. Limitations: The FindName method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument. Use the RibbonItem.TXITEM_Goto identifier instead.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectAll ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectObjects ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonFormattingTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PastePlainText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteImage drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteTextFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteChart drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteBarcode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteDrawing drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Sentence drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Lower drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Upper drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Capitalize drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Toggle drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextBackColor_Transparent drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BulletedList_Characters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BulletedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BulletedList_Format drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BulletedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_ArabicNumbers gallery item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_CapitalLetters gallery item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_Letters gallery item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_RomanNumbers gallery item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_SmallRomanNumbers gallery item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Format drop-down item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_ArabicNumbers gallery item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_CapitalLetters gallery item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_Letters gallery item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_RomanNumbers gallery item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_SmallRomanNumbers gallery item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Format drop-down item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LeftFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TopFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RightFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BottomFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BoxFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InnerHorizontalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InnerVerticalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BackColor_Transparent drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FrameLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FrameLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StyleNames_Format drop-down item inside the TXITEM_StyleName's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Find's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Find's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Replace's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Replace's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Goto's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Goto's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Specifies the name of the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Find button.

Specifies the name of the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Find button.

Specifies the name of the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Replace button.

Specifies the name of the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Replace button.

Specifies the name of the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Goto button.

Specifies the name of the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Goto button.

Specifies the name of the sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_StyleName's Change Styles drop down item.

The RibbonFormulaTab class represents a ribbon tab for editing formulas in table cells.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonFormulaTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFormulaTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormulaTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Formula ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormulaTextBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptFormula ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CancelFormulaEditing ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormulaEditing ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Functions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SupportedFunctions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddFunction ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectCellReferences ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormulaTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellNumberFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellNumberFormatComboBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellAcceptNumberFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellTextType ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellTextTypeText ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellTextTypeNumber ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormulaTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableFormulaCalculation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableR1C1Style ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableA1Style ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowFormulaReferences ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowAllReferences ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

The RibbonFrameLayoutTab class represents a ribbon tab for editing objects of type Image, TextFrame, DrawingFrame and BarcodeFrame.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonFrameLayoutTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFrameLayoutTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectHeight_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectHeight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectHeight_TextBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectWidth_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectWidth_TextBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectName_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectName_TextBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectID_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectID ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectName_TextBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerName_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerName_Textbox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerTitle_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerTitle_Textbox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerAddress_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerAddress ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerAddress_Textbox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerContactInfo_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerContactInfo ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerContactInfo_Textbox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerReason_Image ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerReason ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerReason_Textbox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonFrameLayoutTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_InLineWithText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_TopAndBottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_Square drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_InFrontOfText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_BehindText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_MoreLayoutOptions drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront_ToFront drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BringToFront's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront_Forward drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BringToFront's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront_InFrontOfText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BringToFront's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack_ToBack drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SendToBack's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack_Backward drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SendToBack's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack_BehindText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SendToBack's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_Center drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_OtherPosition drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_0 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_20 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_30 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_40 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_60 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_70 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_80 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth_NoLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth_Single drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth_Double drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineWidth_NoLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_0 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_20 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_30 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_40 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_60 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_70 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_80 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_Right90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_Left90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_FlipVertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_FlipHorizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_MoreRotationOptions drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_0 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_20 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_30 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_40 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_60 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_70 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_80 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment_Center drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment_Top drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment_Middle drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment_Bottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_Right90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_Left90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_180 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_MoreRotationOptions drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

The WPF.RibbonInsertTab class represents a ribbon tab for inserting pages, images, hyperlinks, bookmarks, headers and footers, textframes and symbols.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonInsertTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertPage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertPageBreak ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertImage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertShape ribbon item inside the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertBarcode ribbon item inside the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LinksGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertHyperlink ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LinksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertBookmark ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LinksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertHeader ribbon item inside the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFooter ribbon item inside the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber ribbon item inside the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTextFrame ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFile ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSignature ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SymbolsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSymbol ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SymbolsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonInsertTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableGallery drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertImageDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertImage's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertImagePlaceHolder drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertImage's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LinesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_RectanglesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BasicShapesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BlockArrowsCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_EquationShapesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FlowChartCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StarsAndBannersCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_CalloutsCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertDrawingCanvas drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingMarkerLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertHyperlinkDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHyperlink's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditHyperlink drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHyperlink's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertBookmarkDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteBookmark drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditBookmark drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DocumentTargetMarkers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHeader's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemoveHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHeader's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditFooter drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertFooter's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemoveFooter drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertFooter's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertStandardPageNumber drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormatPageNumber drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemovePageNumber drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddTextFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTextFrame's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameMarkerLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTextFrame's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_MoreSymbols drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSymbol's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

The RibbonPageLayoutTab class represents a tab for editing the page setup and layout.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonPageLayoutTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonPageLayoutTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPageLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageMargins ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Orientation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageSize ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ColumnsAndBreaksGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPageLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ColumnsAndBreaksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ColumnsAndBreaksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPageLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonPageLayoutTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_Orientation_Portrait drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Orientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Orientation_Landscape drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Orientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_One drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_Two drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_Three drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_MoreColumns drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_PageBreaks drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_Page drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_Column drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_TextWrapping drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_SectionBreaks drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_NextPage drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_Continuous drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Top drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Bottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_All drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineWidth_NoLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

The RibbonPermissionsTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for determining how the document can be edited, when it is enforced to be protected.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonPermissionsTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonPermissionsTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_RestrictFormattingGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowFormatting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictFormattingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowFormattingStyles ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictFormattingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowPrinting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowCopy ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FillInFormFields ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ReadOnly ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ReadOnlyExceptionsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Users ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ReadOnlyExceptionsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddUsers ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ReadOnlyExceptionsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnforceProtection ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightEditableRegions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousEditableRegion ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextEditableRegion ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user can add user names by the RibbonPermissionsTab's Add Users dialog that are not represented by the RegisteredUserNames property.

Gets or sets an array of strings that represents those registered user names that can be added by the RibbonPermissionsTab's Add Users dialog.

The RibbonProofingTab class represents a tab for setting proofing options such as spelling, hypheantion or language detection.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonProofingTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonProofingTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableSpellChecking ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableHyphenations ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Thesaurus ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Spelling ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LoadDictionary ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LoadThesaurusFile ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SpellingOptions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CommentsViewMode ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowComments ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources. Limitations: The FindName method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument. Use the RibbonItem.TXITEM_Comments identifier instead.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackChanges ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources. Limitations: The FindName method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument. Use the RibbonItem.TXITEM_TrackedChanges identifier instead.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowMarkup ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LanguageGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DetectLanguages ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LanguageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SetLanguage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LanguageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonProofingTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment_DeleteThisComment drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteComment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment_DeleteThisReply drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteComment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment_DeleteAllComments drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteComment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowComments_AllReviewers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ShowComments's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Comments's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Comments's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptAndMoveToNext drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptThisChange drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptAllChanges drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptAllChangesAndStopTracking drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectAndMoveToNext drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectThisChange drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectAllChanges drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectAllChangesAndStopTracking drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TrackedChanges's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TrackedChanges's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowMarkup_AllReviewers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ShowMarkup's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Specifies the name of the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_Comments button.

Specifies the name of the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_Comments button.

Specifies the name of the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_TrackedChanges button.

Specifies the name of the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_TrackedChanges button.

The RibbonReferencesTab class represents a WPF ribbon tab for creating and editing tables of contents.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonReferencesTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonReferencesTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightFootnoteMarks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesStartNumber ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReferencesTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_UpdateTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ModifyTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReferencesTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCMinimumStructureLevel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCMaximumStructureLevel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCCreateHyperlinks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCShowPageNumbers ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCRightAlignPageNumbers ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ParagraphStructureLevelsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReferencesTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructureLevelStyles ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphStructureLevelsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding KeyTip resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraph ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphStructureLevelsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonReferencesTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_ArabicNumbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_Letters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_CapitalLetters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_RomanNumbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_SmallRomanNumbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphBodyText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel1 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel2 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel3 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel4 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel5 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel6 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel7 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel8 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel9 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

The RibbonReportingTab class represents a WPF ribbon tab to integrate mail merge and reporting functionality.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonReportingTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonReportingTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectMasterTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditDataRelations ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FieldProperties ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeBlocksGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeBlocksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditMergeBlocks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeBlocksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ViewGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FieldNavigation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ViewGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonReportingTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_LoadXMLFile drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_LoadAssembly drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_LoadJSON drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectMasterTable_TablesHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectMasterTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField_TablesHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField_InsertCustomMergeField drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField_HighlightMergeFields drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_IF drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_IncludeText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_Date drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_Next drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_NextIf drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock_TablesHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock_InsertCustomMergeBlock drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock_HighlightMergeBlocks drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Provides the DataSourceManager that is connected with the RibbonReportingTab.

Gets or sets the the name of the sidebar that is connected to the RibbonReportingTab's TXITEM_FieldNavigation button.

The RibbonTableLayoutTab class represents a ribbon tab for editing tables.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonTableLayoutTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonTableLayoutTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableGridLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableProperties ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableRowAbove ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableRowBelow ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableColLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableColRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeTableCells ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTableCells ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableFrameLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopCentered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleCentered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomCentered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopJustified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleJustified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomJustified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonTableLayoutTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableCell drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableCol drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableRow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableAll drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableCell drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableCol drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableRow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableAll drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTableAbove drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SplitTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTableBelow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SplitTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLeftFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableTopFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableRightFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBottomFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBoxFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableAllFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableInnerHorizontalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableInnerVerticalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBackColor_Transparent drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

The RibbonViewTab class represents a tab for customizing the view settings.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonViewTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonViewTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_DocumentViewsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PrintLayout ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DocumentViewsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Draft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DocumentViewsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Zoom100 ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FullPage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HorizontalRuler ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_VerticalRuler ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StatusBar ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowTableGridlines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowBookmarkMarkers ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowTextFrameMarkersLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowDrawingFrameMarkersLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowControlChars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowFrameAnchors ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonViewTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_25 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_75 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_150 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_200 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_400 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

The WPF.RulerBar class represents a tool bar which can be used to show or to set indents, margins and tabs of a WPF.TextControl.

Gets or sets the border style of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the colors of the ruler bar.

Enables or disables the setting of page margins.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the ruler bar shows cell references when the current input position is in a table cell.

Gets or sets the unit of the ruler bar's scale.

The WPF.RulerBarColors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a WPF.RulerBar control.

Initializes a new instance of the WPF.RulerBarColors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the WPF.RulerBar.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Gets or sets the background color at the left or top edge of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the color used for the numbers of the ruler.

Gets or sets the background color at the right or bottom edge of the ruler bar.

Gets or sets the color of the ruler.

Gets or sets the color of dark separators.

Gets or sets the color of light separators.

The Sidebar class represents a container that gives quick access to a System.Windows.FrameworkElement which is either user-defined or a predefined TextControl feature interface.

Initializes a new instance of the Sidebar class.

Each AboutItem represents an item in a predefined About control.

Identifies the 'About' TextControl.

Each CommentsItem represents an item in a predefined Comments control.

Identifies the Comments Count label.

Identifies the Comments Refresh button.

Identifies the Comments overview.

Identifies the Comments Delete button.

Identifies the Comments Edit button.

Identifies the Comments Reply button.

Each ConditionalInstructionsItem represents an item in a predefined ConditionalInstructions control.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions overview label.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions overview.

Identifies the Conditions overview label.

Identifies the Conditions overview.

Identifies the Instructions overview label.

Identifies the Instructions overview.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions New button.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions Edit button.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions Edit button.

Each DocumentSettingsItem represents an item in a predefined Document Settings control.

Identifies the Titel label.

Identifies the Titel text box.

Identifies the Author label.

Identifies the Author text box.

Identifies the Created label.

Identifies the Created Date label.

Identifies the Subject label.

Identifies the Subject text box.

Identifies the Tags label.

Identifies the Tags text box.

Identifies the first vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Custom Properies related controls.

Identifies the Custom Properties +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Custom Properties label.

Identifies the Custom Properties separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_CustomPropertiesListView, TXITEM_AddCustomProperty and TXITEM_DeleteCustomProperty.

Identifies the Add Custom Property button.

Identifies the Delete Custom Property button.

Identifies the second vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Embedded Files related controls.

Identifies the Embedded Files +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Embedded Files label.

Identifies the Embedded Files separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_EmbeddedFilesListView, TXITEM_AddEmbeddedFile, TXITEM_SaveEmbeddedFile, TXITEM_RemoveEmbeddedFile and TXITEM_EditEmbeddedFile.

Identifies the Add Embedded File button.

Identifies the Save Embedded File button.

Identifies the Remove Embedded File button.

Identifies the Edit Embedded File button.

Identifies the tab control that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the Document Info tab page that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the Custom Properties tab page that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the Embedded Files tab page that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Each FieldNavigatorItem represents an item in a predefined FieldNavigator control.

Identifies the Field Navigator search text box.

Identifies the Field Navigator search button.

Identifies the tab control that contains the merge field and merge block tree views.

Identifies the first vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal or dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Merge Field Properties related controls.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_MergeFieldName, TXITEM_MergeFieldNameTextBox, TXITEM_Text, TXITEM_TextTextBox, TXITEM_Format, TXITEM_FormatComboBox, TXITEM_TextBefore, TXITEM_TextBeforeTextBox, TXITEM_TextAfter, TXITEM_TextAfterTextBox, TXITEM_DateFormat, TXITEM_DateFormatComboBox, TXITEM_NumericFormat, TXITEM_NumericFormatComboBox, TXITEM_PreserveFormatting and TXITEM_MergeFieldDelete.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Name label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Name text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Format label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Format combo box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text Before label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text Before text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text After label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text After text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Date / Time Format label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Date / Time Format combo box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Numeric Format label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Numeric Format combo box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Preserve Formatting check box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Delete button.

Identifies the second vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Merge Block Properties related controls.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties label.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_MergeBlockName, TXITEM_MergeBlockNameTextBox and TXITEM_MergeBlockDelete.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties' Name label.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties' Name text box.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties' Delete button.

Each FieldNavigatorItem represents an item in a predefined Find or Replace control.

Identifies the Find What label.

Identifies the Find What text box.

Identifies the Replace With label (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Replace With text box (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Find Options toggle item.

Identifies the Find Options label.

Identifies the Find Options separator.

Identifies the Match Case check box.

Identifies the Match Whole Word check box.

Identifies the Search Up control.

Identifies the Search In Main Text check box.

Identifies the Search In Footnotes check box.

Identifies the Search In Text Frames check box.

Identifies the Search In Header Footers check box.

Identifies the Find Next button.

Identifies the Replace button (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Replace All button (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Cancel button.

Each GotoItem represents an item in a predefined Goto control.

Identifies the label of the Go to list box.

Identifies the Go to list box.

Identifies the label of the Number text box.

Identifies the Number respectively Bookmark combo box.

Identifies the Previous button.

Identifies the Next button.

Identifies the Close button.

Each StylesItem represents an item in a predefined Styles control.

Identifies the styles overview.

Identifies the Show Preview check box.

Identifies the Sort Alphabetical check box.

Identifies the Manage Styles button.

Each TrackedChangesItem represents an item in a predefined TrackedChanges control.

Identifies the tracked changes count label.

Identifies the tracked changes refresh button.

Identifies the tracked changes overview.

Specifies the requested layout that has to be intialized and rendered as sidebar content.

No content is diplayed or can be set.

A custom control can be used as content.

The content represents a panel to navigate through the merge fields of a document.

The content represents a find in text interface.

The content represents a go to interface.

The content represents a find and replace in text interface.

The content represents an overview of all available styles of the document.

The content represents a panel that shows all tracked changes of a document.

The content represents a panel to manage the conditional instructions of a document.

The content represents a panel to manage the settings of a document.

The content represents a panel that shows all comments of a document.

Specifies the requested border and title bar layout of the sidebar dialog.

The dialog's border and title bar equal to the style of a System.Windows.Window where the WindowStyle is set to System.Windows.WindowStyle.SingleBorderWindow and the ResizeMode to System.Windows.ResizeMode.NoResize.

The dialog's border and title bar equal to the style of a System.Windows.Window where the WindowStyle is set to System.Windows.WindowStyle.SingleBorderWindow and the ResizeMode to System.Windows.ResizeMode.CanResize.

The dialog only displays the sidebar. The dialog is not sizable and neither a specific dialog border nor a title bar are set (equivalent to System.Windows.WindowStyle.None and System.Windows.ResizeMode.NoResize).

The dialog only displays the sidebar. The dialog is sizable (equivalent to System.Windows.ResizeMode.CanResizeWithGrip), but neither a specific dialog border nor a title bar are set (System.Windows.WindowStyle.None).

Gets or sets an object of type System.Windows.FrameworkElement that represents the content of the Sidebar.

Determines the content layout that has to be intialized and rendered for the Sidebar.

Gets or sets the location of the dialog where the Sidebar is placed, if the Sidebar.IsPinned property is set to false.

Gets or sets the size of the dialog where the Sidebar is placed, if the Sidebar.IsPinned property is set to false.

Gets or sets the requested border and title bar layout of the sidebar dialog.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar is rendered inside another control (property value is set to true) or displayed as dialog.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar can be sized with the mouse.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar is shown.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar's close button is shown.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar's pin button is shown.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar's title is shown.

Gets or sets the text that is displayed in the title bar of the Sidebar.

Gets or sets the TextControl that is used for the predefined TextControl feature layouts.

Gets or sets the font family of the title bar's text.

Gets or sets the font size of the title bar's text.

Gets or sets the brush of the title bar's text.

The WPF.StatusBar class represents a tool bar which can be used to show the position of the curent text input position and other status information of a WPF.TextControl.

Gets or sets the border style of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Column' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the colors of the status bar.

Gets or sets the font family of the status bar.

Gets or sets the font size of the status bar in device-independent units (1/96th inch).

Gets or sets the font style of the status bar.

Gets or sets the weight or thickness of the status bar's font.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Line' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Page counter' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Page' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Section counter' area of the status bar.

Gets or sets the text in the 'Section' area of the status bar.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the column number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the key state of the CAPSLOCK and the NUMLOCK key and the current insertion mode, insert or overwrite.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the language of the text selection or the text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the line number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the page number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of pages the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the section number of the current text input position.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the number of sections the document consists of.

Specifies whether the status bar shows the current zoom factor.

Specifies whether the status bar displays a track bar instead of a simple number to show and to set the zooming factor.

Gets or sets the text of the status bar.

The WPF.StatusBarColors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a WPF.StatusBar control.

Initializes a new instance of the WPF.StatusBarColors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the WPF.StatusBar.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Gets or sets the background color at the left edge of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color at the bottom of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color in the middle of the status bar.

Gets or sets the background color at the top of the status bar.

Gets or sets the color used for text and numbers.

Gets or sets the color of the status bar's frames.

Gets or sets the background color at the right edge of the status bar.

Gets or sets the color of the dark part of a separator.

Gets or sets the color of the light part of a separator.

The WPF.TextContextMenuEventArgs class provides data for the WPF.TextControl.TextContextMenuOpening event.

Gets the location in the document for which the context menu will be opened.

Gets the horizontal distance between the top-left corner of the screen and the location where the menu is displayed.

Gets or sets the context menu, which will be shown.

Gets the vertical distance between the top-left corner of the screen and the location where the menu is displayed.

The WPF.TextControl class class implements a control with high-level text editing features.

Initializes a new instance of the WPF.TextControl class.

Invokes a built-in dialog box for inserting symbol characters.

Opens a file open dialogbox and appends the selected file to the existing document.

Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Opens a file open dialogbox and appends the selected file with the specified format to the existing document.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified file and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified file stream and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified byte array and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format from the specified string and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Opens a file open dialogbox and appends the selected file with the specified format and special settings to the existing document.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified file and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified file stream and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified byte array and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text with the specified format and special settings from the specified string and appends it to the existing document.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation. Specifies settings on how the document is appended.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Begins a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between BeginUndoAction and EndUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step. The specified user-defined name is available with the UndoActionName property.

Specifies the undo action's name.

Clears the selected text or the character right from the current input position from the Text Control.

Clears the undo buffer of the Text Control.

Opens a dialog box to create a new Conditional Instruction.

Opens a dialog box to edit a specific Conditional Instruction. If the document does not contain a Conditional Instruction with the specified name, the dialog is opened to create such a Conditional Instruction.

Specifies the name of the Conditional Instruction to edit or create.

Copies the current selection in the Text Control to the Clipboard.

Moves the current selection in the Text Control to the Clipboard.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Ends a user-defined undo operation. All editing and fomatting changes made between BeginUndoAction and EndUndoAction belong to the undo operation. These changes are undone or redone in a single step.

Opens the built-in Find dialog box to search for a text string in the text part with the input focus. This can be the main text, a text frame or a header or footer.

Searches for the specified text string in the text part with the input focus. This can be the main text, a text frame or a header or footer. The search starts at the beginning of the text.

Specifies the text to search for.

Searches for the specified text string in the text part with the input focus. This can be the main text, a text frame or a header or footer. The search is done with the specified find options and starts at the specified position.

Specifies the text to search for. Specifies the text position where the search starts, beginning with 0. Specifies search options.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the text color.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for creating, deleting and modifying formatting styles.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for choosing a color for the background of a paragraph or a table cell.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for choosing a color for the frame of a paragraph or a table.

Returns an array of ClipboardFormat values. These values specify all the data formats which are currently available in the clipboard and which can be pasted into a document. If there is no data format available, this method returns null.

Gets an array of strings specifying the names of all currently supported fonts. These fonts depend on the formatting device set with the WPF.TextControl.FormattingPrinter property. The method returns null if the WPF.TextControl has not been completely initialized.

Gets an array of PaperSize structures specifying the names and the size of all currently supported paper sizes. These paper sizes depend on the formatting device set with the WPF.TextControl.FormattingPrinter property.

Returns a collection containing text fields of the specified types.

Specifies types of text fields.

Returns a collection of XML elements. It is an object of the type XmlElementCollection.

Specifies the XML element's name.

Returns an object of the type VersionInfo, which provides information about the installed TX Text Control version.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the language of the selected text.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting formatting attributes of bulleted and numbered lists.

Opens a file Open... dialogbox to select a file and loads the text from that file.

Opens a file Open... dialogbox to select a file in the specified format and loads the text from that file. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Opens a file Open... dialogbox to select a file and loads the text from that file using the specified special settings. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string and loaded using the given special settings.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a LoadSettings object with additional information and settings for the load operation.

Opens a dialog box to add, edit or delete Conditional Instructions inside the document.

Raises the AdaptFont event.

Specifies an AdaptFontEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeClicked event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeCreated event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeDeleted event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeDeselected event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeMoved event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeRightClicked event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeSelected event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the BarcodeSized event.

Specifies an BarcodeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CannotTrackChange event.

Specifies a CannotTrackChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the Changed event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CharFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentChanged event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentCreated event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentDeleted event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentedTextEntered event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentedTextLeft event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the CommentStateChanged event.

Specifies an CommentEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ContentsReset event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentLinkClicked event.

Specifies an DocumentLinkEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentLoaded event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentTargetCreated event.

Specifies an DocumentTargetEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DocumentTargetDeleted event.

Specifies an DocumentTargetEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingActivated event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingClicked event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingCreated event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeactivated event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeleted event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDeselected event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingMoved event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingRightClicked event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingSelected event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the DrawingSized event.

Specifies an DrawingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionCreated event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionDeleted event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionEntered event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the EditableRegionLeft event.

Specifies an EditableRegionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteCreated event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteDeleted event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteReferenceMarkEntered event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteReferenceMarkLeft event.

Specifies a FootnoteEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteSectionActivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FootnoteSectionDeactivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormattingStyleChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormattingStyleListChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldCheckChanged event.

Specifies a CheckFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldDateChanged event.

Specifies a DateFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldSelectionChanged event.

Specifies a SelectionFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldSettingsChanged event.

Specifies a FormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FormFieldTextChanged event.

Specifies a TextFormFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameClicked event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameDeselected event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameLayoutChanged event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameMoved event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameRightClicked event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameSelected event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the FrameSized event.

Specifies an FrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HeaderFooterActivated event.

Specifies an HeaderFooterEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HeaderFooterDeactivated event.

Specifies an HeaderFooterEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HExpanded event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HScroll event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HShrunk event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HypertextLinkClicked event.

Specifies an HypertextLinkEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the HyphenateWord event.

Specifies an HyphenateWordEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageClicked event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageCreated event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDeleted event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDeselected event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageMoved event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageRightClicked event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageSelected event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ImageSized event.

Specifies an ImageEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputFormattingStyleChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputParagraphChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the InputPositionChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the MainTextActivated event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the MiniToolbarOpening event.

Specifies an WPF.MiniToolbarOpeningEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ObjectMiniToolbarInitialized event.

Specifies a WPF.MiniToolbarInitializedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the PageChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the PageFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the ParagraphFormatChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SectionChanged event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldClicked event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldCreated event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldDeleted event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldDeselected event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SignatureFieldSelected event.

Specifies an SignatureFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SpellCheckText event.

Specifies an SpellCheckTextEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartClicked event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartCreated event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartDeleted event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartEntered event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the SubTextPartLeft event.

Specifies an SubTextPartEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableCreated event.

Specifies an TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableDeleted event.

Specifies an TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableFormatChanged event.

Specifies an TableEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsCreated event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsDeleted event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsEntered event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TableOfContentsLeft event.

Specifies an TableOfContentsEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextContextMenuOpening event.

Specifies an WPF.TextContextMenuEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldChanged event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldClicked event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldCreated event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldDeleted event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldEntered event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFieldLeft event.

Specifies an TextFieldEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameActivated event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameAppearanceChanged event.

Specifies a TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameClicked event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameCreated event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeactivated event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeleted event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDeselected event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameDoubleClicked event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameMoved event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameRightClicked event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameSelected event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextFrameSized event.

Specifies an TextFrameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TextMiniToolbarInitialized event.

Specifies a WPF.MiniToolbarInitializedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeChanged event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeCreated event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeDeleted event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the TrackedChangeStateChanged event.

Specifies an TrackedChangeEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the VExpanded event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the VScroll event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the VShrunk event.

Specifies an EventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the XmlInvalid event.

Specifies an XmlErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Raises the XmlNotWellFormed event.

Specifies an XmlErrorEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the page color.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Replaces the current selection in the Text Control with the contents of the Clipboard. If the data in the clipboard are provided in several formats, the format with the maximum of information is used.

Replaces the current selection in the Text Control with the contents of the Clipboard. Only data provided in the specified format is inserted.

Specifies the format to paste.

Converts a Point in document coordinates, which are in twips relative to the top-left corner of the whole document, into a Point that represents the current coordinate system of the TextControl.

Specifies a point in document coordinates.

Converts a Point that represents the current coordinate system of the TextControl into a point in document coordinates, which are in twips relative to the top-left corner of the whole document.

Specifies a point that represents the current coordinate system of the TextControl.

Opens the standard print dialog to get printer settings and prints the document.

Specifies the document's name. If this parameter is set to true, the dialog box is initialized with the user settings of the previous call.

Prints a Text Control document with the standard printer using the specified page range, copy count and collation settings.

Specifies the document's name. Specifies a System.Windows.Controls.PageRange structure specifying the range of pages to print. Specifies the number of copies to print. Specifies a System.Printing.Collation member specifying whether the printer collates output.

Prints a Text Control document with the specified printer using the specified page range, copy count and collation settings.

Specifies the document's name. Specifies the name of the printer to which the output is sent. Specifies a System.Windows.Controls.PageRange structure specifying the range of pages to print. Specifies the number of copies to print. Specifies a System.Printing.Collation member specifying whether the printer collates output.

Redoes the last Text Control operation.

Opens the built-in Replace dialog box.

Deletes the entire contents of a Text Control.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file with special settings. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Opens a file Save As... dialogbox and saves the complete contents of a document in a user-specified file with special settings. The dialogbox offers the specified file format filters and additional options.

Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation. Specifies one or more of the SaveSettings.DialogSettings values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file stream with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file stream using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified byte array using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Saves the complete contents of a document as a string using the specified format and special settings.

Specifies a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values. Specifies a SaveSettings object with additional information and settings for the save operation.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Selects text within the Text Control.

Specifies the selection's start position. Specifies the number of selected characters.

Selects all text in the Text Control.

Selects the word at the current text input position.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for correcting misspelled words.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for correcting misspelled words using the specified dictionary for making suggestions.

Specifies the dictionary used for making suggestions.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting tabs.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for inserting or changing a table of contents. If the current text input position is in an existing table of contents, the dialog box shows its attributes and the user can change it. Otherwise, a new table of contents is inserted with the specified attributes.

Invokes the built-in dialog box for setting the background color of the text.

Opens the dialog box showing the last opened tab.

Opens the dialog box showing the specified tab.

Specifies the index of the tab, zero-based, that is displayed when the tabbed dialog box is opened.

Undoes the last edit operation in the Text Control.

Zooms the contents of the TextControl using the specified zoom factor.

Specifies the zoom factor, in percent.

Zooms the contents of the TextControl using the specified option.

Specifies one of the ZoomOption values.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether pressing the TAB key types a TAB character in the control instead of moving the focus to the next control in the tab order.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control can be a source of a Drag&Drop operation.

Inherited from System.Windows.UIElement.

Gets a collection of all application fields contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets values that enable automatic expansion or shrinking of a Text Control's width or height depending on the currently contained text.

Gets a collection of all barcodes contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the baseline alignment, in twips, of the Text Control.

Gets or sets the border thickness of the Text Control.

Specifies the button bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with character formatting attributes.

Informs whether a part of a Text Control document has been selected and can be copied to the clipboard.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with page and section formatting attributes.

Informs whether the document's text and/or formatting attributes can be changed.

Informs whether form fields can be edited.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with paragraph formatting attributes.

Informs whether the clipboard contains a format that can be pasted into a Text Control document.

Informs whether the document can be printed.

Informs whether an operation can be re-done using the Redo method.

Informs whether the document can be formatted with formatting styles.

Informs whether the currently selected text can be formatted with table formatting attributes.

Gets a value indicating whether the user can undo the previous operation in a Text Control.

Gets or sets the width of the caret in pixels.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether all the commented texts in the document are highlighted.

Gets a collection of all comments contained in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies if control characters are visible or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating the measuring unit used for sizes and distances in dialogboxes.

Gets or sets the colors of the text control.

Gets a collection of all document links contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a DocumentPermissions object which provides properties determining how a document can be edited and formatted when the EditMode property is set to EditMode.ReadAndSelect.

Gets a DocumentSettings object providing properties which inform about general document settings, such as author and title, contained in the document the user is currently working on.

Gets or sets a value indicating that markers for hypertext targets are shown or not.

Gets a collection of all targets contained in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies whether a marker frame is shown around a drawing to indicate its position and size.

Gets a collection of all drawings contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the formats of data the control can accept when the user drags it onto the control.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether all the editable regions in the document are highlighted.

Gets a collection of all editable regions contained in the document.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether text in the Text Control is read-only, can be selected or is editable.

Gets or sets the cursor that is displayed when the mouse pointer is over a marked text field.

Gets or sets the font family of the text control.

Gets a FontSettings object which provides properties determining which fonts can be used in a document.

Gets or sets the font size of the text control in device-independent units (1/96th inch).

Gets or sets the font style of the text control.

Gets or sets the underlining style for the text displayed by the control.

Gets or sets the weight or thickness of the text control's font.

Gets a collection of all footnotes contained in the main text of the document.

Gets or sets the name of a printer the text dimensions and capabilities of which are used to format the document.

Gets a collection of all form fields contained in the document.

Gets or sets a value determining how references to table cells in formulas are specified.

Gets a collection of all images, textframes, barcodes and drawings contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all pages in the document.

Gets or sets a value specifying the activation style for headers and footers.

Gets or sets a value specifying the frame for activated headers and footers.

Gets a collection of all headers and footers the current document contains.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the selected text in the Text Control remains highlighted when the control loses focus.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a horizontal scroll bar is shown.

Gets a collection of all hypertext links contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all images contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all inline styles the current document contains.

Gets an object of the type InputFormat which represents all formatting attributes at the current text input position.

Gets or sets the current text input position.

Specifies whether text is inserted or overwrites existing text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether Conditional Instructions are applied to form fields when the EditMode property is set to EditMode.ReadAndSelect and TextControl.DocumentPermissions.ReadOnly to true.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether formulas in tables are automatically calculated when the text of an input cell is changed.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether hyphenation is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether language detection is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether spell checking is active or not.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a text control is included in tab navigation.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether track changes is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the undo buffer is active or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the page orientation is landscape or portrait.

Gets a collection of all lines contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the type and the formatting attributes of a bulleted or numbered list.

Gets a collection of all misspelled words contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the margins for the pages of the current document.

Gets the number of pages contained in the current document.

Specifies the width and height of the pages for the current document.

Gets or sets the measure used for page sizes and page margins.

Gets or sets the paragraph formatting attributes of the text displayed by the control.

Gets a collection of all paragraphs contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all paragraph styles the current document contains.

Gets or sets a value indicating which control characters are shown permanently on the screen.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the Redo method is made.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonFormattingTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonFormFieldsTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonFormulaTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonFrameLayoutTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonInsertTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonPageLayoutTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonPermissionsTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonReferencesTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonReportingTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonProofingTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonTableLayoutTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the name of the WPF.RibbonViewTab object to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the horizontal ruler bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Gets or sets the coordinates, in twips, of the upper-left corner of the document's visible part relative to the upper-left corner of the complete document.

Gets a collection of all sections in the document.

Gets or sets the current selection in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies whether text selections are displayed with a transparent bitmap or through inverting the text.

Gets or sets a value controlling the selection of objects which are inserted behind the text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether a mini-toolbar is shown.

Gets a collection of all signature fields contained in the main text of the document.

Specifies the context menu which is used when the end-user right-clicks a misspelled word.

Specifies the spell checking component to be used with a TextControl.

Specifies the status bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Gets a collection of all subtextparts contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the tab index of the text control.

Gets a collection of all tables contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all tables of contents in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the text contents of the text control.

Gets a collection of all characters contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all standard text fields contained in the text part with the input focus.

Specifies whether text frames that have no border line are shown with marker lines.

Gets a collection of all text frames contained in the text part with the input focus.

Gets a collection of all main text parts the current document contains.

Gets a collection of all changes made in the active part of the document.

Gets a string that represents the name of the action that will be performed when a call to the Undo method is made.

Gets or sets a list of names specifying users who have access to editable regions.

Specifies the vertical ruler bar control to be used with a TextControl.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a vertical scroll bar is shown.

Gets or sets the mode how Text Control displays a document.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether Text Control operates in an edit mode that validates the XML document according to the document's DTD.

Gets or sets the zoom factor, in percent, for a Text Control.

Occurs for each font that must be adapted, because it is not supported.

Occurs when a barcode has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new barcode has been created.

Occurs when a barcode has been deleted.

Occurs when a barcode has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when a barcode has been moved.

Occurs when a barcode has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a barcode has been selected.

Occurs when a barcode has been deselected.

Occurs when a barcode has been sized.

Determines how to handle a change of the document that cannot be added to the list of tracked changes.

Indicates that the contents of a document have been changed.

Occurs when the character formatting attributes either of the selected characters or the current text input position have been changed.

Occurs when the text of a comment has been altered.

Occurs when a piece of text has been commented.

Occurs when a comment has been removed from the document.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a commented piece of text.

Occurs when the current input position has left a commented piece of text.

Occurs when the state of a comment alters from active to inactive or vice versa.

Occurs when all text contents have been deleted and all attributes have been reset to the state after initialization.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on that represents a link to a target in the document.

Occurs when a new document has been loaded.

Occurs when a document target has been created.

Occurs when a document target has been deleted.

Occurs when a drawing has been activated.

Occurs when a drawing has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new drawing has been created.

Occurs when a drawing has been deleted.

Occurs when a drawing has been deactivated.

Occurs when a drawing has been deselected.

Occurs when a drawing has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when a drawing has been moved.

Occurs when a drawing has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a drawing has been selected.

Occurs when a drawing has been sized.

Occurs when an editable region has been created.

Occurs when an editable region has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to an editable region.

Occurs when the current input position has left an editable region.

Occurs when a footnote has been created.

Occurs when a footnote has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to the position of a footnote reference mark.

Occurs when the current input position has left the position of a footnote reference mark.

Occurs when the footnote section of a document's page gets the current text input position from another part of the document.

Occurs when the footnote section of a document's page has lost the current text input position.

Occurs after formatting attributes of one or more formatting styles have been changed.

Occurs after one or more formatting styles have been added or removed or if the name of an existing style has been changed.

Occurs when the checkmark of a CheckFormField has been changed from checked to unchecked or vice versa.

Occurs when the date of a DateFormField has been changed.

Occurs when the selected item of a SelectionFormField has been changed.

Occurs when the name, the id and/or formatting attributes of a CheckFormField, TextFormField, SelectionFormField or DateFormField have been changed.

Occurs when the text of a TextFormField has been changed.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been clicked on.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been deselected.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when the layout of a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been changed.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been moved.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been selected.

Occurs when a frame (image, text frame, chart, barcode or drawing) has been sized.

Occurs when a header or footer gets the current text input position from another part of the document such as a textframe or the main text.

Occurs when a header or footer loses the current text input position and another part of the document such as a textframe or the main text gets it.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically expanded its size horizontally.

Occurs when the horizontal scroll position has been changed.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically shrunk its size horizontally.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on that represents the source of a hypertext link.

Occurs, if a word does not fit in the line and must be hyphenated.

Occurs when an image has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new image has been created.

Occurs when an image has been deleted.

Occurs when an image has been deselected.

Occurs when an image has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when an inserted image has been moved.

Occurs when an image has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when an image has been selected.

Occurs when an inserted image has been sized.

Occurs after the text input position has been moved to a text part formatted with another style.

Occurs when the text input position has been moved to another paragraph.

Occurs when the text input position has been changed.

Occurs when the main text of the document gets the current text input position from another part of the document, such as a header, a footer or a textframe.

Occurs to handle displaying context sensitive mini toolbars.

Occurs immediately after the built-in WPF.ObjectMiniToolbar was initialized.

Occurs when the text input position has been moved to another page.

Occurs when the page format settings have been changed.

Occurs when the formatting attributes of the selected paragraphs have been changed.

Occurs when the text input position has been moved to another section.

Occurs when a signature field has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new signature field has been created.

Occurs when a signature field has been deleted.

Occurs when a signature field has been deselected.

Occurs when a signature field has been selected.

Occurs, if the document's text has been altered and the spelling of the new text must be checked.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been clicked on.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been created.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been deleted.

Occurs when a subtextpart has been double-clicked on.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a subtextpart.

Occurs when the current input position has left a subtextpart.

Occurs after a new table has been created as a result of a text insertion via the clipboard or when loading a document which contains a table without an identifier.

Occurs after a table has been deleted.

Occurs when the design attributes of a selected table have been changed.

Occurs when a table of contents has been created.

Occurs when a table of contents has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a table of contents.

Occurs when the current input position has left a table of contents.

Occurs immedialtely before a built-in context menu will be opened.

Occurs when the text of a text field has been changed.

Occurs when a text field has been clicked on.

Occurs when a text field has been created.

Occurs when a text field has been double-clicked on.

Occurs when a text field has been deleted.

Occurs when the current input position has been moved to a position that belongs to a text field.

Occurs when the current input position has left a text field.

Occurs when a text frame gets the current text input position from another part of the document such as a header, a footer or the main text.

Occurs when the appearance of a text frame (background color, transparency, border, inner margins) has been changed.

Occurs when a text frame has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new text frame has been created.

Occurs when a text frame loses the current text input position and another part of the document such as a header, a footer or the main text gets it.

Occurs when a text frame has been deleted.

Occurs when a text frame has been deselected.

Occurs when a text frame has been doubleclicked on.

Occurs when a text frame has been moved.

Occurs when a text frame has been clicked on with the right mouse button.

Occurs when a text frame has been selected.

Occurs when a text frame has been sized.

Occurs immediately after the built-in WPF.TextMiniToolbar was initialized.

Occurs when the text of a tracked change has been altered.

Occurs when a tracked change has been created.

Occurs when a tracked change has been deleted.

Occurs when the state of a tracked change alters from active to inactive or vice versa.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically expanded its size vertically.

Occurs when the vertical scroll position has been changed.

Occurs when the Text Control has automatically shrunk its size vertically.

Occurs when a loaded or changed XML document cannot be validated with the document type definition (DTD) referenced in the document.

Occurs when a loaded XML document is not well-formed.

The WPF.TextControlColors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a WPF.TextControl control.

Initializes a new instance of the WPF.TextControlColors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the WPF.TextControl.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their default values.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a form field containing the current text input position.

Gets or sets the display color for the shadow at the right and the bottom edge of the pages.

Gets or sets the display color for the area around the pages.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a form field.

Gets or sets the display color for the label showing which header or footer is activated.

Gets or sets the display color for the dividing line between headers and footers and the main text.

Gets or sets the display color for the shadow at the left and the top edge of the pages.

Gets or sets the display color for the page background.

Gets or sets the background color for the text.

Gets or sets the color for the text.

An object of the WPF.TextControlDocument class represents a document and is part of the template of a WPF.TextControl.

The WPF.TextControlToolBar class is the base class of the WPF.RulerBar and the WPF.StatusBar classes.

A WPF.TextControlToolBarPresenter object is part of the template of a WPF.TextControlToolBar.

The WPF.TextMiniToolbar class is a mini toolbar that appears when ShowMiniToolbar property is set to MiniToolbarButton.LeftButton, MiniToolbarButton.RightButton or MiniToolbarButton.LeftButton | MiniToolbarButton.RightButton, the left or right mouse button is released and the current context is selected text (ContextMenuLocation.TextSelection), text at the input position (ContextMenuLocation.TextInputPosition) or an input position inside a table (ContextMenuLocation.Table).

Each RibbonItem represents an item in a WPF.TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Font group of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the FontFamily combobox of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the FontSize combobox of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the IncreaseFont button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the DecreaseFont button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the BulletedList button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the NumberedList button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the StructuredList button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Bold button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Italic button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Underline button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TextBackColor button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TextColor button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the LeftAligned button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Centered button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the RightAligned button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Justified button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the ClearFormatting button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the Styles group of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the StyleName gallery of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableLayout group of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableSelect button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableMergeCells button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableDelete button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableInsert button of the TextMiniToolbar.

Identifies the TableSplitCells button of the TextMiniToolbar.

The ThesaurusDialog class implements a Windows Forms dialog box that shows synonyms for selected text or a word at the current input position which will be selected on opening the dialog.Each item of the dialog box has a name, available through its Name property, which corresponds with a member of the WPF.ThesaurusDialog.DialogItem enumeration.To use this dialog the TextControl must be connected with an object of type TXSpellChecker (version 7.0 or higher).

Creates a ThesaurusDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a WPF.ThesaurusDialog dialog box.

Identifies the Find Synonyms label.

Identifies the Language label.

Identifies the Back button.

Identifies the Find Synonyms text box.

Identifies the Language combo box.

Identifies the Synonyms label.

Identifies the Synonyms tree view.

Identifies the Replace button.

Identifies the Cancel button.

The TrackedChangesDialog class implements a dialog box that shows all tracked changes of the document.

Creates a TrackedChangesDialog object for the specified WPF.TextControl.

Specifies the WPF.TextControl for which the dialog box is opened.

Each DialogItem represents an item in a WPF.TrackedChangesDialog dialog box.

Identifies the tracked changes count label.

Identifies the refresh tracked changes button.

Identifies the tracked changes viewer.

Identifies the accept tracked change button.

Identifies the accept all tracked changes button.

Identifies the reject tracked change button.

Identifies the reject all tracked changes button.

Identifies the close button.

The TXBarcodeControl class provides properties to define type and format of the barcode it displays in WPF.

Initializes a new instance of the TXBarcodeControl class.

Returns the default text for the specified barcode type.

Specifies the barcode type for which the default text is returned.

Returns the maximum text length the specified barcode type can have.

Specifies the barcode type for which the maximum text length is returned.

Returns the minimum text length the specified barcode type can have.

Specifies the barcode type for which the minimum text length is returned.

Returns a value whether the specified text is valid for a specific barcode type. In case of invalid text an appropriate exception message is saved into the specified string.

Specifies the barcode type for which the text is checked. Specifies the text to check. Specifies the string into which an appropriate exception message is saved, if the checked text is not valid for a specific barcode type.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified file. The data format must be XML.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded.

Loads barcode data into the control with the specified format. The new barcode is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies the format used to deserialize the barcode.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified object of type System.IO.Stream. The data format must be XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream from which the data is loaded.

Loads barcode data into the control with the specified format. The new barcode is read from the specified object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream from which the data is loaded. Specifies the format used to deserialize the barcode.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified object of type System.IO.TextReader. The data format must be XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.TextReader from which the data is loaded.

Loads barcode data into the control from a specified object of type System.Xml.XmlReader. The data format must be XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.XmlReader from which the data is loaded.

Draws the barcode on a specific object of type System.Drawing.Graphics with the specified bounds. The parameter position must be an object of type System.Drawing.Rectangle.

Specifies the object of type System.Drawing.Graphics on which the barcode is drawn. Specifies the position to draw on the specified object of type System.Drawing.Graphics.

Draws the barcode on a specific object of type System.Windows.Media.DrawingContext with the specified stretch factor.

Specifies the object of type System.Windows.Media.DrawingContext on which the barcode is drawn. Specifies the stretch factor to draw on the specified object of type System.Windows.Media.DrawingContext.

Saves the barcode data to the given file. The data format of the file is XML.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved.

Saves the barcode data into the specified file with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies the format used to serialize the barcode.

Saves the barcode data to the given object of type System.IO.Stream. The data format of the stream is XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream into which the data is saved.

Saves the barcode data into the specified object of type System.IO.Stream with the specified format.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream into which the data is saved. Specifies the format used to serialize the barcode.

Saves the barcode data to the given object of type System.IO.TextWriter. The data format of the stream is XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.TextWriter into which the data is saved.

Saves the barcode data to the given object of type System.IO.XmlWriter. The data format of the stream is XML.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.XmlWriter into which the data is saved.

Saves the barcode image to the specified object of type System.IO.Stream with the specified format of type System.Drawing.Imaging.ImageFormat.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream into which the image is saved. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Saves the barcode image into the specified file with the specified format of type System.Drawing.Imaging.ImageFormat.

Specifies a file into which the image is saved. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Saves the barcode image to the specified object of type System.IO.Stream with the specified format of type TXTextControl.WPF.Barcode.ImageFormat.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream into which the image is saved. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Saves the barcode image into the specified file with the specified format of type TXTextControl.WPF.Barcode.ImageFormat.

Specifies a file into which the image is saved. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Gets or sets an additional text that is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Gets or sets the alignment of the barcode image inside the control.

Gets or sets the angle of the barcode image inside the control.

Gets or sets the background color for the barcode control.

Gets or sets the type of barcode that should be displayed.

Gets an object of type BarcodeTypeSettings to determine type specific settings for the current used barcode.

Gets or sets the foreground color for the barcode.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the barcode text is displayed below or above the barcode image or not.

Gets or sets the text the barcode should encrypt.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the barcode text and additional text is displayed below or above the barcode image.

Gets or sets the maximum number of characters the Text property can have.

The WPF.Drawing.ShapesContextMenu class represents the default context menu of the WPF TXDrawingControl.

Returns an array of System.Windows.Controls.Control objects that represents those items which are displayed in the context menu strip when the control is right clicked inside a shape.

Returns an array of System.Windows.Controls.Control objects that represents those items which are displayed in the context menu strip when the control is right clicked outside a shape.

The WPF.TXDrawingControl class implements a WPF FrameworkElement with features to draw custom or predefined shapes.

Initializes a new instance of the TXDrawingControl class.

Clears the undo buffer of the TX Drawing Control.

Copies the current selected shapes of the TX Drawing Control to the Clipboard.

Moves the current selected shapes of the TX Drawing Control to the Clipboard.

Opens a dialog to format selected shapes.

Loads shapes data into the TX Drawing Control from a specified object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is loaded from.

Pastes the content of the clipboard into the TX Drawing Control

Renders only the displayed shapes on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object. No activated UI elements are rendered.

Specifies the object of type System.Drawing.Graphics the displayed shapes are rendered to. Specifies the position to draw on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object.

Renders the displayed shapes on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object with or without activated UI elements.

Specifies the object of type System.Drawing.Graphics the displayed shapes are rendered to. Specifies the position to draw on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object. Specifies whether the activated UI elements are rendered on the specified System.Drawing.Graphics object or not.

Redoes the last TX Drawing Control operation.

Saves the shapes data to the given object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the data is saved to.

Saves the displayed shapes as an image to the specified object of type System.IO.Stream.

Specifies an object of type System.IO.Stream the image is saved to. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Saves the displayed shapes as an image to the specified file using the specified format.

Specifies a file the image is saved to. Specifies the format used to save the image.

Selects all shapes in the TX Drawing Control.

Specifies, pursuant to a ZoomFactor value of 100, the height and width of the canvas. The parameters must be given in twips.

Specifies the width of the canvas. Specifies the height of the canvas.

If any changes of the the displayed shapes' visible bounds require an adaption of the TX Drawing Control bounds, the size and/or location of the control is expanded respectively decreased by the considering value of the considering shape's side(s). The method returns an array of doubles which represent the effected alteration for each control's side (left, top, right, bottom) in twips.

Undoes the last edit operation in the TX Drawing Control.

Gets or sets the TX Drawing Control's back color.

Gets or sets the TX Drawing Control's border line color.The default value is null and represents the color System.Windows.SystemColors.WindowTextColor.

Gets or sets the TX Drawing Control's border line width.

Informs whether shapes are selected which can be copied to the internal clipboard.

Informs whether the internal clipboard contains shapes that can be pasted into the TX Drawing Control.

Informs whether an operation can be re-done using the Redo method.

Gets a value indicating whether the user can undo the previous operation in the TX Drawing Control.

Gets a value whether the TX Drawing Control is interpreted as canvas or not.

Gets an object of type Drawing.Selection that represents the current selected shapes inside the TX Drawing Control.

Gets an object of type ShapeCollection that represents those shapes which are displayed inside the TX Drawing Control.

Gets or sets the zoom factor, in percent, for the TX Drawing Control.

Indicates that the visible bounds of the displayed shapes have been changed (by changing the shape's angle, outline width, yellow adjust rectangles or the control's border width) in so far that the control requires an update of its bounds.

Indicates that the number or formatting of the displayed shapes has been changed.

Occurs when a shape has been adjusted by using its yellow adjust rectangle.

Occurs when a shape has been clicked on.

Occurs when a new shape has been created.

Occurs when a shape has been deleted from the TX Drawing Control's shapes collection.

Occurs when a shape has been deselected.

Occurs when a shape has been flipped.

Occurs when shape formatting attributes which cannot be handled with the built-in mouse interface have been changed.

Occurs when a shape has been moved with the built-in mouse interface.

Occurs when a shape has been selected.

Occurs when a shape has been sized with the built-in mouse interface.

Occurs when UI manipulations such as shape moving or selection changing have caused the view to change.

An instance of the Web.HeaderFooter class represents a header or footer in a Text Control document.

Returns the number of the section to which the header or footer belongs.

Gets the type of the header or footer.

The Web.IFormattedText interface contains properties common to all text parts in a TX Text Control document.

Gets or sets the current selection.

The Web.MainText class represents the main text of a TX Text Control document.

The Web.Selection class describes and handles the position and length of a text selection.

Creates an empty Selection object with all properties set to their default values.

Creates an instance of the Web.Selection class with the specified start value and length.

Specifies the selection's start position. Specifies the number of selected characters.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Exchanges the currently selected text with text in the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified file with the specified format.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified file with the specified format. Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified file stream with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document in the specified byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Saves the selected text of a document as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the selection is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the StreamType values.Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Gets the starting point of selected text.

Returns the number of characters selected.

The TextControl class implements a control with high-level text editing features.

Initializes a new instance of the TextControl class.

Returns the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored.

Specifies one of the FileType values.

Returns the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored.

Specifies one of the FileType values.

Uses data given as a JSON string as a data source. The JSON string has to contain an array of equally structured objects. Analyzes and uses the given objects as merge data in the same way as the method LoadDataFromModel.

The JSON string containing the merge data.

Uses data given as a JSON string as a data source. The JSON string has to contain an array of equally structured objects. Analyzes and uses the given objects as merge data in the same way as the method LoadDataFromModel. The method returns immediately.

The JSON string containing the merge data.

Interprets all public properties of the objects in the collection as possible table columns and / or child tables. The type of the first object in the collection is analyzed via .NET reflection and used as the basis of the assumed table structure. For more information about using object based data sources see DocumentServer.MailMerge.MergeObjects. The method returns immediately.

Specifies a System.Collections.IEnumerable that contains the merge data.

Allows to additionally specify a format which should be applied when converting date / time values and numerical values to strings.

Specifies a System.Collections.IEnumerable that contains the merge data. The format which should be applied when converting date / time values and numerical values to strings.

Interprets all public properties of the objects in the collection as possible table columns and / or child tables. The type of the first object in the collection is analyzed via .NET reflection and used as the basis of the assumed table structure. For more information about using object based data sources see DocumentServer.MailMerge.MergeObjects. The method returns immediately.

Specifies a System.Collections.IEnumerable that contains the merge data.

Allows to additionally specify a format which should be applied when converting date / time values and numerical values to strings.

Specifies a System.Collections.IEnumerable that contains the merge data. The format which should be applied when converting date / time values and numerical values to strings.

Loads a database which is used to create table and field name menu items in the mailings ribbon tab from an existing DataSet object.

Specifies a System.Data.DataSet object from which table and field names and existing data relations are loaded.

Loads a database which is used to create table and field name menu items in the mailings ribbon tab from an existing DataSet object. This method returns immediately and does not wait for the DataSet to be loaded completely.

Specifies a System.Data.DataSet object from which table and field names and existing data relations are loaded.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified file stream.

Specifies a file from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified byte array.

Specifies a byte array from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Loads text formatted with the specified format. The new text is read from the specified string.

Specifies a string from which the data is loaded. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Loads an XML database from a file.

Specifies an xml file from which the database is loaded.

Loads an XML database from an XmlDocument object.

Specifies an XmlDocument object from which the database is loaded.

Loads an XML database from a file stream.

Specifies an xml file from which the database is loaded.

Loads an XML database from a file.

Specifies an xml file from which the database is loaded.

Loads an XML database from an XmlDocument object.

Specifies an XmlDocument object from which the database is loaded.

Loads an XML database from a file stream.

Specifies an xml file from which the database is loaded.

Deletes the entire contents of the control.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified file stream with the specified format.

Specifies a file into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document in the specified byte array with the specified format.

Specifies a byte array into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the BinaryStreamType values.

Saves the complete contents of a document as a string with the specified format.

Specifies a string into which the data is saved. Specifies one of the StringStreamType values.

Determines the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored.

Specifies the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored. Specifies one of the FileType values.

Determines the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored.

Specifies the directory path where the files of a specific file type are stored. Specifies one of the FileType values.

Specifies or returns the background color of the main text area and the ruler bars.

Specifies or returns a value indicating if a right click opens a context menu or not.

Specifies if control characters are visible or not.

Gets or sets the control's culture.

Gets or sets a value how the control is docked to its container or web site.

Specifies or returns a value indicating if markers for hypertext targets are shown in the editor or not.

Specifies or returns a value of type Web.EditMode indicating whether the document's text is read-only, can be selected or is editable.

Gets or sets the name of a printer the text dimensions and capabilities of which are used to format the document.

Gets a value indicating whether all TX Text Control components are completely loaded in the service's worker process.

Specifies or returns a value indicating if a confirmation dialog should be shown before discarding unsaved changes.

Gets or sets the current selection in the text part with the input focus.

Gets or sets the IP address at which the websocket handler tries to connect to the Service.

Gets or sets the Port at which the websocket handler tries to connect to the Service.

Specifies or returns the background color of the status bar.

Specifies or returns a value indicating wether table grid lines are shown in the editor or not.

Gets or sets if text fields are editable or not.

Specifies whether text frames that have no border line are shown with marker lines.

Gets a collection of all text parts the current document contains.

Gets or sets the control's user interface culture.

Gets or sets a list of names specifying users who have access to editable regions.

Specifies the path to the WebSocket handler (TXWebSocketHandler.ashx).

An instance of the Web.TextFrame class represents a text frame in a Text Control document.

The Web.TextPart class implements the Web.IFormattedText interface as well as public properties and internal functionality common to all text parts in a TX Text Control document.

Gets or sets the current selection in a text part.

An instance of the Web.TextPartCollection class contains all text parts in a TX Text Control document.

Sets the input focus to the specified text part. If the activated text part is not in the visible part of the document, the document is scrolled.

Specifies the text part to activate.

Determines a certain text format that must tbe stored in a one-dimensional byte array.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). If a document is loaded, only the text is imported.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format Archive (PDF/A). This format can only be used in saving operations.

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in ANSI format.

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in Unicode format.

Specifies Microsoft Word format.

Specifies Microsoft Word format (Office Open XML version).

Specifies the manner in which a Web.TextControl is docked.

All the control's edges are docked to the all edges of its container and sized appropriately.

The control is not docked.

The control fills the browser window.

Specifies the kind of file types.

Specifies database file types.

Specifies document file types.

Specifies image file types.

Determines a certain text format.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). If a document is loaded, only the text is imported.

Specifies Adobe Portable Document Format Archive (PDF/A). This format can only be used in saving operations.

Specifies CSS format (Cascading Style Sheet). This format can only be used in saving operations.

Specifies HTML format (Hypertext Markup Language).

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in ANSI format.

Specifies the Text Control format. Text is stored in Unicode format.

Specifies Microsoft Word format (.DOC version).

Specifies text in Windows ANSI format (an end of a paragraph is marked with the control characters 13 and 10).

Specifies text in Windows Unicode format (an end of a paragraph is marked with the control characters 13 and 10).

Specifies RTF format (Rich Text Format).

Specifies Microsoft Word format (Office Open XML version).

Specifies XML format (Extensible Markup Language).

Determines a certain text format that can be stored as a string.

Specifies CSS format (Cascading Style Sheet). This format can only be used in saving operations.

Specifies HTML format (Hypertext Markup Language).

Specifies Text in Windows Unicode format (an end of a paragraph is marked with the control characters 13 and 10).

Specifies RTF format (Rich Text Format).

Specifies XML format (Extensible Markup Language).

Specifies possible edit modes a Web.TextControl can be in.

The document's text can be edited.

The document's text is read only but can be selected.

The document's text is read only.

Determines the type of a header or footer.

The object is a header. When an even header exists, the object represents the odd header. Otherwise it represents the header of all pages.

The object represents a special header of the document's or section's first page.

The object is a footer. When an even footer exists, this member represents the odd footer. Otherwise it represents the footer of all pages.

The object represents a special footer of the document's or section's first page.

The object represents an even header.

The object represents an even footer.

The ResourceProvider class provides static methods to receive bitmaps or strings from sources that can be accessed via an assigned identifier.

Each FileMenuItem represents the identifier for a file menu item.

Represents the TXITEM_New file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Open file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Save file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_SaveAs file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Print file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_PrintQuick file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_PrintPreview file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Options file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_UserAdministration file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_GrantUserAccess file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_About file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_Exit file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Represents the TXITEM_DocumentSettings file menu item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each GeneralItem represents the identifier for a general item.

Represents the general TXITEM_Checkmark item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Checked item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Unchecked item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Launcher item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Close item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Pinned item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Unpinned item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Plus item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Minus item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Undo item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_Redo item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToFirst item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToPrevious item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToNext item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_NavigateToLast item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and SmallIcon resources.

Represents the general TXITEM_AdvancedSettings item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Add item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Represents the general TXITEM_Remove item. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Each ShapeItem represents a list view item inside the RibbonInsertTab's TXITEM_InsertShape drop-down menu.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Line list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BentConnector3 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedConnector3 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Rectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RoundRectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Snip1Rectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Snip2SameRectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Snip2DiagonalRectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_SnipRoundRectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Round1Rectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Round2SameRectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Round2DiagonalRectangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Ellipse list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Triangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightTriangle list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Parallelogram list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_NonIsoscelesTrapezoid list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Diamond list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Pentagon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Hexagon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Heptagon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Octagon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Decagon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Dodecagon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Pie list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Chord list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Teardrop list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Frame list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_HalfFrame list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Corner list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DiagonalStripe list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Plus list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Plaque list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Can list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Cube list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Bevel list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Donut list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_NoSmoking list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BlockArc list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FoldedCorner list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_SmileyFace list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Heart list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LightningBolt list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Sun list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Moon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Cloud list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Arc list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BracketPair list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BracePair list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftBracket list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightBracket list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftBrace list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightBrace list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UpArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DownArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftRightArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UpDownArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_QuadArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftRightUpArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BentArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UTurnArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftUpArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BentUpArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedRightArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedLeftArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedUpArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CurvedDownArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_StripedRightArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_NotchedRightArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_HomePlate list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Chevron list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_RightArrowCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DownArrowCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftArrowCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_UpArrowCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_LeftRightArrowCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_QuadArrowCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CircularArrow list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathPlus list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathMinus list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathMultiply list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathDivide list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathEqual list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_MathNotEqual list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartProcess list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartAlternateProcess list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDecision list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartInputOutput list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPredefinedProcess list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartInternalStorage list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDocument list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMultidocument list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartTerminator list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPreparation list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartManualInput list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartManualOperation list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartConnector list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartOffpageConnector list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPunchedCard list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartPunchedTape list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartSummingJunction list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartOr list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartCollate list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartSort list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartExtract list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMerge list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartOnlineStorage list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDelay list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMagneticTape list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMagneticDisk list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartMagneticDrum list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_FlowChartDisplay list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_IrregularSeal1 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_IrregularSeal2 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star4 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star5 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star6 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star7 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star8 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star10 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star12 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star16 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star24 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Star32 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Ribbon2 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Ribbon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_EllipseRibbon2 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_EllipseRibbon list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_VerticalScroll list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_HorizontalScroll list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Wave list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_DoubleWave list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_WedgeRectangleCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_WedgeRoundRectangleCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_WedgeEllipseCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_CloudCallout list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BorderCallout1 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BorderCallout2 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_BorderCallout3 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentCallout1 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentCallout2 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentCallout3 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Callout1 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Callout2 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_Callout3 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentBorderCallout1 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentBorderCallout2 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SHAPE_AccentBorderCallout3 list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and ToolTipDescription resources.

Each ChartItem represents a list view item inside the RibbonInsertTab's TXITEM_InsertChart drop-down menu.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ClusteredColumn list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedColumn list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedColumn100Percent list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ClusteredColumn3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedColumn3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedColumn100Percent3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Column3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Line list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_LineWithMarkers list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Line3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Pie list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Pie3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Doughnut list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ClusteredBar list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedBar list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedBar100Percent list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ClusteredBar3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedBar3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedBar100Percent3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Area list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedArea list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedArea100Percent list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Area3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedArea3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_StackedArea100Percent3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Scatter list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ScatterWithSmoothLinesAndMarkers list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ScatterWithSmoothLines list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ScatterWithStraightLinesAndMarkers list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_ScatterWithStraightLines list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Bubble list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Bubble3D list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_HighLowClose list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_OpenHighLowClose list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_Radar list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_RadarWithMarkers list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CHART_FilledRadar list view item inside the TXITEM_InsertChart's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon and ToolTipTitle resources.

Each BarcodeItem represents a drop-down item inside the RibbonInsertTab's TXITEM_Insert_Barcode drop-down menu.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_QRCode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code128 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_EAN13 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_UPCA drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_EAN8 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Interleaved2of5 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Postnet drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code39 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_AztecCode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_IntelligentMail drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Datamatrix drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_PDF417 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_MicroPDF drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Codabar drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_FourState drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code11 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Code93 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_PLANET drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_RoyalMail drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BARCODE_Maxicode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBarcode's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon resource.

Gets the key tip that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested key tip.

Gets the key tip that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested key tip. Specifies the language in which the key tip is returned.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the large image.

Gets a large System.Drawing.Bitmap icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in a specific resolution.

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific control.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the control from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the large icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific control and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested large icon. Specifies the control from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the large image.

Gets a large System.Drawing.Bitmap icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in the resolution of the specified control.

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested large icon. Specifies the control from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested large icon.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in a specific resolution and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the small image.

Gets a small System.Drawing.Bitmap icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in a specific resolution .

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies the resolution that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific control.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the control from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets a System.Drawing.Bitmap of the small icon that is associated with the specified identifier in the resolution of a specific control and additional image source settings.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested small icon. Specifies the control from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies an ImageSourceSettings object with additional settings for receiving the small image.

Gets a small System.Drawing.Bitmap icon that is created from a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream in the resolution of the specified control.

Specifies the Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) stream that is used to create the requested small icon. Specifies the control from where the resolution is determined that is used to create the requested small icon.

Gets the text that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested text.

Gets the text that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested text. Specifies the language in which the text is returned.

Gets the tool tip description that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip description.

Gets the tool tip description that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip description. Specifies the language in which the tool tip description is returned.

Gets the tool tip title that is associated with the specified item identifier.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip title.

Gets the tool tip title that is associated with the specified item identifier in the specified language.

The identifier of the item that is associated with the requested tool tip title. Specifies the language in which the tool tip title is returned.

The ImageSourceSettings class provides properties for advanced settings to receive an image by using the ResourceProvider.GetSmallIcon and ResourceProvider.GetLargeIcon methods.

Initializes a new instance of the ResourceProvider.ImageSourceSettings class.

Specifies the culture to receive a language related image.

Specifies the fill color of editable scopes inside the related image.

Specifies the stroke color of editable scopes inside the related image.

The Sidebar class represents a container that gives quick access to a control which is either user-defined or a predefined TextControl feature interface.

Initializes a new instance of the Sidebar class.

Each AboutItem represents an item in a predefined About control.

Identifies the 'About' TextControl.

Each CommentsItem represents an item in a predefined Comments control.

Identifies the Comments Count label.

Identifies the Comments Refresh button.

Identifies the Comments overview.

Identifies the Comments Delete button.

Identifies the Comments Edit button.

Identifies the Comments Reply button.

Each ConditionalInstructionsItem represents an item in a predefined ConditionalInstructions control.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions overview label.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions overview.

Identifies the Conditions overview label.

Identifies the Conditions overview.

Identifies the Instructions overview label.

Identifies the Instructions overview.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions New button.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions Edit button.

Identifies the Conditional Instructions Edit button.

Each DocumentSettingsItem represents an item in a predefined DocumentSettings control.

Identifies the Titel label.

Identifies the Titel text box.

Identifies the Author label.

Identifies the Author text box.

Identifies the Created label.

Identifies the Created Date label.

Identifies the Subject label.

Identifies the Subject text box.

Identifies the Tags label.

Identifies the Tags text box.

Identifies the first vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Custom Properties related controls.

Identifies the Custom Properties +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Custom Properties label.

Identifies the Custom Properties separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_CustomPropertiesListView, TXITEM_AddCustomProperty and TXITEM_DeleteCustomProperty.

Identifies the Add Custom Property button.

Identifies the Delete Custom Property button.

Identifies the second vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Embedded Files related controls.

Identifies the Embedded Files +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Embedded Files label.

Identifies the Embedded Files separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_EmbeddedFilesListView, TXITEM_AddEmbeddedFile, TXITEM_SaveEmbeddedFile, TXITEM_RemoveEmbeddedFile and TXITEM_EditEmbeddedFile.

Identifies the Add Embedded File button.

Identifies the Save Embedded File button.

Identifies the Remove Embedded File button.

Identifies the Edit Embedded File button.

Identifies the tab control that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the Document Info tab page that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the Custom Properties tab page that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the Embedded Files tab page that is displayed when applying the dialog sidebar layout.

Each FieldNavigatorItem represents an item in a predefined FieldNavigator control.

Identifies the Field Navigator search text box.

Identifies the Field Navigator search button.

Identifies the tab control that contains the merge field and merge block tree views.

Identifies the first vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal or dialog sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Merge Field Properties related controls.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_MergeFieldName, TXITEM_MergeFieldNameTextBox, TXITEM_Text, TXITEM_TextTextBox, TXITEM_Format, TXITEM_FormatComboBox, TXITEM_TextBefore, TXITEM_TextBeforeTextBox, TXITEM_TextAfter, TXITEM_TextAfterTextBox, TXITEM_DateFormat, TXITEM_DateFormatComboBox, TXITEM_NumericFormat, TXITEM_NumericFormatComboBox, TXITEM_PreserveFormatting and TXITEM_MergeFieldDelete.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Name label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Name text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Format label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Format combo box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text Before label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text Before text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text After label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Text After text box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Date / Time Format label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Date / Time Format combo box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Numeric Format label.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Numeric Format combo box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Preserve Formatting check box.

Identifies the Merge Field Properties' Delete button.

Identifies the second vertical separator that is displayed when applying the horizontal sidebar layout.

Identifies the panel that includes all Merge Block Properties related controls.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties +/- toggle item.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties label.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties separator.

Identifies the panel that includes the controls TXITEM_MergeBlockName, TXITEM_MergeBlockNameTextBox and TXITEM_MergeBlockDelete.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties' Name label.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties' Name text box.

Identifies the Merge Block Properties' Delete button.

Each FieldNavigatorItem represents an item in a predefined Find or Replace control.

Identifies the Find What label.

Identifies the Find What text box.

Identifies the Replace With label (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Replace With text box (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Find Options toggle item.

Identifies the Find Options label.

Identifies the Find Options separator.

Identifies the Match Case check box.

Identifies the Match Whole Word check box.

Identifies the Search Up control.

Identifies the Search In Main Text check box.

Identifies the Search In Footnotes check box.

Identifies the Search In Text Frames check box.

Identifies the Search In Header Footers check box.

Identifies the Find Next button.

Identifies the Replace button (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Replace All button (only with Replace content layout).

Identifies the Cancel button.

Each GotoItem represents an item in a predefined Goto control.

Identifies the label of the Go to list box.

Identifies the Go to list box.

Identifies the label of the Number text box.

Identifies the Number respectively Bookmark combo box.

Identifies the Previous button.

Identifies the Next button.

Identifies the Close button.

Each StylesItem represents an item in a predefined Styles control.

Identifies the Styles overview.

Identifies the Show Preview check box.

Identifies the Sort Alphabetical check box.

Identifies the Manage Styles button.

Each TrackedChangesItem represents an item in a predefined TrackedChanges control.

Identifies the Tracked Changes Count label.

Identifies the Tracked Changes Refresh button.

Identifies the Tracked Changes overview.

Specifies the requested layout that has to be intialized and rendered as sidebar content.

No content is diplayed or can be set.

A custom control can be used as content.

The content represents a panel to navigate through the merge fields of a document.

The content represents a find in text interface.

The content represents a go to interface.

The content represents a find and replace in text interface.

The content represents an overview of all available styles of the document.

The content represents a panel that shows all tracked changes of a document.

The content represents a panel to manage the conditional instructions of a document.

The content represents a panel to manage the settings of a document.

The content represents a panel that shows all comments of a document.

The content represents a TextControl that can be used as an 'About' panel.

Specifies the requested border and title bar layout of the sidebar dialog.

The dialog's border and title bar equal to the style of a System.Windows.Forms.Form where the FormBorderStyle is set to System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedDialog.

The dialog's border and title bar equal to the style of a System.Windows.Forms.Form where the FormBorderStyle is set to System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.Sizable.

The dialog only displays the sidebar. The dialog is not sizable and neither a specific dialog border nor a title bar are set (equivalent to System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle).

The dialog only displays the sidebar. The dialog is sizable (equivalent to System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.Sizable), but neither a specific dialog border nor a title bar are set.

Finds a control inside a predefined conditional instructions panel that has the Sidebar.ConditionalInstructionsItem identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by a specific enum.

Finds a control inside a predefined document settings panel that has the Sidebar.DocumentSettingsItem identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by a specific enum.

Finds a control inside a predefined field navigator that has the Sidebar.FieldNavigatorItem identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by a specific enum.

Finds a control inside a predefined find or replace panel that has the Sidebar.FindAndReplaceItem identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by a specific enum.

Finds a control inside a predefined go to panel that has the Sidebar.GotoItem identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by a specific enum.

Finds a control inside a predefined go to panel that has the Sidebar.StylesItem identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by a specific enum.

Finds a control inside a predefined tracked changes overview that has the Sidebar.TrackedChangesItem identifier name.

The name of the requested control represented by a specific enum.

Gets or sets an object of type System.Windows.Forms.Control that represents the content of the Sidebar.

Determines the content layout that has to be intialized and rendered for the Sidebar.

Gets or sets the location of the dialog where the Sidebar is placed, if the Sidebar.IsPinned property is set to false.

Gets or sets the size of the dialog where the Sidebar is placed, if the Sidebar.IsPinned property is set to false.

Gets or sets the requested border and title bar layout of the sidebar dialog.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar is rendered inside another control (property value is set to true) or displayed as dialog.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar can be sized with the mouse.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar is shown.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar's close button is shown.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar's pin button is shown.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Sidebar's title is shown.

Overridden. Gets or sets the text that is displayed in the title bar of the Sidebar.

Gets or sets the TextControl that is used for the predefined TextControl feature layouts.

Gets or sets the font of the title bar's text.

Gets or sets the color of the title bar's text.

Specifies the position of the text and the kind of icon relative to each other on objects of type RibbonButton and RibbonTextBox:

If the object is part of a RibbonGroup the item displayes its large icon above its text. If the item is an object of type RibbonButton and inserted as a drop-down item, the image is displayed horizontally before the text and the description text.

The item displayes its small icon horizontally before the text.

The item's small icon is displayed, but not its text.

Only the item's text is displayed.

Determines the view mode of the RibbonListView:

A RibbonListViewItem displayes its icon.

A RibbonListViewItem displayes its text.

A RibbonListViewItem a drop-down.

Determines the alignment of the RibbonSeperator:

The separator is aligned horizontally.

The separator is aligned vertically.

Determines the validation mode that is used to validate the inserted text in the RibbonTextBox:

All characters are valid to be inserted into the text box.

Only letters or digits are valid text box characters.

Only letters or digits are valid text box characters.

Only digits are valid text box characters.

Only integers are valid text box characters.

An object of the ContextualTabGroup class represents a group of ribbon tabs which are only shown in a certain context.

Initializes a new instance of the ContextualTabGroup class.

Gets or sets the background color of the group's label.

Gets a list of all RibbonTab objects contained in this group.

Gets or sets the group's header.

Gets or sets the group's name.

Gets or sets the group's visibility.

The ContextualTabGroupCollection class represents all groups of ribbon tabs which are only shown in a certain context.

The DialogBoxLauncher class represents the dialog box launcher item of a RibbonGroup.

Gets or sets the ContextMenuStrip associated with this dialog box launcher.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this dialog box launcher is enabled.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this dialog box launcher is visible.

Gets or sets a 16x16 icon for this dialog box launcher's quick access toolbar tool strip item.

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over the item.

Occurs as the dialog box launcher is clicked.

The HorizontalRibbonGroup class represents a logical group of controls as they appear on a RibbonTab.

Initializes a new instance of the HorizontalRibbonGroup class.

Adds a control of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator to the end of a specific row inside the horizontal ribbon group.

The control to be added to this group. The row where to add the control.

Adds an array of controls to the end of a specific row. These controls must be objects of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator.

An array of controls to be added to this group. The row where to add the controls.

Inserts a control of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator at the specified index.

The zero-based index at which the control should be inserted. The control to be inserted to this group. The row where to insert the control.

Inserts an array of controls at the specified index. These controls must be objects of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator.

The zero-based index at which the controls should be inserted. An array of controls to be inserted to this group. The row where to insert the controls.

The Ribbon class is a command bar that organizes the features of an application into a series of tabs at the top of the application window.

Initializes a new instance of the Ribbon class.

Gets a collection of all items which are displayed on the help pane of the Application Menu.

Gets a collection of all items which are displayed on the Application Menu.

Gets a collection of all contextual tab groups of this ribbon.

Gets or sets the colors of the ribbon.

Gets or sets a value defining whether the first tab of the ribbon is an application menu.

Gets or sets a value determining whether the ribbon is shown minimized.

Gets or sets a value determining the ribbon's read only mode.

The Ribbon.Colors class gets, sets or resets the display colors of a Windows Forms Ribbon control.

Initializes a new instance of the Ribbon.Colors class. After creating the object with this constuctor, individual colors can be set. If the Colors object is assigned to the Windows.Forms.Ribbon.Ribbon.DisplayColors property, non-set colors are reset to their system dependent default values.

Resets the ribbon's ApplicationMenuColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ribbon's ApplicationMenuTabHighlightColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ribbon's ApplicationMenuTabColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ribbon's HighlightTabColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ribbon's MenuColor to its system dependent default value.

Resets the ribbon's TabColor to its system dependent default value.

Gets or sets the background color of a ribbon's application menu.

Gets or sets the color of a ribbon's first tab, which opens the application menu.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a ribbon's first tab which is used, when the mouse pointer is moved over it.

Gets or sets the highlight color of a ribbon tab which is used when a tab is selected.

Gets or sets the menu color of a ribbon.

Gets or sets the background color of a ribbon tab.

The RibbonButton class is a button control which can be added to a RibbonGroup or to a RibbonMenuButton where it is stored as an item of the drop-down menu.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonButton class.

Gets or sets the description text that appears on this button in a RibbonMenuButton's drop down menu when the DisplayMode property of the button is set to IconTextRelation.LargeIconLabeled.

Sets the RibbonButton's superordinate display settings and gets its corresponding text icon relation rendering to the current group's width.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the RibbonButton can be added to the quick access toolbar.

Gets or sets value indicating whether the RibbonButton changes its display mode when the related ribbon group is scaled by resizing the application.

Gets or sets the keyboard shortcut of the RibbonButton.

Gets or sets a 32x32 1/96 inch icon for this RibbonButton.

Gets the RibbonItemCollection that contains this RibbonButton.

Gets or sets a 16x16 1/96 inch icon for this RibbonButton.

Overridden. Gets or sets the RibbonButton's text.

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over the item.

The RibbonChartLayoutTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for editing objects of type ChartFrame.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonChartLayoutTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonChartLayoutTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonChartLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditData ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SetDataRelation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LabelsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonChartLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Legend ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LabelsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLabels ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LabelsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLabels ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LabelsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TitlesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonChartLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TitlesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TitlesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TitlesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormatChartTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TitlesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormatXAxisTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TitlesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormatYAxisTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TitlesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonChartLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLine ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinimumAutomatic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMaximumAutomatic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisIntervalAutomatic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinimum ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMaximum ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisInterval ribbon item inside the TXITEM_XAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonChartLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLine ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinimumAutomatic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMaximumAutomatic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisIntervalAutomatic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinimum ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMaximum ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisInterval ribbon item inside the TXITEM_YAxisGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonChartLayoutTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Legend's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendDocking drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Legend's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendDocking_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendDocking_Top drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendDocking_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendDocking_Bottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendAlignment drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Legend's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendAlignment_Near drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendAlignment_Center drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendAlignment_Far drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Legend's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_LegendColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LegendFont drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Legend's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLabelsShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLabels's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLabelsColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLabels's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLabelsColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLabelsColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLabelsColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLabelsColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLabelsFont drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLabels's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLabelsShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLabels's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLabelsColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLabels's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLabelsColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLabelsColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLabelsColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLabelsColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLabelsFont drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLabels's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatChartTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking_Top drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking_Bottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleDocking's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatChartTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation_Auto drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation_Rotated270 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation_Rotated90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation_Stacked drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatChartTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitle_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartTitleColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartTitleFont drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatChartTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleAlignment drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatXAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleAlignment_Near drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleAlignment_Center drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleAlignment_Far drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatXAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation_Auto drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation_Rotated270 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation_Rotated90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation_Stacked drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatXAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisTitleColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisTitleFont drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatXAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleAlignment drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatYAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleAlignment_Far drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleAlignment_Center drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleAlignment_Near drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatYAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation_Auto drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation_Rotated270 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation_Rotated90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation_Stacked drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleOrientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatYAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisTitleColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisTitleFont drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FormatYAxisTitle's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLine's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLine's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLine's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType_Dash drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType_DashDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType_DashDotDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType_Dot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType_Solid drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_Dash drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_DashDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_DashDotDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_Dot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_Solid drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_Dash drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_DashDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_DashDotDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_Dot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_Solid drop-down item inside the TXITEM_XAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLine's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLine's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLine's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType_Dash drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType_DashDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType_DashDotDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType_Dot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType_Solid drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisLineDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_Dash drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_DashDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_DashDotDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_Dot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType_Solid drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMajorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesShow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesColor drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_Dash drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_DashDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_DashDotDot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_Dot drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType_Solid drop-down item inside the TXITEM_YAxisMinorGridlinesDashType's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonChartLayoutTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

The RibbonComboBox class represents a combobox which is inherited from the System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox class.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonComboBox class.

Gets or sets the keyboard shortcut of the RibbonComboBox.

Gets the RibbonItemCollection that contains this RibbonComboBox.

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over the item.

The RibbonForm class represents a Windows Forms form that can draw a Ribbon Quick Access Toolbar and contextual tabs in its border.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonForm class.

Specifies the standard items of the Quick Access Toolbar. Additional items can be added and removed through a context menu.

An array of ToolStripItem objects which act as the standard items of the Quick Access Toolbar.

Gets or sets a value defining whether a quick access toolbar is shown in the caption area of the RibbonForm.

Gets or sets a value defining the position of the quick access toolbar, above or below the ribbon.

The RibbonFormFieldsTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for inserting and editing form fields.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonFormFieldsTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFormFieldsTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTextFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertCheckBoxField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertComboBoxField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertDropDownListField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertDateFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_InsertFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemoveFormFieldsContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightFormFields ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditFormFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableFormValidation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightInvalidValues ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextInvalidValueFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousInvalidValueFormField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormValidationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormFieldID ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckedSymbolLabel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbolLabel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckedSymbol ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbol ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CheckBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFormFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFormFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NewComboBoxListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComboBoxListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxListItems ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding KeyTip resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxListItemMoveUp ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ComboBoxListItemMoveDown ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ComboBoxFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NewDropDownListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteDropDownListItem ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListItems ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding KeyTip resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListItemMoveUp ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DropDownListItemMoveDown ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DropDownListFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormFieldsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldEmptyWidthLabel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldEmptyWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SupportedDateFormats ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DateFormFieldRemoveContent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DateFormFieldPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonFormFieldsTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CheckedSymbolList_Characters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_CheckedSymbol's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbolList_Characters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_UncheckedSymbol's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonFormFieldsTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

Gets or sets the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormFieldsTab's TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions button and its horizontal sidebar drop down button.

Gets or sets the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormFieldsTab's TXITEM_ManageConditionalInstructions button and its vertical sidebar drop down button.

The RibbonFormattingTab class represents a ribbon tab for setting font and paragraph attributes, formatting styles and for handling the clipboard.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonFormattingTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFormattingTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Paste ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Cut ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Copy ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ClipboardGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_FontFamily ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FontSize ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_IncreaseFont ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DecreaseFont ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ClearFormatting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Bold ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Italic ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Underline ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Strikeout ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Subscript ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Superscript ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FontGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_BulletedList ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DecreaseIndent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_IncreaseIndent ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LeftToRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RightToLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditTabs ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ControlChars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LeftAligned ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Centered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RightAligned ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Justified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LineSpacing ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Borders ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StylesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_StylesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_StyleName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_StylesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormattingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectAll ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectObjects ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonFormattingTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PastePlainText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteImage drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteTextFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteChart drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteBarcode drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PasteDrawing drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Paste's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Sentence drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Lower drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Upper drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Capitalize drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChangeCase_Toggle drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChangeCase's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextBackColor_Transparent drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BulletedList_Characters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BulletedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BulletedList_Format drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BulletedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Numbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_ArabicNumbers list view item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_CapitalLetters list view item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_Letters list view item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_RomanNumbers list view item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Gallery_SmallRomanNumbers list view item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberedList_Format drop-down item inside the TXITEM_NumberedList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Numbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_ArabicNumbers list view item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_CapitalLetters list view item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_Letters list view item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_RomanNumbers list view item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Gallery_SmallRomanNumbers list view item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructuredList_Format drop-down item inside the TXITEM_StructuredList's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LeftFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TopFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RightFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BottomFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BoxFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InnerHorizontalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InnerVerticalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Borders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BackColor_Transparent drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FrameLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FrameLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FrameLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Find_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Replace_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Goto_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonFormattingTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

Gets or sets the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Find button and its horizontal sidebar drop down button.

Gets or sets the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Find button and its vertical sidebar drop down button.

Gets or sets the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Goto button and its vertical sidebar drop down button.

Gets or sets the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Goto button.

Gets or sets the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Replace button and its vertical sidebar drop down button.

Gets or sets the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_Replace button.

Gets or sets the sidebar that is connected to the RibbonFormattingTab's TXITEM_StylesGroup's dialog box launcher.

The RibbonFormulaTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for editing formulas in table cells.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonFormulaTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFormulaTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormulaTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_Formula ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormulaTextBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptFormula ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CancelFormulaEditing ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Functions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SupportedFunctions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddFunction ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectCellReferences ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormulaTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellNumberFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellNumberFormatComboBox ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellAcceptNumberFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellTextType ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellTextTypeText ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableCellTextTypeNumber ribbon item inside the TXITEM_NumberFormatGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFormulaTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableFormulaCalculation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableR1C1Style ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableA1Style ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowFormulaReferences ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowAllReferences ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FormulaSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonFormulaTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

The RibbonFrameLayoutTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for editing objects of type Image, TextFrame, DrawingFrame, BarcodeFrame and ChartFrame.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonFrameLayoutTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonFrameLayoutTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectArrangeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectHeight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectSizeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextFrame_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Drawing_BordersandBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Barcode_ColorsAndAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartType ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartIs3D ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartRotation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartHasRightAngleAxes ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartInclination ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartPerspective ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Chart_TypeAndAppearanceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ObjectID ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ObjectPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonFrameLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerName ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerAddress ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerContactInfo ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SignerReason ribbon item inside the TXITEM_Signature_SignerInfoGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonFrameLayoutTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_InLineWithText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_TopAndBottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_Square drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_BehindText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_InFrontOfText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_WrapText_MoreLayoutOptions drop-down item inside the TXITEM_WrapText's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront_ToFront drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BringToFront's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront_Forward drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BringToFront's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BringToFront_InFrontOfText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BringToFront's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack_ToBack drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SendToBack's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack_Backward drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SendToBack's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and ToolTipTitle resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SendToBack_BehindText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SendToBack's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_Center drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Position_OtherPosition drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Position's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_0 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_20 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_30 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_40 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_60 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_70 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_80 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth_NoLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth_Single drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth_Double drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TextFrameBorderColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingLineWidth_NoLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_0 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_20 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_30 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_40 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_60 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_70 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_80 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_Right90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_Left90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_FlipHorizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_FlipVertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingRotation_MoreRotationOptions drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DrawingRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeForeColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_0 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_20 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_30 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_40 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_60 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_70 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_80 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeTransparency's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment_Center drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeHorizontalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment_Top drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment_Middle drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment_Bottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeVerticalAlignment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_Right90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_Left90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_180 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation_MoreRotationOptions drop-down item inside the TXITEM_BarcodeRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartRotation_Right90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartRotation_Left90 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartRotation_180 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartRotation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartInclination_0 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartInclination's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartInclination_30 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartInclination's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartInclination_60 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartInclination's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartPerspective_Telephoto drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartPerspective's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartPerspective_Normal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartPerspective's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ChartPerspective_WideAngle drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ChartPerspective's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonFrameLayoutTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

The RibbonGroup class represents a logical group of controls as they appear on a RibbonTab and is the base class of the HorizontalRibbonGroup class.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonGroup class.

Gets an object of type DialogBoxLauncher which represents the RibbonGroup's dialog box launcher item.

Gets or sets the ribbon group's horizontal content alignment.

Gets or sets a value whether the RibbonGroup can be added to the quick access toolbar.

Gets or sets the keyboard shortcut of the RibbonGroup.

Gets or sets an icon for this RibbonGroup.

Gets a collection of all items contained in this group.

Gets or sets the number of rows in the RibbonGroup.

Gets or sets a 16x16 1/96 inch icon for this RibbonGroup.

Gets or sets a value whether the RibbonGroup's separator is shown.

Overridden. Gets or sets the RibbonGroup's footer text.

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over this RibbonGroup.

An instance of the RibbonGroupCollection class contains objects of type RibbonGroup and can be obtained with the RibbonTab.RibbonGroups property.

Adds an object of the type RibbonGroup to the end of the collection.

The RibbonGroup to be added to the end of the collection.

Inserts an object of the type RibbonGroup at the specified index of the collection.

The zero-based index at which the RibbonGroup should be inserted. The RibbonGroup to be inserted.

Removes an object of the type RibbonGroup from the collection.

The RibbonGroup to be removed from the collection.

Gets an object of type RibbonGroup from the collection.

The RibbonInsertTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for inserting pages, images, charts, shapes, hyperlinks, bookmarks, headers and footers, textframes and symbols.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonInsertTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonInsertTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertPage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertPageBreak ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertImage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertChart ribbon item inside the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertShape ribbon item inside the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertBarcode ribbon item inside the TXITEM_IllustrationsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LinksGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertHyperlink ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LinksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertBookmark ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LinksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertHeader ribbon item inside the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFooter ribbon item inside the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber ribbon item inside the TXITEM_HeaderFooterGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTextFrame ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFile ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSignature ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TextGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SymbolsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonInsertTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSymbol ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SymbolsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonInsertTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableGallery drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertImageDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertImage's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertImagePlaceHolder drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertImage's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LinesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_RectanglesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BasicShapesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_BlockArrowsCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_EquationShapesCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FlowChartCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_StarsAndBannersCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_CalloutsCategory drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertDrawingCanvas drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DrawingMarkerLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertShape's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertHyperlinkDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHyperlink's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditHyperlink drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHyperlink's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertBookmarkDialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteBookmark drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditBookmark drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DocumentTargetMarkers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertBookmark's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHeader's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemoveHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertHeader's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditFooter drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertFooter's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemoveFooter drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertFooter's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertStandardPageNumber drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FormatPageNumber drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RemovePageNumber drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertPageNumber's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddTextFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTextFrame's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextFrameMarkerLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertTextFrame's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_MoreSymbols drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSymbol's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonInsertTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

An instance of the RibbonItemCollection class contains controls of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator and can be obtained with the RibbonGroup.RibbonItems, Ribbon.ApplicationMenuHelpPaneItems, Ribbon.ApplicationMenuItems, RibbonMenuButton.DropDownItems or RibbonListView.DropDownItems property.

Adds a control of the type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator to the end of the collection.

The control to be added to the end of this collection.

Adds an array of controls to the end of the collection. These controls must be objects of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator.

An array of controls to be added to the end of this collection.

Determines whether a control is in the collection.

The item to locate in this collection.

Inserts a control of the type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator at the specified index.

The zero-based index at which the control should be inserted. The control to be inserted.

Inserts an array of controls at the specified index. These controls must be objects of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator.

The zero-based index at which the controls should be inserted. An array of controlsto be inserted.

Removes a control of the type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator from this collection.

The control to be removed from this collection.

Gets a control of type RibbonButton, RibbonComboBox, RibbonLabel, RibbonListView, RibbonTextBox or RibbonSeperator from the collection.

The RibbonLabel class represents a label which is inherited from the System.Windows.Forms.Control class.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonLabel class.

Gets the RibbonItemCollection that contains this RibbonLabel.

Gets or sets a 16x16 1/96 inch icon for this RibbonLabel.

Overridden. Gets or sets the RibbonLabel's text.

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over the item.

The RibbonListView class is a list view control, which displays a collection of items that can be displayed using one of three different views.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonListView class.

Displays a text box to edit the specified RibbonListViewItem.

The specified RibbonListViewItem to edit.

Closes the text box that is displayed to edit an item.

Scrolls the contents of the RibbonListView to a specified RibbonListViewItem.

The specified RibbonListViewItem where to scroll to.

Gets or sets the amount of space between the cell's item and the cell's border.

Gets the number of columns in this RibbonListView.

Gets the width, in 1/96 inch, for each column in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets a value whether a selected RibbonListViewItem can be deselected by clicking into a cell that does not contain a RibbonListViewItem or clicking on it in combination with the pressed Ctrl key.

Gets the collection of controls in the drop-down menu that is associated with this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets a value, in 1/96 inch, specifying the width of the edit item text box for an item where no text is set.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the RibbonListViewItems are displayed inside the RibbonListView or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the selected RibbonListViewItems are highlighted inside the RibbonListView or not.

Gets or sets an array of RibbonListViewItems used to generate the content of this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets the keyboard shortcut of the RibbonListView.

Gets or sets a value specifying the maximum number of columns in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets a value, in 1/96 inch, specifying the maximum column width in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets a value specifying the maximum number of rows that are displayed by the RibbonListView.

Gets or sets the minimum number of columns in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets the minimum width, in 1/96 inch, of a column.

Gets or sets the minimum width, in 1/96 inch, of the RibbonListView.

Gets or sets the minimum number of rows in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether multiple items can be selected.

Gets the RibbonItemCollection that contains this RibbonListView.

Gets a collection containing all items in this RibbonListView.

Gets the number of rows in this RibbonListView.

Gets the height, in 1/96 inch, for each row in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets the indexes of the selected items in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets the items that are selected in this RibbonListView.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether an item is set to selected after choosing it by using arrow keys.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this RibbonListView is surrounded by a border or not.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this RibbonListView's drop down menu displays additionally to the drop down items the control's RibbonListViewItems or not.

Gets or sets a value whether the scroll bars buttons should be displayed or not.

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over RibbonListView's scroll bar or drop-down button.

Gets or sets the mode in which this RibbonListView displays its items.

Occurs as the RibbonListView's drop-down menu is closed.

Occurs as the RibbonListView's drop-down menu is opening.

Occurs when the edit item text box is displayed.

Occurs when the edit item text box is closed.

Occurs when an RibbonListViewItem is clicked.

Occurs as a RibbonListViewItem's drop-down menu is closed.

Occurs as a RibbonListViewItem's drop-down menu is opening.

Occurs when the mouse pointer is over a RibbonListViewItem and the mouse button is pressed.

Occurs when the mouse pointer enters a RibbonListViewItem.

Occurs when the mouse pointer leaves a RibbonListViewItem.

Occurs when the mouse pointer is over a RibbonListViewItem and the mouse button is released.

The RibbonListViewItem class represents an item in a RibbonListView control.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonListViewItem class.

Gets an object of type RibbonListView.RibbonListViewItemDropDown to access settings of the drop-down menu, that is displayed for each RibbonListViewItem when the RibbonListView.ViewMode property includes the ListViewMode.DropDown enumeration.

Gets or sets the icon for this RibbonListViewItem.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this RibbonListViewItem is editable.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this RibbonListViewItem is selected.

Gets or sets the data associated with this RibbonListViewItem.

Gets or sets the RibbonListViewItem's text

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over the item.

An instance of the RibbonListViewItemCollection class contains controls of type RibbonListViewItem and can be obtained with the RibbonListView.RibbonListViewItems property.

Adds an item of the type RibbonListViewItem to the end of this collection.

The item to be added to the end of this collection.

Gets an item of type RibbonListViewItem from this collection.

The RibbonListViewItemDropDown class provides properties to modify the settings of the drop-down menu, that is displayed for each RibbonListViewItem when the RibbonListView.ViewMode property includes the ListViewMode.DropDown enumeration.

Gets or sets all items that are displayed when the drop-down menu is opened.

Gets or sets the minimum width, in 1/96 inch, of the displayed drop-down.

Gets or sets the index of the currently selected drop-down item.

Gets or sets the current selected drop-down item.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether space for a check mark is shown on the left edge of the drop-down menu.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the value of the RibbonListViewItemDropDown.Text property is displayed to the left of the drop-down button.

Gets or sets the text that is displayed to the left of the drop-down button, if the RibbonListViewItemDropDown.ShowText property is set to true.

The RibbonListViewItemEventArgs class provides data for the RibbonListView.EditItemTextBoxActivated, RibbonListView.EditItemTextBoxDeactivated, RibbonListView.ItemClick, ItemMouseEnter or ItemMouseLeave event.

Gets an object of type RibbonListViewItem that represents the handled item.

The RibbonMenuButton class is a button control that displays a drop-down menu when clicked.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonMenuButton class.

Gets the collection of controls in the drop-down menu that is associated with this RibbonMenuButton.

Occurs as the RibbonMenuButton's drop-down menu is closed.

Occurs as the RibbonMenuButton's drop-down menu is opening.

The RibbonPageLayoutTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for editing the page setup and layout.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonPageLayoutTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonPageLayoutTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPageLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageMargins ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Orientation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageSize ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageSetupGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ColumnsAndBreaksGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPageLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_ColumnsAndBreaksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ColumnsAndBreaksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ColumnsAndBreaksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPageLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_PageBackgroundAndBordersGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonPageLayoutTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_Orientation_Portrait drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Orientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Orientation_Landscape drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Orientation's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_One drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_Two drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_Three drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Columns_MoreColumns drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Columns's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_PageBreaks drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_Page drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_Column drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_TextWrapping drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_SectionBreaks drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_NextPage drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Breaks_Continuous drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Breaks's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Left drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Top drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Right drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_Bottom drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageBorders_All drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageBorders's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageLineWidth_NoLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_PageLineWidth's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonPageLayoutTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

The RibbonPermissionsTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for determining how the document can be edited, when it is enforced to be protected.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonPermissionsTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonPermissionsTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_RestrictFormattingGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowFormatting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictFormattingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowFormattingStyles ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictFormattingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowPrinting ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AllowCopy ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FillInFormFields ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ReadOnly ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RestrictEditingGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ReadOnlyExceptionsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_ReadOnlyExceptionsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_Users ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ReadOnlyExceptionsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonPermissionsTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnforceProtection ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightEditableRegions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousEditableRegion ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextEditableRegion ribbon item inside the TXITEM_EditRestrictedDocumentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonPermissionsTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_Users_Dialog drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Users's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonPermissionsTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user can add user names by the RibbonPermissionsTab's Add Users dialog that are not represented by the RegisteredUserNames property.

Gets or sets an array of strings that represents those registered user names that can be added by the RibbonPermissionsTab's Add Users dialog.

The RibbonProofingTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for setting proofing options such as spelling, hyphenation or language settings.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonProofingTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonProofingTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableSpellChecking ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EnableHyphenations ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Thesaurus ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Spelling ribbon item inside the TXITEM_SpellingAndHyphenationGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LoadDictionary ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LoadThesaurusFile ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SpellingOptions ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ProofingSettingsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditComment ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CommentsViewMode ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowComments ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_CommentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackChanges ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextTrackedChange ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowMarkup ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TrackChangesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_LanguageGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonProofingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DetectLanguages ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LanguageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SetLanguage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_LanguageGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonProofingTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment_DeleteThisComment drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteComment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment_DeleteThisReply drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteComment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteComment_DeleteAllComments drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteComment's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowComments_AllReviewers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ShowComments's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Comments_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Comments_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_Comments_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptAndMoveToNext drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptThisChange drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptAllChanges drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange_AcceptAllChangesAndStopTracking drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AcceptTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectAndMoveToNext drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectThisChange drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectAllChanges drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange_RejectAllChangesAndStopTracking drop-down item inside the TXITEM_RejectTrackedChange's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars_Vertical drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars_Horizontal drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TrackedChanges_Sidebars's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowMarkup_AllReviewers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ShowMarkup's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonProofingTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

Gets or sets the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_Comments button.

Gets or sets the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_Comments button.

Gets or sets the vertical sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_TrackedChanges button.

Gets or sets the horizontal sidebar that is connected to the RibbonProofingTab's TXITEM_TrackedChanges button.

The RibbonReferencesTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for creating and editing tables of contents.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonReferencesTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonReferencesTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReferencesTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PreviousFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_NextFootnote ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HighlightFootnoteMarks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesStartNumber ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat ribbon item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReferencesTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_UpdateTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ModifyTableOfContents ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReferencesTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCMinimumStructureLevel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCMaximumStructureLevel ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCCreateHyperlinks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCTitle ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCShowPageNumbers ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TOCRightAlignPageNumbers ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableOfContentsPropertiesGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ParagraphStructureLevelsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReferencesTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StructureLevelStyles ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphStructureLevelsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding KeyTip resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraph ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ParagraphStructureLevelsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonReferencesTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_ArabicNumbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_Letters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_CapitalLetters drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_RomanNumbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat_SmallRomanNumbers drop-down item inside the TXITEM_FootnotesNumberFormat's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphBodyText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel1 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel2 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel3 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel4 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel5 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel6 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel7 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel8 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel9 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_AddParagraphLevel10 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_AddParagraph's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonReferencesTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

The RibbonReportingTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab to integrate mail merge and reporting functionality.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonReportingTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonReportingTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectMasterTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditDataRelations ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ConfigFile ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DataSourceGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FieldProperties ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteField ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeFieldsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeBlocksGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeBlocksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_EditMergeBlocks ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeBlocksGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ViewGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonReportingTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FieldNavigation ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ViewGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonReportingTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_DataSource drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_LoadXMLFile drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_LoadAssembly drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_LoadJSON drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DataSource_SaveExcerpt drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DataSource's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectMasterTable_TablesHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectMasterTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ConfigFile_LoadConfiguration drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ConfigFile's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ConfigFile_SaveConfiguration drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ConfigFile's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField_TablesHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField_InsertCustomMergeField drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeField_HighlightMergeFields drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_IF drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_IncludeText drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_Date drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_Next drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField_NextIf drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertSpecialField's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock_TablesHeader drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock_InsertCustomMergeBlock drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock_HighlightMergeBlocks drop-down item inside the TXITEM_InsertMergeBlock's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonReportingTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

Provides the DataSourceManager that is connected with the RibbonReportingTab.

Gets or sets the sidebar that is connected to the RibbonReportingTab's TXITEM_FieldNavigation button.

The RibbonSeperator class represents a control that provides a separator between elements in a HorizontalRibbonGroup, an ApplicationMenu or a drop-down menu of a RibbonMenuButton.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonSeperator class.

Gets the alignment of this RibbonSeperator.

Gets the RibbonItemCollection that contains this RibbonSeperator.

The RibbonSplitButton class is a control that has a primary button that responds to a Click event and a secondary button that displays a drop-down menu when clicked.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonSplitButton class.

Gets or set a value indicating whether the primary button is enabled.

Gets or set a value indicating whether the primary button is checkable.

Gets or set a value indicating whether the primary button is checked.

Occurs as the primary button is clicked.

Occurs when the value of the Checked property changes.

The RibbonTab class represents a tab in a Ribbon.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonTab class.

Gets or sets the keyboard shortcut of the RibbonTab.

Gets a collection of all RibbonGroups in a RibbonTab.

The RibbonTableLayoutTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for editing tables.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonTableLayoutTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonTableLayoutTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableGridLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableProperties ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableLayoutGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableRowAbove ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableRowBelow ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableColLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_InsertTableColRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_RowsAndColumnsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_MergeTableCells ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTableCells ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTable ribbon item inside the TXITEM_MergeGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableFrameLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBackColor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_BordersAndBackgroundGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonTableLayoutTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the dialog box launcher of the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle and ToolTipDescription resources. Limitations: The FindItem method returns null when passing this RibbonItem as an argument.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomLeft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopCentered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleCentered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomCentered ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomRight ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignTopJustified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignMiddleJustified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_CellAlignBottomJustified ribbon item inside the TXITEM_TableAlignmentGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonTableLayoutTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableCell drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableCol drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableRow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SelectTableAll drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SelectTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableCell drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableCol drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableRow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_DeleteTableAll drop-down item inside the TXITEM_DeleteTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTableAbove drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SplitTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_SplitTableBelow drop-down item inside the TXITEM_SplitTable's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLeftFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableTopFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableRightFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBottomFrameLine drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBoxFrame drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableAllFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableInnerHorizontalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableInnerVerticalFrameLines drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableFrameLines's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineColor_Automatic drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableLineColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableLineColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBackColor_Transparent drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TableBackColor_MoreColors drop-down item inside the TXITEM_TableBackColor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon and Text resources.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonTableLayoutTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.

The RibbonTextBox class is a control that can be used to display or edit unformatted text.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonTextBox class.

Sets the RibbonTextBox's superordinate display settings and gets its corresponding text icon relation rendering to the current group's width.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the RibbonTextBox changes its display mode when the related ribbon group is scaled by resizing the application.

Gets or sets the keyboard shortcut of the RibbonTextBox.

Gets or sets the text that is displayed before the text box.

Gets or sets a 32x32 1/96 inch icon for this RibbonTextBox.

Gets the RibbonItemCollection that contains this RibbonTextBox.

Gets or sets the text of the current selection in the text box.

Gets or sets the number of characters in the current selection in the text box.

Gets or sets the starting position of the text selected in the text box

Gets or sets a 16x16 1/96 inch icon for this RibbonTextBox.

Gets or sets a value whether the text box's up down buttons are shown or not.

Overridden. Gets or sets the text that is inserted in the text box.

Gets or sets how text is aligned in the text box.

Gets or sets the text that is displayed behind the text box.

Gets or sets the width, in 1/96 inch, of the text box.

Gets an object of type RibbonToolTip that displays text when the mouse pointer hovers over the item.

Gets or sets the RibbonTextBox's input validation mode that is used to validate the inserted text in the text box.

Occurs as the text box's down button is clicked.

Occurs when text box's text is validated.

Occurs as the text box's up button is clicked.

The RibbonToggleButton class is a checkable button control which can be added to a RibbonGroup or to a RibbonMenuButton where it is stored as an item of the drop-down menu.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonToggleButton class.

Gets or set a value indicating whether this RibbonToggleButton is checked.

Occurs when the value of the Checked property changes.

The RibbonToolTip class represents a small rectangular pop-up window that displays the title and/or a brief description of a ribbon item's purpose when the user rests the pointer on the control.

Gets or sets the description for the RibbonToolTip window.

Gets or sets the title for the RibbonToolTip window.

Occurs as the the RibbonToolTip window is opening.

The RibbonViewTab class represents a Windows Forms ribbon tab for customizing the view settings.

Initializes a new instance of the RibbonViewTab class.

Each RibbonItem represents an item in the RibbonViewTab that is not a drop-down item.

Identifies the TXITEM_DocumentViewsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PrintLayout ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DocumentViewsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Draft ribbon item inside the TXITEM_DocumentViewsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_Zoom100 ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_FullPage ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_PageWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_TextWidth ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ZoomGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_HorizontalRuler ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_VerticalRuler ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_StatusBar ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ToolbarsGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group inside the RibbonViewTab ribbon tab. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding LargeIcon, SmallIcon, Text and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowTableGridlines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowBookmarkMarkers ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowTextFrameMarkersLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowDrawingFrameMarkersLines ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowControlChars ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Identifies the TXITEM_ShowFrameAnchors ribbon item inside the TXITEM_ShowGroup ribbon group. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding SmallIcon, Text, ToolTipTitle, ToolTipDescription and KeyTip resources.

Each RibbonDropDownItem represents a drop-down item in the RibbonViewTab.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_25 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_50 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_75 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_100 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_150 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_200 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Identifies the TXITEM_ZoomFactor_400 drop-down item inside the TXITEM_ZoomFactor's drop-down menu. The string conversion of that identifier can be passed to the appropriate ResourceProvider method to get the corresponding Text resource.

Finds a control that has the provided RibbonViewTab.RibbonItem identifier.

Specifies the identifier of the requested control.